Yamaha BD-A1010 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: BD-A1010

Categoría: Reproductores de Blu-Ray

Tipo: El manual del propietario

BD-A1010

Printed in Malaysia WZ02530

BLU-RAY DISC PLAYER

BD-A1010

OWNER’S MANUAL

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

사용 설명서

KALVP

(전원 키)

본 기기의 전원을 켜거나 대기 모드에 맞추십시오.

00_BD-A1010_K_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, April 19, 2011 2:52 PM

Caution-i En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place –

away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,

moisture, and/or cold. For proper ventilation, allow the

following minimum clearances.

Top: 10 cm (4 in)

Rear: 10 cm (4 in)

Sides: 10 cm (4 in)

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,

motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and

liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and

may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting

from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable

disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press p to set this unit to the

standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the

outlet, then leave this unit alone.

19 When using this unit for a long time, this unit may become

warm. Turn the power off, then leave this unit alone for

cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or the like.

LASER SAFETY

This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury, only a

qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt

to service this device.

DANGER

This unit emits visible laser radiation when open. Avoid

direct eye exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged into

the wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening of

the disc tray and other openings to look into inside.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source

as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this

unit itself is turned off by p. This state is called the

standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE.

The laser component in this product is capable of

emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may result

in hazardous radiation exposure.

LASER Specification:

Class 1 LASER Product

Wave length: 790 nm (CDs)/655 nm (DVDs)/405 nm (BDs)

Laser output: max. 1 mW

1 En

English

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS PLAYER........ 2

SUPPLIED PARTS .............................................. 2

ABOUT DISCS AND FILES................................. 3

Types of discs/files that can be used with this Player .... 3

Loading a disc................................................................. 4

Disc precautions ............................................................. 4

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .......................... 5

Front panel...................................................................... 5

Remote control ............................................................... 6

INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTIONS .............. 10

Rear panel ..................................................................... 10

HDMI CONNECTION......................................... 12

Connecting to the HDMI terminal................................ 12

Connection for the playback of Blu-ray 3D discs ........ 12

VIDEO CONNECTIONS .................................... 13

Connecting to the component/video jack ..................... 13

AUDIO CONNECTIONS .................................... 14

Connecting to the digital audio jack/terminal............... 14

Connecting to the audio jacks....................................... 15

NETWORK AND USB CONNECTION .............. 16

Connecting to the NETWORK terminal and USB port

.... 16

OTHER CONNECTIONS ................................... 17

Connecting to the REMOTE CONTROL jacks ........... 17

Connecting the power cable ......................................... 17

INITIAL WIZARD/EASY SETUP........................ 18

Setting with the Initial Wizard/Easy Setup................... 18

HOME/MEDIA MENU ........................................ 19

Playing back photo/music/video................................... 19

Using network content.................................................. 21

USING NETWORK SERVICES ......................... 22

PLAYING VIDEOS FROM YouTube™ ............. 22

ADVANCED PLAYBACK OPERATION............ 23

On Screen menu............................................................ 23

Status menu................................................................... 24

Using Bookmark........................................................... 25

Program play................................................................. 25

Using search ................................................................. 25

Enjoying BONUSVIEW™ and BD-Live™................. 26

Using Picture in Picture function

(secondary audio/video playback) ........................... 26

Using the feature of BD-Live™ ................................... 26

SETUP MENU.................................................... 27

Example of SETUP menu operation ............................ 29

General Setting ............................................................. 30

Display Setting ............................................................. 32

Audio Setting................................................................ 34

System Information ...................................................... 34

About the audio output formats .................................... 35

About the video output formats .................................... 36

SOFTWARE UPGRADE.................................... 37

Upgrading the software ................................................ 37

TROUBLESHOOTING....................................... 38

Power ............................................................................ 38

Basic operation.............................................................. 38

Disc playback................................................................ 38

Picture ........................................................................... 39

Sound ............................................................................ 39

Network......................................................................... 40

Messages on the screen ................................................. 40

GLOSSARY ....................................................... 41

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 42

General.......................................................................... 42

Audio performance ....................................................... 42

Input/output................................................................... 42

(at the end of this manual)

■ About this manual

– This manual describes how to operate this Player

using a remote control except when it is not

available. Some of these operations are also

available using the front panel buttons.

– Notes contain important information about safety

and operating instructions. Hint(s) indicates a tip for

your operation.

– This manual is printed prior to production. Design

and specifications are subject to change in part as a

result of improvements, etc. In case of differences

between the manual and the product, the product has

priority.

The icons used in this manual

Icons are used to indicate available buttons/functions for a

particular format.

: BD-Video

: DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD+VR, DVD-Audio

: Audio CD, Super Audio CD

: AVCHD, WMV, DivX

: MP3, WMA, WAV

: JPEG

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION

2. CONNECTION

3. PLAYBACK

4. SETTINGS

5. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Information about software ....................................i

DVD

VIDEO

MUSIC

PHOTO

2 En

INTRODUCTION

* For details on playable disc and format, see page 3.

** Network setting is needed to use this function.

Make sure the following accessories are provided with the product.

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS PLAYER

Easy setting for language, resolution, screen aspect ratio \ p. 18

You can perform language and TV settings.

Play back commercially-released Blu-ray™/DVD/CD/SA-CD/DVD-

Audio discs

\ p. 23

In addition to Blu-ray Discs™ (BD discs), this Player also supports playback of a variety of

other discs.

Play back BONUSVIEW™, BD-Live™, etc.

\ p. 26

You can enjoy additional movies on the latest BD discs.

Play back Video, Music, Photo files on a disc

\ p. 19

This Player can play back discs you recorded.

Play back Video, Music, Photo files on a disc/USB memory device

\ p. 19

Files recorded on discs/USB memory devices can be played back with this Player.

Play back Video, Music, Photo files on a Home Network Server

\ p. 21

PC contents can be played back with TV or AV receiver by connecting this Player to a network

server.

Operation with the remote control of TV, AV receiver, etc. \ p. 30

Connecting devices with an HDMI cable, you can control devices with a single remote control

using the HDMI Control function.

Streaming Playback contents on the Network Services

\ p. 22

You can instantly enjoy videos over the internet with this Player.

SUPPLIED PARTS

Batteries (×2)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Power cableRemote control Audio pin cable Video pin cable

3 En

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Types of discs/files that can be

used with this Player

– 12 cm (5”) and 8 cm (3”) discs can be played back in

this Player. Do not use an 8 cm (3”) to 12 cm (5”)

adapter.

– Use discs that conform to compatible standards as

indicated by the presence of official logos on the

disc label. Playback of discs not complying with

these standards is not guaranteed. In addition, the

image quality or sound quality is not guaranteed

even if the discs can be played back.

– BD/DVD Video players and discs have region

codes, which dictate the regions in which a disc can

be played.

– BD/DVD Video operations and functions may be

different from the explanations in this manual and

some operations may be prohibited due to disc

manufacturer’s settings.

– If a menu screen or operating instructions are

displayed during playback of a disc, follow the

operating procedure displayed.

– Playback for some of the discs in the left side

column tables may not be possible depending on the

disc.

– Finalize all recording media that is played back in

this Player.

– “Finalize” refers to a recorder processing a recorded

disc so that it will play in other players/recorders as

well as this Player. Only finalized discs will play

back in this Player. (This Player does not have a

function to finalize discs.)

– Playback of all files on the disc, USB memory

device and network is not guaranteed.

ABOUT DISCS AND FILES

Disc Type

Recording

Format

Data Format

BD-ROM/BD-R/

BD-RE

BD-Video --

DVD-ROM DVD-Video/DVD-

Audio

DVD-R/DVD-R DL/

DVD-RW

DVD-Video/DVD-

VR/AVCHD/Data

Disc

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

DVD+R/DVD+R

DL/DVD+RW

DVD-Video/

DVD+VR/AVCHD/

Data Disc

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

CD-ROM CDDA/HDCD --

CD-R/CD-RW CDDA/Data Disc DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

SA-CD SA-CD --

USB -- DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

Network -- WMV/MP3/WMA/

WAV/JPEG

Region management information

Destination BD-Video DVD-Video

U.S.A. and Canada Region code “A” or

“ALL”

Region number “1”

or “ALL”

Asia Region code “A” or

“ALL”

Region number “3”

or “ALL”

Taiwan Region code “A” or

“ALL”

Region number “3”

or “ALL”

ALL

Korea Region code “A” or

“ALL”

Region number “3”

or “ALL”

Central and South

America

Region code “A” or

“ALL”

Region number “4”

or “ALL”

Europe Region code “B” or

“ALL”

Region number “2”

or “ALL”

Australia Region code “B” or

“ALL”

Region number “4”

or “ALL”

Russia Region code “C” or

“ALL”

Region number “5”

or “ALL”

Notes

Region management information

Destination BD-Video DVD-Video

ALL

4 En

ABOUT DISCS AND FILES

– A copyright protected file cannot be played back via

USB memory device and network.

MP3/WMA/WAV audio file requirement

– Sampling frequency: within 32 - 48 kHz (MP3/

WMA), LPCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit/Stereo (WAV)

– Bitrate: within 8 - 320 kbps (MP3), 32 - 192 kbps

(WMA)

WMV file requirement

– WMV9, maximum resolution is 1,920 × 1,080.

About Super Audio CD (SA-CD)

– Audio format based upon the current CD standards

but includes a greater amount of information that

provides higher quality sound. There are three types

of discs: single layer, dual layer and hybrid discs.

The hybrid disc can be played on existing CD

players as well as Super Audio CD players since it

contains both standard audio CD and Super Audio

CD information.

– This player supports DSD data transmission via

HDMI using a compatible AV receiver.

– This unit does not show the text data included in the

discs on the front panel display.

■ Loading a disc

– Insert the disc with the label face up.

– In case of the disc recorded on both sides, face down

the side to play back.

– Playback may begin automatically, depending on the

disc and setting of this Player.

– The menu may be displayed first, depending on the

disc.

– The disc load time may vary depending on the disc.

■ Disc precautions

Be careful of scratches and dust

– BD, DVD and CD discs are sensitive to dust,

fingerprints and especially scratches. A scratched

disc may not be able to be played back. Handle discs

with care and store them in a safe place.

Proper disc storage

Handling precautions

Cleaning the pick up lens

– Never use commercially available cleaning discs.

The use of these discs can damage the lens.

– Request the nearest service center approved by

Yamaha to clean the lens.

Hint

Note

Super Audio CD disc type

Single layer disc

HD layer

Dual layer disc

Hybrid layer disc

HD layer

CD layer

HD layer

Hybrid Super Audio CD disc

CD layer that plays on any

CD player

- High Quality DSD Stereo

- High Quality DSD Multi-channel

High Density layer containing:

Notes

Place the disc in the center of the disc case

and store the case and disc upright.

Avoid storing discs in locations subject to

direct sunlight, close to heating appliances

or in locations of high humidity.

Do not drop discs or subject them to

strong vibrations or impacts.

Avoid storing discs in locations where

there are large amounts of dust or

moisture.

– If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a

soft, damp (water only) cloth. When

wiping discs, always move the cloth from

the center hole toward the outer edge.

– Do not use record cleaning sprays,

benzene, thinner, static electricity

prevention liquids or any other solvent.

– Do not touch the surface.

– Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.

– If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched,

the Player may decide that the disc is incompatible

and eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc

correctly. Wipe any dirt off the playing surface with

a soft cloth.

5 En

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Front panel

1 p (On/Standby)

2 USB port (p. 16)

3 SA-CD indicator: Lights up when an SA-CD is

loaded and the SA-CD layer (p. 4) is selected.

4 Front panel display

5 Disc tray (p. 4)

6 (Eject): Opens/closes the disc tray.

7 (Search backward/Skip backward):

Press to skip backward, and press and hold to search

backward.

8 (Search forward/Skip forward):

Press to skip forward, and press and hold to search

forward.

9 (Play)

0 (Pause)

A (Stop)

B PURE DIRECT: Press to change the Pure Direct

mode (p. 7) to mode 1/mode 2/off. This button lights

up when Pure Direct mode is set to mode 1/mode 2.

Loading the batteries in the remote

control

– Do not subject the remote control unit to shock,

water or excessive humidity.

– The remote control unit may not function if the

Player’s remote sensor is in direct sunlight or any

other strong light.

– Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or

burst. Read the battery warnings and use the

batteries properly.

– Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix different

brands.

– Remove the batteries if you will not use the remote

control unit for an extended period of time.

– Dispose of batteries according to your regional

regulations.

Approximate operating range of

remote control

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

2 5 61 43 7 8 9 0 A B

Notes

30˚30˚

Remote control sensor

6 m (20 ft)

6 En

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

■ Remote control

– will appear on the top left corner of the screen

when the pressed button is not available.

1 Infrared signal transmitter: Outputs infrared

signal. Aim this window to the remote control sensor

(p. 5).

2 MARKER : Sets Bookmark (p. 25) at

a specified point of a movie. After Bookmark is set, to

select the set point you want to jump to, press

DIGEST. You can set up to 12 Bookmarks.

3 : Opens/closes the disc tray.

4 PROGRAM : Sets the order of playback

(p. 25). You can set up to 15 tracks (for an audio disc)

or titles/chapters (DVD-Video).

5 Color buttons : Use these buttons according to

on-screen instructions.

6 Number buttons: Enters numbers, or during

playback, jumps to the track/chapter corresponding to

the number you input. These buttons may not be

available depending on the disc type and playback

condition.

7 CLEAR: Clears entered number/set item.

8 SETUP: Displays SETUP menu screen (p. 27).

9 PIP : Turns on/off the Picture in Picture (p. 26).

PIP Mark ( ) is displayed on the screen when this

function is available. You can also select this item from

On Screen menu (p. 23).

– PIP Mark is displayed only when the PIP Mark is set

to on (p. 31).

0 2ND AUDIO : Selects the secondary audio of

the Picture in Picture (p. 26) or audio commentaries.

The Secondary Audio Mark ( ) is displayed on the

screen when this function is available (p. 34). You can

also select this item from On Screen menu (p. 23).

– Secondary Audio Mark is displayed only when

Secondary Audio Mark is set to on (p. 31).

Note

DVD

VIDEO

DVD CD

7 En

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

A TOP MENU : Displays the top menu

screen (p. 42) if the disc contains a menu. Select the

desired item using 5/a /2/3 and ENTER.

– Specific operations may be different depending on

the disc. Follow the instructions of each menu

screen.

B Cursor buttons (5/a /2/3): Moves the focus in

the menu screen.

ENTER: Selects the focused menu/item.

C RETURN: Returns to the previous menu or screen,

etc.

D SUBTITLE : Changes subtitle

languages (p. 42) if available . You can also select this

item from On Screen menu (p. 23).

E STATUS: Displays the playback information (p. 24).

F Control buttons

Searches backward/forward. The search speed will

change each time you press the button (search

backward/forward: 5 steps each). Press to resume

normal playback.

: Changes the speed of a slide show (slower/

faster: 3 steps).

/ :

Press and hold for instant search/replay. Instant search

skips the content 30 seconds. Instant replay replays

the content from 10 seconds before.

/: Skips backward/forward.

: Stops playback. To stop playback completely,

press this button twice.

: Pauses playback.

: Plays back contents.

()/ ()

: Performs slow backward/forward. Slow

playback speed will change each time you press the

button (slow backward/forward: 4 steps each).

These buttons also perform frame advance/reverse

playback during pause.

Press to resume normal playback.

Many DVD-Audio discs include slide show and page

turn capabilities. Press / to move to a previous/

next page. This function is only for DVD-Audio.

– Some BD/DVD discs are not compatible with frame

advance/reverse playback.

– Depending on the disc, this Player resumes playback

from the point that where the Player was previously

stopped. To play back from the beginning, press

twice and then .

G SA-CD/CD: Switches the playback layer of a hybrid

SA-CD between SA-CD and CD (p. 4).

– The SA-CD/CD indicator (p. 5) on the front panel

lights up when an SA-CD is loaded and the SA-CD

layer is selected (p. 34).

– Audio signals are only output from the AUDIO OUT

jacks (p. 11) while the SA-CD layer is selected.

– Audio signals recorded in DSD multi-channel format

cannot be played on this Player.

H PURE DIRECT: Changes Pure Direct mode. Pure

Direct mode shown below will change each time you

press the button. Pure Direct mode improves audio

quality. PURE DIRECT on the front panel lights up

when Pure Direct mode is set to mode 1/mode 2.

Mode 1: Front panel display is turned off, and video

signals are not output. This mode is suitable listening

audio.

Mode 2: Front panel display is turned off, and video

signals from other than HDMI terminal are not output.

This mode is suitable for watching movies with high

quality sound.

off: Normal play back.

I DIMMER: Changes brightness of the front panel

display in 5 steps.

J DIGEST : Shows 12 photo thumbnails.

When thumbnails are displayed, you can proceed to

the next/previous page with / .

: Displays Bookmark select bar

(p. 25).

K p: Turns this Player on or sets it to the standby mode.

L ZOOM : Zooms in/out.

The size of the screen will change each time you press

the button (zoom in/out: 3 steps each).

Note

Notes

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

Hint

Notes

PHOTO

DVD VIDEO

DVD VIDEO PHOTO

Continued to the next page.

8 En

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

M SEARCH :

Jumps to a specified point during playback. For details

on this function, refer to “Using search” (p. 25). You

can also select this item from status menu (p. 24).

N HOME: Displays the HOME menu screen (p. 19).

O REPEAT

: Changes repeat mode. Repeat mode shown

below will change each time you press the button.

: Repeats the title being played back.

: Repeats the chapter being played back.

: Repeats the folder being played back.

: Repeats all tracks/files on the disc.

: Repeats the track/file being played back.

P A/B : Plays back

a specific part you want to repeat.

1 Press A/B at the scene where you want to set the

start point. “A-” is displayed on the screen.

2 Press A/B again at the scene where you want to set

the end point. “A-B” is displayed on the screen.

Repeat playback starts.

3 To cancel the repeat playback, press A/B. “A-B”

disappears and the repeat playback is finished.

– This function cannot be performed depending on the

specifications of the disc.

Q POP-UP/MENU : Displays pop-up

menu. The menu contents displayed vary depending

on the disc. For details on how to see and operate the

pop-up menu, refer to the manual for the disc.

The top menu screen may be displayed by pressing

POP-UP/MENU depending on the DVD.

R ON SCREEN: Displays On Screen menu (p. 23).

S ANGLE : Changes the camera angle if

video is recorded with multiple angles. The Angle

Mark ( ) is displayed on the screen when this

function is available. You can also select this item

from On Screen menu (p. 23).

– Angle Mark is displayed only when the Angle Mark

is set to on (p. 31).

T AUDIO : Changes the audio language or

format. You can also select this item from On Screen

menu (p. 23).

Note

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

9 En

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

ID function

You can change the remote control ID to prevent

unwanted operation of the other Yamaha player such as

DVD player. If you have changed the remote control ID,

make sure that you select the same ID for the main unit.

The default setting is ID1.

1 Remote control setting

To change the ID from ID1 to ID2, press and hold

the red color button and 2 of number button

simultaneously for 7 seconds. To change the ID

from ID2 to ID1, press and hold the red color button

and 1 of number button simultaneously for 7

seconds.

2 Main unit setting

Press and hold and on the

front panel simultaneously for 2 seconds to display

current ID when:

– No disc is inserted in this Player.

– The disc tray is closed.

– Playback is stopped.

– “NO DISC” is displayed on the front panel

display.

Keep pressing and holding the keys for another 2

seconds to change the ID between ID1 and ID2.

– If the remote control is without batteries for a few

minutes or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the remote control ID is

automatically set to ID1. If you want to use the

remote control in ID2 setting, install new batteries

and set the remote control ID again.

Note

10 En

CONNECTION

Find the corresponding connection method on your video/audio equipment. We recommend that you use the HDMI

terminal which provides high quality digital audio and video on a single connection. If you use the other terminals/jacks,

connect the video first. Then connect the audio.

■ Rear panel

INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTIONS

Yes

Use AV receiver?

HDMI terminal on

AV receiver? *

HDMI terminal on TV?

Connect video and audio to TV with HDMI cable.

Connect video to TV.

Connect video to TV with HDMI cable.

Connect video to AV receiver.

Connect video and audio to AV

receiver with HDMI cable.

Refer to owner’s manual

of AV receiver.

START

* When you connect to an AV receiver that cannot output the sound

input via its HDMI terminal, refer to the owner’s manual of your AV

receiver.

67 0 A93214 85

11 En

English

CONNECTION

1 NETWORK (p. 16)

2 HDMI (p. 12)

3 USB port (p. 16)

4 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT/RS-232C) (p. 17)

5 7.1 ch surround (AUDIO OUT) (p. 15)

6 MIXED 2CH (AUDIO OUT) (p. 15)

7 VIDEO (p. 13)

8 COMPONENT (p. 13)

9 COAXIAL (p. 14)

0 OPTICAL (p. 14)

A AC IN (p. 17)

Video connection

Connect audio to AV

receiver.

Video connection to TV

Connect audio to TV.

HDMI (p. 12)

Video and audio connection to

AV receiver

Audio connection to AV receiver

Video and audio connection to TV

Audio connection to TV

HDMI (p. 12)

A’

COMPONENT (p. 13)

VIDEO (p. 13)

to TV

to AV receiver

COMPONENT (p. 13)

B’

VIDEO (p. 13)

C’

COAXIAL (p. 14)

OPTICAL (p. 14)

MIXED 2CH (p. 15)

COAXIAL (p. 14)

D’

OPTICAL (p. 14)

E’

MIXED 2CH (p. 15)

F’

HDMI (p. 12)

A’

7.1 ch surround (p. 15)

12 En

■ Connecting to the HDMI terminal

– You can enjoy high quality digital picture and sound through the HDMI terminal.

– Firmly connect an HDMI cable (commercially available) to the HDMI terminals.

– See page 35 for information on the audio/video output formats.

– Use HIGH SPEED HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the back cover).

Caution!

Do not connect the power cable of this Player until all connections are completed.

HDMI CONNECTION

HDMI IN

This Player

To HDMI terminal

HDMI cable

(commercially available)

– When you use the HDMI Control function,

refer to the “HDMI Control” (p. 30).

– For information on the output mode of HDMI

terminal, refer to the “HDMI” (p. 34).

– When no picture is displayed, refer to

“TROUBLESHOOTING” (p. 39).

■ Connection for the playback

of Blu-ray 3D discs

To enjoy Blu-ray 3D discs on this Player, you need

the following equipments and connections:

– You need a TV and an AV Receiver (if you

need) that have 3D functionality.

– All the components must be connected with

HDMI cables.

– Blu-ray disc should contain 3D images.

Hints

AV receiver

A A’

To HDMI input terminal

13 En

English

CONNECTION

■ Connecting to the component/video jack

– You can enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images through the component jacks.

– Firmly connect a component video cable (commercially available) or a video pin cable to the COMPONENT jacks/

VIDEO jack.

– See page 36 for information on the video output formats.

Caution!

Do not connect the power cable of this Player until all connections are completed.

– If you play back the image via VCR, the image may deteriorate due to the copy guard function.

– To enjoy BD-3D discs on this Player, you need to connect an AV receiver, a TV, and this Player using HDMI

cables. Refer to the previous page.

VIDEO CONNECTIONS

COMPONENT IN

This Player

Component video cable

(commercially available)

AV receiver

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

To COMPONENT

jacks

To component

input jacks

B B’

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

VIDEO

AV INPUT

This Player

Video pin cable

(supplied)

AV receiver TV

(Yellow)

To VIDEO

jack

To video

input jack

(Yellow)

C C’

Notes

14 En

■ Connecting to the digital audio jack/terminal

– You can connect audio equipment or the TV to the COAXIAL jack/OPTICAL terminal.

– Firmly connect a Coaxial digital audio cable (commercially available) or optical cable (commercially available) to

the coaxial digital audio jack or optical digital audio terminal.

– See page 35 for information on the audio output formats.

Caution!

Do not connect the power cable of this Player until all connections are completed.

– For information on the output mode of COAXIAL jack/OPTICAL terminal, refer to the “Coaxial/Optical” (p. 34).

AUDIO CONNECTIONS

Hint

AV INPUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO IN

OPTICAL

This Player

To OPTICAL

terminal

TVAV receiver

Optical cable

(commercially available)

Coaxial digital audio cable

(commercially available)

This Player

AV receiver

D D’

To COAXIAL

jack

To coaxial

input jack

To optical

input terminal

D’ E E’

AUDIO CONNECTIONS

15 En

English

CONNECTION

■ Connecting to the audio jacks

– You can connect audio equipment or the TV to the MIXED 2CH/7.1 ch surround jacks.

– Firmly connect audio pin cables (supplied and commercially available) to the MIXED 2CH jacks or 7.1 ch

surround jacks.

– See page 35 for information on the audio output formats.

– If you want to reproduce multi-channel SA-CD and DVD-Audio, connect 7.1 ch surround jacks to the

corresponding input jacks of your AV receiver using commercially available audio pin cables.

Caution!

Do not connect the power cable of this Player until all connections are completed.

– You can connect a subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack directly. When you connect TV to this Player directly,

connect an active subwoofer such as Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System to this jack.

– To output the audio signal from the MIXED 2CH/7.1 ch surround jacks, refer to “Speaker Setting” (p. 34).

AUDIO

AUDIO IN

To AUDIO OUT

MIXED 2CH jacks

Audio pin cable

(supplied)

(White)

(Red)

(White) (Red)

TVAV receiver

s Player

To audio input

jacks

F F’

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

MULTICH IN

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

FRONT

CENTER SUBWOOFER

AV receiver

s Player

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

Audio pin

cables

(supplied and

commercially

available)

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

To 7.1 ch

surround

jacks

MULTI

CH IN

jacks

(White) (Red) (White) (Red) (White) (Red)

Hints

16 En

■ Connecting to the NETWORK terminal and USB port

– PC contents can be played back by connecting this Player to the network.

– You can enjoy a variety of contents with interactive functions by connecting to the internet when playing BD-Live

compatible discs. Refer to page 26 regarding further information on BD-Live functions.

– You can connect a USB memory device (2 GB or greater and formatted with FAT 32/16) for BD Local Storage to

the USB port on the rear panel (or front panel) of the player to save the BD-Live data or to upgrade the software of

this Player.

– Firmly connect a network cable (commercially available) and a USB memory device (commercially available) to

the NETWORK terminal and USB port.

– Use only an STP (shielded twisted pair) network cable.

– When using the internet, a broadband internet connection as shown below is required.

– Connect the other connector of the network cable to the hub/broadband router.

Before using the USB memory device

After connecting

– When you set the Network setting manually, refer to “Network” (p. 32).

– To play back the PC contents on your network, refer to “Using network content” (p. 21).

NETWORK AND USB CONNECTION

LAN

This Player

– When using a broadband internet

connection, a contract with an internet

service provider is required. For more

details, contact your nearest internet service

provider.

– Refer to the operation manual of the

equipment you have as the connected

equipment and connection method may

differ depending on your internet

environment.

– Use a network cable/router supporting

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.

CAUTION:

– Do not remove the USB memory device

or unplug the power cable while the

operations for BD-Live (p. 26) or

software upgrade are being performed.

– Do not use a USB extension cable when

connecting a USB memory device to the

USB port of the Player. Using a USB

extension cable may prevent the Player

from performing correctly.

– Yamaha cannot guarantee that all brands’

USB memory devices will operate with

this Player.

Notes

Note

To NETWORK

terminal

Internet

Modem

Network cable

(commercially available)

Hub or

broadband router

To USB port

USB memory device

(commercially available)

To LAN

terminal

– To save BD-Live data on

the USB memory device

on the front panel, set

Local Storage to Front

USB (p. 30).

Hint

17 En

English

CONNECTION

■ Connecting to the REMOTE

CONTROL jacks

– You can transmit and receive the remote control

signals by connecting to the REMOTE CONTROL

(OUT/IN) jacks.

– Firmly connect monaural 3.5 mm mini plug cables

(commercially available) to the REMOTE

CONTROL (OUT/IN) jacks.

– If your AV receiver is a Yamaha product and has the

capability to transmit SCENE control signals, you

can control the Player with the SCENE function.

Caution!

Do not connect the power cable of this

Player until all connections are completed.

– For details about the SCENE function, refer to the

owner’s manual supplied with your Yamaha AV

receiver.

– You can connect a Yamaha component (such as CD

player) supports the SCENE function to the

REMOTE CONTROL (OUT) jack of this Player.

– The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion

terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for

details.

■ Connecting the power cable

– After all connections are completed, plug the

supplied power cable into the AC IN on the rear of

the Player. Then plug into AC outlet.

– TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO

NOT TOUCH THE UN-INSULATED PARTS OF

ANY CABLES WHILE THE POWER CABLE IS

CONNECTED.

OTHER CONNECTIONS

Hints

REMOTE CONTROL IN

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

This Player

To REMOTE

CONTROL (IN)

jack

Monaural 3.5 mm

mini plug cable

(commercially

available)

To remote

control out

jack

Yamaha component

To remote

control in

jack

Monaural 3.5 mm

mini plug cable

(commercially

available)

Infrared signal receiver

or Yamaha component

(such as AV receiver)

To REMOTE

CONTROL

(OUT) jack

Note

To AC outlet

To AC IN

18 En

PLAYBACK

■ Setting with the Initial Wizard/

Easy Setup

Initial Wizard/Easy Setup allows you to set language,

resolution, and screen aspect ratio easily. Initial Wizard

screen is displayed when you turn this Player on for the

first time after purchase or upgrade. Same setting can be

performed from SETUP menu = System = Easy Setup.

1 When Easy Setup screen is displayed, Press ENTER to

start Easy Setup.

2 Press 5/a to select the language you want to display

on the screen, then press ENTER.

3 Press 5 /a to select the resolution, then press ENTER.

For details on setting items, see “Resolution” (p. 33).

4 Press 5/a to select the screen aspect ratio, then press

ENTER. For details on setting items, see “TV Screen”

(p. 32).

Easy Setup is completed.

5 Press ENTER to exit Easy Setup.

– When no picture is displayed after Initial Wizard/

Easy Setup is completed, refer to

“TROUBLESHOOTING” (p. 39).

– A warning message concerning 3D video playback

appears when this Player is turned on. Press ENTER

to dismiss the message or CLEAR to disable it (p.

30).

INITIAL WIZARD/EASY SETUP

Notes

ENTER

FinishPrevious

Setting

Page: 5/5

Easy Setup

The set-up wizard is finished!

Now press the Finish button to go to SETUP. Please

enjoy!

19 En

English

PLAYBACK

HOME and MEDIA menus allow you to browse and play

multi-media files on data discs, USB memory devices and

your network.

– For details on playable disc and format, see page 3.

■ Playing back photo/music/video

Basic operation

5/a : Moves the focus.

2: Returns to the parent folder.

3: Checks/unchecks single folder/file.

HOME: Moves to/exits HOME menu screen.

ENTER: Confirms the folder/file.

Icons on the top of MEDIA menu

: Plays back the disc on the tray, or displays contents

in the data disc.

: Displays contents in the USB memory device

connected to the USB port.

: Searches for a DLNA (p. 21) server on the network.

: Displays contents on the connected DLNA server.

Common operations for playing back

files in a selected folder

Example: Selecting a movie file on a USB memory

device

– Stop the playback of the video before you move to

MEDIA menu screen.

1 Press HOME to move to HOME menu screen.

Press 2/3 to select MEDIA, then press ENTER.

2 MEDIA screen appears.

3 Select the item which contains the file you want to play

back, then press ENTER.

HOME/MEDIA MENU

Note

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

2ND

AUDIO

A/B

HOME

Note

HOME/MEDIA MENU

20 En

4 Select the Photo, Music, Video or AVCHD folder you

want to play back, then press ENTER.

To return to the parent folder, press 2 or select .

– Note that the only the file type selected on this step

will be displayed in the following step. For example,

if you selected Photo folder in this step, only photo

files are displayed after this step. When you play

back other than photo, return to this hierarchy and

select file type again.

5 Select the folder(s) containing the file you want to play

back.

6 Select the file you want to play back, then press

ENTER.

When a video file is selected, playback starts.

When a music file is selected, status screen is displayed

and playback starts.

When a photo file is selected, slide show starts.

– To enjoy slide show with music, press HOME to

return to the HOME menu screen while music is

played back, and select photo file.

– The displayed file may not be played back

depending on the content.

Operations for viewing photos

While viewing photos, the buttons on the remote control

work as shown below.

: Stops slide show and returns to the file browser.

: Pauses a slide show.

: Plays a slide show.

: Moves to a next photo.

: Moves to a previous photo.

: Makes a slide show faster in 3 steps.

: Makes a slide show slower in 3 steps.

5: Inverts a photo.

a : Reflects a photo.

2: Rotates a photo counterclockwise.

3: Rotates a photo clockwise.

ZOOM: Zooms in/out a photo (zoom in/out: 3 steps each).

5/a /2/3 : Pan in zoom mode when a photo is larger

than the screen.

DIGEST: Switches to thumbnail mode (p. 7). When

thumbnails are displayed, you can proceed to the next/

previous page with / .

Note

Hint

Note

HOME/MEDIA MENU

21 En

PLAYBACK

English

■ Using network content

This Player is a DLNA certified digital media player. You

can manage photo, music and video contents stored on

DLNA servers on your home network.

About DLNA

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) provides easy

sharing of digital media through network in the home, and

you can enjoy digital contents stored on your DLNA-

server-software-installed PC or other DLNA compatible

device with your TV via this Player. To connect this

Player to your DLNA servers, some settings for the

DLNA server or device are required. For details, refer to

your DLNA server software or DLNA device.

Playing back shared contents

1 To play back files on your PC, install a DLNA server

software, such as Windows Media Player 12, and share

files you want to play back.

2 Turn on the PC with DLNA server software installed or

the DLNA device connected to your home network.

3 Press HOME to display HOME menu screen. Then

select MEDIA to move to MEDIA menu. The DLNA

servers connected to the network are listed on the

screen.

– If your DLNA server is not listed, select DLNA

Search to find it.

– Depending on the DLNA server, this Player may

need to be permitted from the server.

– To play the file on the DLNA server, this Player and

the server must be connected to the same access

point.

– The file requirements may not always be compatible.

There may be some restrictions depending on file

features and DLNA sever capability.

4 Select the file you want to play back.

– The playback and operating quality may be affected

by your home network condition.

– The files from removable media such as USB

memory devices or DVD-drive on your media

server, may not be shared properly.

Notes

22 En

You can instantly watch the videos that the following network services provide.

– YouTube

– Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account

registration and a paid subscription.

– Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice,

and Yamaha disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences.

– Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages.

– Yamaha does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular

period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.

You can watch movies from YouTube over the internet

using this Player.

The services may be changed without notice.

1 Press HOME to display HOME menu screen.

– The HOME menu screen may differ depending on

the model.

2 Press 5/a /2/3 to select YouTube, then press

ENTER.

– To return to the HOME menu screen, press

RETURN.

USING NETWORK SERVICES

Notes

PLAYING VIDEOS FROM YouTube™

Hint

23 En

English

PLAYBACK

This chapter explains playback of commercially available

BD and DVD discs, SA-CDs, CDs, and recorded DVD-

RW/R discs.

– For the basic playback operation, see page 6.

■ On Screen menu

To display On Screen menu, press ON SCREEN. After

that, press 5/a /2/3 to select an item, then press

ENTER to operate the desired function.

On Screen menu contains following items.

Title : Shows the title number being

played back. You can skip to the desired title by selecting

it from this item.

Chapter : Shows the chapter

number being played back. You can skip to the desired

chapter by selecting it from this item.

Track/File : Shows

track/file number being played back. You can skip to the

desired track/file by selecting it from this item.

Time : Shows the

playback time. Select display type from the following:

– Elapsed playback time of the title, chapter, disc,

track or file

– Remaining playback time of the title, chapter, disc,

track or file

Mode/Play Mode

: Shows current

playback mode. You can select playback mode from the

following:

– Normal: Normal playback.

– Shuffle: Random playback without repetition.

– Random: Random playback with repetition.

– Normal

– Shuffle CH (chapter)

– Shuffle TT (title)

– Shuffle All

– Random CH (chapter)

– Random TT (title)

– Random All

– Normal

– Shuffle F (folder)

– Shuffle All

– Random F (folder)

– Random All

Audio : Shows audio language/

signal of BD/DVD disc currently selected. You can select

the desired type of audio.

Angle : Shows the currently-selected angle

number. If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you

can change the angle.

Subtitle : Shows the currently-

selected subtitle language when the subtitle is provided.

Subtitle Style : Shows the currently-selected

subtitle style. This function is available only for Video-file

external subtitle. You can select the desired text style of

subtitle.

Bitrate : Shows

bitrate of the audio/video signal.

Second Video : Turns the PIP on/off (p. 6).

Second Audio : Turns the secondary audio on/off

(p. 6).

Ins Search

: Skips 30 seconds.

Ins Replay

: Replays the content

from 10 seconds before.

Slide Show :

Shows slide show speed. You can select the slide show

speed from Slow/Medium/Fast.

Transition : Shows how photo appears on the

screen. You can select the transition type.

Code Page : Selects character code of subtitle

you added to DivX video (p. 41).

ADVANCED PLAYBACK OPERATION

Note

BD DVD VIDEO

CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

DVD

VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

VIDEO

ADVANCED PLAYBACK OPERATION

24 En

■ Status menu

This shows various settings, such as subtitles, angle

settings and the title/chapter/track number currently

played back. To display status menu, press STATUS.

Status menu contains following menus.

Example: Icons when playing BD

1 (Playback status)

2 (Disc type/video file icon)

3 (Title number being played): You can jump to

specified title with SEARCH button (p. 8).

4 (Chapter number being played): You can

jump to specified chapter with SEARCH button (p. 8).

5 (Elapsed playback time): You can jump to

specified point with SEARCH button (p. 8).

6 (Subtitle currently selected): You can change

the subtitle language with SUBTITLE button.

7 (Audio currently selected): You can change the

audio language or format with AUDIO button.

(Repeat mode):

Shows current repeat mode (p. 8).

Example: Icons when playing music file

1 (Playback status)

(Repeat mode):

Shows current repeat mode (p. 8).

3 (Disc type/music file icon)

4 (Artwork) : Displays artwork if the file

contains it.

5 (Track/file number being played): You can

jump to specified track with SEARCH button (p. 8).

6 (Information) : Displays music information

if the file contains them.

7 (Elapsed playback time): You can jump to

specified point with SEARCH button (p. 8).

8 (Progress bar) : Shows progress status of

current song.

9 (Audio level meter): displays current volume level.

1 (Playback status)

2 (Photo file icon)

3 (File number being displayed)

(Repeat mode):

Shows current repeat mode (p. 8).

5 (Slide show speed)

BD DVD VIDEO

678

245

DVD CD MUSIC

MUSIC

PHOTO

ADVANCED PLAYBACK OPERATION

25 En

PLAYBACK

English

■ Using Bookmark

This allows you to set Bookmark at the specified point of

the video. After Bookmark is set, you can move to the

point you set using this function. You can set up to 12

Bookmarks.

1 Press MARKER during playing back the movie to set

Bookmark. Bookmark number, and the status are

displayed.

2 After Bookmark is set, press DIGEST to display

Bookmark select bar.

3 Press 2/3 to select the Bookmark you want to play

back, then press ENTER.

Press CLEAR to delete the selected Bookmark.

– When playback is finished (e.g., ejecting the disc,

pressing twice), Bookmarks are automatically

deleted.

■ Program play

This allows you to program playback order of audio disc

tracks or DVD chapters.

Press PROGRAM during playback to display the

PROGRAM window to program playback order.

You can program up to 15 tracks/chapters.

Example: Programming the playback order of CD tracks

1 Press PROGRAM during playback.

2 Press ENTER to program playback order.

For audio disc, press 5/a to select a desired track then

press ENTER.

For DVD-Video disc, select a desired title (shown as

TT) and chapter (shown as CH) instead of a track.

To clear a set track, select the track you want to clear,

then press CLEAR.

Press RETURN to cancel the Program play.

3 After programming is finished, press to set and

start program playback.

4 To cancel program play, stop playback completely by

pressing twice.

■ Using search

This allows you to jump to the specified point during

playback.

1 Press SEARCH during playback. Status bar appears.

2 Press 5/a /2/3 to select one of the item below, then

press ENTER.

– Title number (shown as )

– Chapter number (shown as )

– Elapsed title time (shown as )

– Elapsed chapter time (shown as )

– Track number (shown as )

– Elapsed track time (shown as )

– Elapsed disc time (shown as )

– File number (shown as )

– Elapsed file time (shown as )

3 Press 5/a or number buttons to set/adjust the value of

the focused item, and press ENTER to jump to the

specified point.

4 To close the status bar, press STATUS.

Note

DVD VIDEO

DVD CD

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

VIDEO MUSIC

ADVANCED PLAYBACK OPERATION

26 En

■ Enjoying BONUSVIEW™ and BD-

Live™

This player supports BONUSVIEW (p. 41) (BD-ROM

Profile 1 Version 1.1) and BD-Live (p. 41) (BD-ROM

Profile 2) playback functions.

– Functions and playback method vary depending on

the disc. See the guidance on the disc or the supplied

user’s manual.

■ Using Picture in Picture function

(secondary audio/video playback)

BD-Video that includes secondary audio and video

compatible with Picture in Picture can be played back

with secondary audio and video simultaneously as a small

video in the corner.

While PIP Mark ( ) or Secondary

Audio Mark ( ) is displayed, press

PIP to turn the Picture in Picture

function on/off.

– To listen to secondary audio, make sure that the

Audio Output setting (Coaxial/Optical or HDMI) is

set to PCM or Reencode (p. 34).

– Depending on the disc, to listen to secondary audio,

you may need to set secondary audio to on on the top

menu of the disc (p. 7).

– The secondary audio and video for Picture in Picture

may automatically play back and be removed

depending on the content. Also, playable areas may

be restricted.

■ Using the feature of BD-Live™

1. Set the Network setting (p. 32).

2. Connect the USB memory device

to this Player (p. 16).

BD-Live data is saved in a USB memory device

connected to this Player. To enjoy these functions,

connect a USB memory device (2 GB or greater and

formatted with FAT 32/16) supporting USB 2.0

High Speed (480 Mbit/s) to the USB port that you

select on Local Storage (p. 30). The default setting is

the USB port on the rear panel.

– BUDA folder is created automatically in the USB

memory device when necessary.

– If there is insufficient storage space, the data will not

be copied/downloaded. Delete unneeded data or use

a new USB memory device.

– Some time may be required for the data to load

(read/write).

– Yamaha cannot guarantee that all brands’ USB

memory devices will operate with this Player.

– Do not use a USB extension cable when connecting

a USB memory device to the USB port of the player.

Using a USB extension cable may prevent the player

from performing correctly.

3. Play back the disc.

4. Run BD-Live according to the

instructions on the disc.

– Regarding playback method of BD-Live contents,

etc., perform the operations in accordance with the

instructions in the BD disc manual.

– To enjoy BD-Live functions, perform the network

connection (p. 16) and Network settings (p. 32).

– Refer to “BD-Live Connection” (p. 32) regarding the

setup to restrict access to BD-Live contents.

– The time required to download the provided

programs into the USB memory device connected to

this Player varies depending on the internet

connection speeds and the data volume of the

programs.

– BD-Live programs provided through the internet

may not be able to display the connection depending

on the status (upgrading) of the provider. In such

cases, take out the disc and try again.

– If the BD-Live screen does not appear for a while

after you select the BD-Live function in the BD disc

menu, the USB memory device may not have

enough free space. In such cases, eject the disc from

the player, and then erase the data in the USB

memory device using the “Format” menu in the

“Local Storage” (p. 30).

Note

Notes

Primary video Secondary video

Notes

27 En

English

SETTINGS

The SETUP menu enables various audio/visual settings and adjustments for functions using the remote control unit.

SETUP MENU

Menu/Submenu Item Function Page

General Setting

System Screen Saver Sets screen saver on/off. 30

Disc Auto Playback Sets this Player to start disc playback automatically. 30

HDMI Control Sets this Player to receive control signal from the remote

control of your TV/AV receiver.

Network Control Sets the control via Ethernet to on/off. 30

Load Default Resets all settings to the default setting except Security

setting.

Upgrade Performs upgrade of this Player. 30

Easy Setup Sets language, resolution, screen aspect ratio. 30

Local Storage Displays status of Local Storage (p. 30), formats Local

Storage and selects the front/rear USB port for Local Storage.

3D Playback

Message

Displays a warning message concerning 3D video playback

when this Player is turned on.

Language OSD Selects the language for On Screen Display. 31

Menu Prioritizes the language for disc menu. 31

Audio Prioritizes the language for audio. 31

Subtitle Prioritizes the language for subtitle. 31

Playback Closed Caption Sets the closed caption to on/off. 31

Angle Mark Sets to display the Angle Mark when BD/DVD with multiple

angles is played back.

PIP Mark Sets to display the PIP Mark when BD/DVD with Picture in

Picture is played back.

Secondary Audio

Mark

Sets to display the Secondary Audio Mark when BD/DVD

with secondary audio is played back.

DivX(R) VOD

DRM

Displays registration code for DivX(R) video.

DVD-Audio Mode Sets DVD-Audio mode to DVD-Audio/DVD-Video. 31

Security Change Password Changes password for Parental Control and Country Code. 31

Parental Control Sets the Parental Control depending on the disc content. 31

Country Code Sets your Country Code. 31

Network Internet Connection Sets the internet connection to Enable/Disable. 32

Information Displays network information screen. 32

Connection Test Performs the network connection test. 32

IP Setting Sets the IP setting to Auto/Manual. 32

BD-Live

Connection

Sets the BD-Live connection to Permitted/Partial Permitted/

Prohibited.

DLNA Sets the DLNA to Enable/Disable. 32

Proxy Setting Sets the proxy setting. 32

SETUP MENU

28 En

Display Setting

TV 3D Output Selects 3D or 2D videos. 32

TV Screen Sets the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust

the video output.

Resolution Selects the resolution of output video. 33

TV System Selects the TV System from NTSC/PAL/Multi. 33

Color Space Selects Color Space from RGB/YCbCr 4:4:4/YCbCr 4:2:2/

Full RGB.

HDMI Deep Color Selects HDMI Deep Color from 30 bits/36 bits/Off. 33

HDMI 1080p 24Hz Sets HDMI 1080p 24Hz to auto/off. 33

Lip Sync Adjusts the lag between video and audio, such as when the

mouth movement is out of sync with the voice.

Video Process Video Mode Adjusts the visual image. 33

Color Adjust Adjusts Brightness/Saturation/Hue for each color. 33

Auto Contrast Adjusts contrast to optimize the played back image. 33

Noise Reduction Sets the level of Noise Reduction. 33

De-interlacing

Mode

Sets how to detect the video signal.

Audio Setting

Audio Output Coaxial/Optical Selects the output mode of COAXIAL jack/OPTICAL

terminal from Bitstream/PCM/Reencode/Off.

HDMI Selects the output mode of HDMI terminal from Bitstream/

PCM/Reencode/Off.

Downsampling Selects the digital audio signal down sampling frequency

from 48k/96k/192k.

DRC Sets the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression). 34

SACD Output SACD Priority Selects a contents when Hybrid SA-CD is played back. 34

HDMI Output Selects the output mode of HDMI terminal from DSD/PCM

when SA-CD is played back.

Speaker Setting Configuration Sets the audio output of 7.1 ch surround jack. 34

2ch Downmix Selects down mix method to analog 2-ch. 34

Post Process Up Mix Multi-channelizes the 2-channel audio signal. 34

System

Information

Displays software version and MAC address (p. 42).

Menu/Submenu Item Function Page

SETUP MENU

29 En

SETTINGS

English

■ Example of SETUP menu

operation

You need to call up the SETUP menu screen to perform

settings for this Player. The following is the explanation

for basic operations of the SETUP menu.

Example: Setting Parental Control

– Some items cannot be set during playback. In this

case, press twice to stop playback completely

before setting.

1. Display the SETUP menu screen.

Press SETUP to display the SETUP menu screen.

Press 2/3 to select General Setting, then press

ENTER or a .

2. Select a Submenu.

Press 5/a to select Security, then press ENTER or

cursor 3.

3. Select a menu item.

Press 5/a to select Parental Control, then press

ENTER or cursor 3.

4. Enter password.

Enter your password with number buttons.

– The default password is 0000.

– You cannot move to the next setting screen until

you have input the correct password.

– To change the password, refer to “Change

Password” (p. 31).

5. Select a next item.

Press 5/a to select the Parental Control Level for

BD/DVD, then press ENTER.

6. Exit the menu screen.

Press 2 to return to the previous menu.

Note

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

CLEAR SEARCH

SETUP

PIP

REPEAT

HOME

SETUP MENU

30 En

■ General Setting

The default settings are marked with “

”.

System

Screen Saver

You can set the screen saver to on/off.

When set to on, this Player will switch to screen saver

mode if there is no operation for 3 minutes. After that, this

Player will turn to standby mode when there is no

operation for 6 minutes.

, Off

Disc Auto Playback

You can set Disc Auto Playback to on/off. When set to on,

a disc will play back automatically after loading.

, Off

HDMI Control

You can set the Player to receive control signal from a

TV/AV receiver compatible with the HDMI Control

function via an HDMI cable (p. 12).

On, Off

Network Control

You can set control via Ethernet to on/off. This player

employs Yamaha Network Control protocol (YNC).

On, Off

– When set to on, power consumption during standby

mode increases due to network control function.

– When set to on, the system startup time is decreased.

Load Default

You can reset all settings of this Player to default setting

except Security setting (p. 31). For details on default

settings, see pages 27-34.

Upgrade

You can upgrade the software manually from Disc, USB

Storage or Network. For details on software upgrade, refer

to “SOFTWARE UPGRADE” (p. 37).

Easy Setup

You can perform Easy Setup (p. 18).

Local Storage

You can display Local Storage information, format Local

Storage, and select Front USB/Rear USB to save the BD-

Live data.

To format (empty) the “BUDA” folder in the USB

memory device, select Information and press ENTER

when “Format” is focused on the screen.

Front USB, Rear USB

– Local Storage is used as an auxiliary memory when

Blu-ray Disc is played back.

3D Playback Message

You can turn on or off a warning message concerning 3D

video playback that appears on the TV when this Player is

turned on.

, Off

Using HDMI Control function

Using the HDMI Control function, you can interactively

operate this Player with your TV (HDMI Control

function supported).

When you connect this Player to the TV compatible with

the HDMI Control function using an HDMI cable and

set HDMI Control in the SETUP menu to on (p. 30), you

can perform the function listed below.

• Automatic input select function

When you start playback of this Player, the input

selector of the TV (and an AV receiver if this Player is

connected to the TV via the AV receiver) is switched

to this Player automatically. TV Power is turned on

automatically depending on the TV.

• Automatic power off function

When you turn off the TV while this Player is in stop

mode and the SETUP menu screen is not displayed,

the power of this Player is also turned off

automatically.

– HDMI Control function may not work properly

depending on the TV.

– Functions other than ones shown above may work

depending on the TV or AV receiver.

– In order to make the HDMI Control function

available, set up settings for the HDMI Control

function on ALL components (this Player, TV,

and AV receiver). Certain operation may also be

required.

– Each function may be set independently to

activate/deactivate depending on the TV.

– Refer to the operation manuals supplied with the

TV and/or AV receiver for details regarding setup.

– When set to on, power consumption during

standby mode increases due to HDMI control

function.

Notes

Hint

SETUP MENU

31 En

SETTINGS

English

Language

OSD

You can select the language for On Screen Display which

is the messages or menu displayed on the screen such as

SETUP menu.

English

, , , , ,

, ,

You can prioritize the language for disc menu.

English

, , , , , ,

, Portuguese, Danish, , Finnish,

Norwegian, , Korean, Japanese, More

Audio

You can prioritize the audio language for BD/DVD

playback. For details on setting items, see “Menu” (p. 31).

Subtitle

You can prioritize the language for Subtitle.

English, , , , , ,

, Portuguese, Danish, , Finnish,

Norwegian, , Korean, Japanese, More, Off

Playback

Closed Caption

You can set to display the closed caption (p. 41) when BD/

DVD with closed caption is played back.

On, Off

Angle Mark

You can set to display the Angle Mark ( ) when BD/

DVD with multiple angles is played back.

, Off

PIP Mark

You can set to display the PIP Mark ( ) when BD with

picture in picture (p. 26) is played back.

, Off

Secondary Audio Mark

You can set to display the Secondary Audio Mark ( )

when BD with secondary audio is played back.

, Off

DivX(R) VOD DRM

You can display registration code for DivX(R) video.

DVD-Audio Mode

Some DVD-Audio discs contain the DVD-Video content

in addition to the DVD-Audio content. You can select

DVD-Audio mode or DVD-Video mode.

– This setting is only available when no disc is loaded.

Security

Change Password

You can set the password for changing the Parental

Control Level and Country Code. Refer to “Parental

Control” (p. 31) and “Country Code” (p. 31).

– The default password is 0000.

– If you forget the password, refer to

“TROUBLESHOOTING” (p. 38) and set all the

Security settings to their default settings.

Parental Control

In some BD/DVD discs, a control level for disc viewing is

set depending on the age of the viewer. You can set the

Parental Control shown on the screen depending on the

disc content.

The password (see “Change Password” on p. 31) needs to

be entered before the Parental Control Levels is set.

After you set the Parental Control, when you play back a

disc with level higher than current Parental Control Level,

or you want to change the Parental Control Level, a dialog

box will pop up to ask you to enter the password.

Off*, 1 to 8

Country Code

You can set the Country Code you live in. The password

(see “Change Password” on p. 31) needs to be entered

before the Country Code is set. This setting may be used

for rating of Parental Control and disc playback.

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Svenska Nederlandse

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

DVD-AUDIO

Both DVD-Audio/Video contents are played back.

Only the DVD-Audio content may be played back

depending on the disc.

DVD-VIDEO Only the DVD-Video content is played back.

Note

Notes

SETUP MENU

32 En

Network

Internet Connection

Set this item to Enable when you use BD-Live (p. 26), DLNA

(p. 21) and software upgrade from the network (p. 37).

Enable

, Disable

Information

You can display network information screen. On this

screen, you can view the information of Interface

(Ethernet), Address Type, IP Address, Subnet Mask,

Default Gateway, and DNS.

Connection Test

You can perform an internet connection test. If the test is

failed, please check “IP Setting” (p. 32) and perform the

test again.

IP Setting

You can configure the network settings.

– Numeric keys Enters characters.

– 2/3 Moves the highlight.

– CLEAR Deletes a character.

– ENTER Saves the settings and exits from

the menu.

BD-Live Connection

You can set access restriction to BD-Live contents.

DLNA

You can set the DLNA (p. 21) to Enable/Disable. When

you do not use the DLNA function, set to Disable.

Enable

, Disable

Proxy Setting

You can set Proxy Setting. Set to Disable for normal use.

Set to Enable to set the proxy setting.

■ Display Setting

The default settings are marked with “

”.

3D Output

You can select 3D or 2D video output from this Player.

– Even if you set “3D Output” to “Auto” and play

back a Blu-ray 3D disc, this Player selects 2D

images depending on the connection and the setting

of TV, etc (p. 12).

TV Screen

You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV,

and adjust the video output.

If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a

new one) and the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV

changes, you will have to change the TV Screen setting.

Auto* Select to automatically configure the network

settings of this Player with the DHCP server.

Manual Select to configure the network settings (IP Address,

Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS) manually.

Hints

Permitted

Allows all BD-Live discs to connect the network.

Partial

Permitted

Allows only discs with owner certification.

Prohibited Prohibits all BD-Live discs to connect the network.

Enable Enables proxy host and proxy port setting.

Disable

Sets proxy server to disable. Select this item when

proxy server is not used.

Proxy Host Sets proxy host.

Proxy Port Sets proxy port.

Auto* This Player automatically selects 3D or 2D videos.

Off This Player always selects 2D videos.

Note

16:9 Full Select this when this Player is connected to a TV

with a 16:9 screen. When a 4:3 aspect ratio video is

played back, the video is displayed as shown below.

16:9 Normal

Select this when this Player is connected to a TV

with a 16:9 screen. When a 4:3 aspect ratio video is

played back, the video is displayed as shown below.

4:3 Pan Scan Select this when this Player is connected to a TV

with a 4:3 screen. When a 16:9 aspect ratio video is

played back, the video is displayed as shown below.

4:3 Letterbox Select this when this Player is connected to a TV

with a 4:3 screen. When a 16:9 aspect ratio video is

played back, the video is displayed as shown below.

Original

image size

On 16:9 (wide screen) TV

16:9 Full 16:9 Normal

4:3

Original

image size

On 4:3 TV

4:3 Pan Scan 4:3 Letterbox

16:9

SETUP MENU

33 En

SETTINGS

English

Resolution

You can select the video output resolution from Auto,

480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p. When set

to Auto, resolution is set to the maximum resolution

according to the connected TV. For more details on output

formats, refer to “About the video output formats” (p. 36).

Auto

, 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p

– To output HD audio (such as Dolby TrueHD or

DTS-HD Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set

Resolution to Auto or more than 720p.

TV System

You can select TV System from PAL, NTSC and Multi.

Set the same TV System as your TV set. For more details

on output formats, refer to “About the video output

formats” (p. 36).

Color Space

You can select the Color Space (p. 41) output from

HDMI. This function is available when this Player is

connected with an HDMI cable.

– This function is only available on TVs that support

this function.

HDMI Deep Color

When your TV and/or AV receiver is compatible with

Deep Color (p. 41), set this item according to your TV/AV

receiver. This function is available when this Player is

connected with an HDMI cable.

30 bits, 36 bits, Off

HDMI 1080p 24Hz

This outputs the BD-Video encoded in 24Hz frame rate in

HDMI 1080p 24Hz. Smoother video playback may be

available with this function. This function is available

when your TV/AV receiver support this function, and this

Player is connected with an HDMI cable. For more details

on output formats, refer to “About the video output

formats” (p. 36).

Auto

, Off

– This setting is disabled when output resolution is

other than 1080p.

Lip Sync

You can set/adjust the Lip Sync (p. 42) function.

Video Process

Video Mode

You can select Video Mode below.

Color Adjust

You can adjust Brightness/Saturation/Hue for each color

(Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta). To use this

function, set Video Mode to Custom. For details on the

setting items, see “Video Mode” (p. 33).

The default settings are 0.

Auto Contrast

Adjusts contrast to optimize the played back image.

To use this function, set Video Mode to Custom.

Off

, On

Noise Reduction

You can set the Noise Reduction to a level of 0 to 3. 0 is

off, and 3 is the maximum level.

, 1, 2, 3

Note

NTSC, PAL

, Multi

(Australia, Asia, U.K., Europe and Russia

models)

NTSC

, PAL, Multi

(U.S.A., Canada, Central and South America,

Taiwan and Korea models)

RGB Outputs video signal at normal signal range.

YCbCr 4:4:4

Sets Color Space to YCbCr 4:4:4.

YCbCr 4:2:2 Sets Color Space to YCbCr 4:2:2.

Full RGB When RGB is set and white and black on the screen

are too faint, select this item. This setting is effective

when a connected component supports RGB 0-255

range.

Note

Auto* This Player adjusts the Lip Sync function

automatically.

Manual You can adjust the Lip Sync function manually. You

can set the delay of the audio for 2D and 3D contents

independently.

Off This Player does not adjust the Lip Sync function.

Standard* The image is most natural and well-balanced. This

mode suits for normal use.

Vivid The image is more vivid and sharp.

Cinema The image suits for watching movie in dark room.

Custom You can adjust the visual image manually. Press 5 /

a to select the parameter, then press 2 /3 to adjust

the figure.

Brightness

Adjusts the overall brightness of the image.

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of objects in the video.

Hue

Adjusts the tint of the projected image.

Saturation

Adjusts the richness of the color in the projected

image.

Contrast

Adjusts the bright areas (white levels) in the image.

CTI

Smoothes out the edges of color images. Color

images are rendered more distinct.

The default settings are 0.

SETUP MENU

34 En

De-interlacing Mode

You can select how to detect the video signal. Set to Auto

for normal use. When horizontal stripping noise appears

on the screen, set this to Film/Video to remove the noise.

Auto

, Film, Video

■ Audio Setting

The default settings are marked with “

”.

Audio Output

Coaxial/Optical

You can select the output mode of COAXIAL jack and

OPTICAL terminal. For more details on output formats,

refer to “About the audio output formats” (p. 35).

HDMI

You can select the output mode of HDMI ternminal. For

details on setting items, see “Coaxial/Optical” (p. 34). For

more details on output formats, refer to “About the audio

output formats” (p. 35).

Bitstream

, PCM, Reencode, Off

– To output HD audio (such as Dolby TrueHD or

DTS-HD Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set

Resolution to Auto or more than 720p (p. 33).

Downsampling

You can select digital audio signal down-sample

frequency. This function is effective for the audio signal

output from the COAXIAL jack/OPTICAL terminal.

DRC

You can set the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression)

(p. 41) to on/off/Auto. When set to Auto, DRC is

automatically turned on for a source with DRC

information in Dolby TrueHD format. DRC makes the

strong sound such as plosive sound lower, and

conversations more audible. It is useful when you watch

movies in the night.

Off

, On, Auto

SACD Output

SACD Priority

You can select a content played back from multi-channel

or stereo (2-channel) contents when a Hybrid SA-CD

(p. 4) including both is loaded.

Multi-ch

, 2-ch

HDMI Output

You can select audio signal output from HDMI terminal

when SA-CD is played back.

Speaker Setting

Configuration

You can set the output of 7.1 ch surround depending on

the connected speaker or amplifier.

1 Press 5/a to select a speaker you want to configure,

then press ENTER.

2 Adjust the figures below. Note that some of items are

not displayed depend on the selected speaker.

3 Press RETURN to go back to speaker selection.

2ch Downmix

You can select down mix method to analog 2-ch from

Stereo or Lt/Rt.

Post Process

Up Mix

You can multi-channelize the 2-channel audio signal. To

multi-channelize, select NEO6, then select Cinema or

Music mode.

Off

, NEO6

■ System Information

Software version and MAC address (p. 42) are displayed.

Bitstream

Outputs digital signal without any processing.

Secondary Audio is not output.

PCM Outputs 2-channel PCM.

Reencode

Outputs Bitstream with Secondary Audio.

Off Mutes sound.

Note

48k

The highest sampling rate of digital PCM output is

48 kHz.

96k The highest sampling rate of digital PCM output is

96 kHz.

192k The highest sampling rate of digital PCM output is

192 kHz.

DSD

Outputs DSD raw signal. When this Player is

connected to DSD compatible AV receiver, this item

is recommended.

PCM Outputs PCM signal decoded by this Player.

Size When the woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6-1/

2 in) or larger, select Large. When smaller than 16

cm (6-1/2 in), select Small.

Large

, Small

Trim -12 to 0 dB (in 0.5 dB step)

The default setting is 0 dB.

Delay 0.5 to 10 m (in 0.5 m step)

The default setting is 3 m.

Disable When selected speaker is not in use, select Yes.

Yes, No

Stereo

Changes channel output to stereo, which only

delivers sound from the two front speakers.

Lt/Rt Select this item if this unit is connected to a Dolby

Pro Logic decoder. Sound from rear speakers is

mixed to the 2 ch stereo sound.

SETUP MENU

35 En

SETTINGS

English

■ About the audio output formats

* “SA” is a Secondary Audio.

** “BCS” is a button click sound, the sound effect for pop-up menus, etc.

SA-CD output formats

– When Coaxial/Optical or HDMI is set to Bitstream, secondary audio is not output. (p. 34)

– To output HD audio (such as Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set Resolution to

Auto or more than 720p (p. 33).

– For SA-CD playback, Configuration in Speaker Setting (p. 34) is effective only when HDMI Output is set to

PCM.

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/

7.1 ch

surround

Source format Bitstream PCM Reencode Bitstream PCM Reencode

PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM 2ch 2ch

PCM 5.1ch PCM 5.1ch PCM 2ch 2ch/5.1ch

PCM 7.1ch PCM 7.1ch PCM 2ch 2ch/7.1ch

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital

PCM up to

5.1ch

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital 2ch/5.1ch

with SA

BCS

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital

Plus

PCM up to

7.1ch

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital

2ch/7.1ch

with SA

BCS

Dolby Digital

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

TrueHD

PCM up to

7.1ch

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital

with SA

BCS

Dolby Digital

DTS DTS

PCM up to

5.1ch

DTS DTS PCM 2ch DTS 2ch/5.1ch

with SA

BCS

DTS HD High

Resolution

DTS HD High

Resolution

PCM up to

7.1ch

DTS HD High

Resolution

DTS PCM 2ch DTS

2ch/7.1ch

with SA

BCS

DTS

DTS-HD

Master Audio

DTS-HD

Master Audio

PCM up to

7.1ch

DTS-HD

Master Audio

DTS PCM 2ch DTS

with SA

BCS

DTS

SACD Output settings

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/7.1ch

surround

SACD Priority HDMI Output

Multi-ch

DSD DSD up to 5.1ch No output 2ch/5.1ch

PCM PCM up to 5.1ch No output 2ch/5.1ch

2-ch

DSD DSD 2ch No output 2ch/2ch

PCM PCM 2ch No output 2ch/2ch

Notes

SETUP MENU

36 En

■ About the video output formats

When TV System is set to NTSC

* Depending on the disc or contents, this Player outputs 480p video signal.

When TV System is set to PAL

* Depending on the disc or contents, this Player outputs 576p video signal.

When TV System is set to Multi

When TV System is set to Multi, video signal is output at the same frequency as the source. Refer to the tables above for

details on the frequency setting of the TV and resolution of the output video signal.

While a menu screen such as SETUP menu is displayed, video signal is output at the same frequency as the source.

– “Max” in the table means that resolution is set to the maximum resolution supported by the connected TV.

– HDMI 1080p 24Hz setting is disabled when output resolution is other than 1080p.

– When this Player outputs the 1080p 24 Hz video signal from HDMI, no signals are output from the

COMPONENT and VIDEO jacks.

– When commercially-released DVD is played back with component output, maximum resolution is 480p/576p.

– When TV System is set to NTSC and video source is not 60 Hz, the video output signal is converted to 60 Hz.

– When TV System is set to PAL and video source is not 50 Hz, the video output signal is converted to 50 Hz.

Resolution Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24Hz Others

HDMI

Playback BD

Max Max Max 720p 60 Hz 1080i 60 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 60 Hz

others 1080p 60 Hz

COMPONENT

Playback

commercially-

released DVD

480i 480i

480p 480p 480p 480p

Playback BD 480i 480i 480i off 480i

others 480p 720p 60 Hz * 1080i 60 Hz * 1080i 60 Hz *

VIDEO

Playback BD

480i 480i 480i 480i 480i

off

480i

others 480i

Resolution Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24Hz Others

HDMI

Playback BD

Max Max Max 720p 50 Hz 1080i 50 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 50 Hz

others 1080p 50 Hz

COMPONENT

Playback

commercially-

released DVD

576i 576i

576p 576p 576p 576p

Playback BD 576i 576i 576i off 576i

others 576p 720p 50 Hz * 1080i 50 Hz * 1080i 50 Hz *

VIDEO

Playback BD

576i 576i 576i 576i 576i

off

576i

others 576i

Notes

37 En

SETTINGS

English

Some of the newly released BD discs cannot be played

back unless you upgrade this Player software to the latest

version. We recommend upgrading the software of this

Player with software upgrade so that this Player is

operated based on the latest software.

To check for the availability of a software upgrade, visit

http://download.yamaha.com/downloads/service/top/

?site=europe.yamaha.com&language=en

– Software upgrade is automatically started after

loading the disc which contains upgrade file

package.

– Do not remove the disc/USB memory device, set this

Player to standby mode or unplug the power cable/

LAN cable while the software upgrade is being

performed.

■ Upgrading the software

1. Prepare for the software upgrade.

When you upgrade the software from Disc/USB

Storage:

1 Save the upgrade file package to the appropriate

folder on the disc/USB memory device. For more

details, refer to the procedure document attached

with the upgrade file package.

2 Load the disc or connect the USB memory

device.

When the disc is loaded, software upgrade is

started automatically. Skip step 2.

When you upgrade the software from Network:

Confirm that this Player is connected to the

network.

2. Select the upgrade method and

start upgrade from SETUP menu.

1 Press SETUP to display SETUP menu screen.

2 Select General Setting = System = Upgrade.

3 Select the item which contains the upgrade file

package from Disc/USB Storage/Network.

3. The system will search for

upgrade file package.

4. Press ENTER to start upgrade.

5. Upgrade is completed. The system

will restart.

SOFTWARE UPGRADE

Hint

Note

38 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Refer to the table below when this Player does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this Player, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest

authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ Power

■ Basic operation

■ Disc playback

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Possible causes and solutions

No power. – Connect the AC power cable properly.

– Press p on the front panel to turn on the power.

The Player power is turned off. – The power will be automatically turned off after 10 continuous minutes of inactivity (no

playback).

Problem Possible causes and solutions

The remote control does not work. – Use the remote control within its operating range. (p. 5)

– Replace the batteries. (p. 5)

– Check the ID settings for the main unit and the remote control. (p. 9)

Buttons do not work. – Press and hold p on the front panel for around 5 seconds to restart this Player.

– To completely reset this Player, unplug the power cable from the AC outlet for 10

seconds or more, plug the power cable to the AC outlet again, and then turn on this

Player.

Password is forgotten.

– Press and hold and on the front panel simultaneously when no disc is inserted

and playback is stooped to set the Player to default setting (Security setting (p. 31) is

also reset). After the power is turned off automatically, press p to turn on the power

again.

Problem Possible causes and solutions

The Player cannot play a disc. – Take out the disc and clean it. (p. 4)

– Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). (p. 4)

– Use a disc supported by the Player. (p. 3)

– Remove the disc and then check whether the Player supports the disc or not. (p. 3)

– Check the region code. (p. 3)

– Check whether the disc is defective by trying another disc.

– The CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW/R DL, and DVD-R/RW/R DL must be finalized. (p. 3)

Video stops. – The Player will stop if it senses shock or vibration.

The Player makes a snapping sound

when starting playback or loading a

disc.

– These sounds are not malfunctions of the Player but are normal operating conditions.

TROUBLESHOOTING

39 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

■ Picture

■ Sound

Problem Possible causes and solutions

No picture. – Make sure that the cables are connected correctly. (p. 10)

– Make sure that the connected TV or the AV receiver is set to the correct input. (p. 10)

– Connect this Player to the TV with VIDEO jack (p. 13) using the supplied video pin

cable and set Resolution properly. (p. 33)

– TV System is set to the incorrect setting. Press and hold DIMMER on the remote

control to reset TV System setting to default setting.

Screen freezes and operation buttons

do not work.

– Press , then restart playback.

– Turn off the power and turn on the power again.

– Press and hold p on the front panel for around 5 seconds to restart this Player.

Video is not output with the desired

resolution.

– Set to the desired resolution. (p. 33)

Widescreen video appears vertically

stretched, or black bands appear at the

top and bottom of the screen. Or 4:3

video appears horizontally stretched.

– Change the aspect ratio of your TV. (p. 32)

Square noise (mosaic) appears on the

screen.

– Blocks in images may be visible in scenes with rapid movement due to the

characteristics of digital image compression technology.

The playback screen will be disturbed if

DVD video is recorded to a VCR, or

played back through a VCR.

– This Player complies with analog copy protection. Some discs contain a copy

prohibiting signal. If you try to play back such discs through a VCR, or record to a VCR

and play back the signal, the copy protection will prevent normal playback.

Audio is not output, or images are not

played back properly.

– The audio may not be output or the images may not be played back properly for some

discs in which copyright-protected contents are recorded.

Problem Possible causes and solutions

No sound, or sound is distorted. – Check that the audio cable is connected correctly. (p. 10)

– There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and fast

reverse. (p. 7)

– Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio

other than an audio signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content. (p. 3)

Left and right channels of audio are

reversed, or sound comes out of only

one side.

– Check the audio connection. (p. 10)

Audio is not output, or images are not

played back properly.

– The audio may not be output or the images may not be played back properly for some

discs in which copyright-protected contents are recorded.

Cannot hear the desired audio type and/

or number of channels.

– Refer to Audio Output setting and “About the audio output formats”. (p. 34, 35)

Cannot hear the sound of PIP

(secondary audio).

– Set Coaxial/Optical or HDMI to PCM/Reencode. (p. 34)

– To hear secondary audio, press 2ND AUDIO. (p. 6)

– Depending on the disc, you may need to set secondary audio on the top menu of the

disc. (p. 7)

TROUBLESHOOTING

40 En

■ Network

■ Messages on the screen

– The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to play back is not appropriate or the

operation is not correct.

Problem Possible causes and solutions

Cannot connect to the Internet. – Connect the Network cable properly.

– Turn on the connected equipment, such as broadband router or modem.

– Connect the broadband router and/or modem properly.

– Set the proper value(s) in the network setting. Check “Network”. (p. 32)

Cannot download BD-Live contents. – Connect the Network cable properly. (p. 16)

– Connect USB memory device properly. Check that the USB memory device is

connected to the USB port of this Player. (p. 16)

– Check if the BD disc supports BD-Live.

– Check the setting for “Internet Connection”. (p. 32)

– Connect the USB memory device formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.

– It is recommended to connect the USB memory device with at least 2 GB of free space.

If there is not enough free space, format the USB memory device. (p. 30)

– Refer to the supplied user's manual of the disc or consult the disc manufacturer.

Cannot detect the DLNA server. – Connect the network cable properly.

– Turn on the connected equipment, such as broadband router or the server.

– Confirm the Player and the server are connected to the same access point.

– Set the proper value(s) in the network setting. Check “Network”. (p. 32)

– Depending on the DLNA server, the Player may need to be permitted from the server.

Cannot a play the file on the home

network server.

– Make sure the file is playable. (p. 3)

– Check your DLNA server’s setting.

– The playback and operating quality may be affected by your home network condition.

Error message Possible causes and solutions

Not Support This File! – The file is not supported with this Player. See “Types of discs/files that can be used with this Player”

(p. 3).

Wrong region code! – The disc is an incompatible region code. See “Region management information” (p. 3).

Network has FAILED. – This Player cannot be connected to the network. Check connection (p. 16) and Network setting (p. 32).

Network is OK, proxy has

FAILED.

– This Player cannot be connected to the proxy server. See “Proxy Setting” (p. 32).

The Setting is prohibited,

please setup again.

– BD-Live connection is prohibited. See “BD-Live Connection” (p. 32).

No valid upgrade file is

found!

– Check if the upgrade file is in the appropriate folder.

Upgrade has failed for some

reason!

– Upgrade is failed. Check if the upgrade file is corrupted or unreadable.

41 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

AVCHD

AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition

video cameras that can be used to record and play high-

resolution HD images.

BD-Live™

BD-Live is a BD standard that utilizes a network

connection, enabling this Player to go online to

download promotional videos and other data.

BDMV

BDMV (Blu-ray Disc Movie, BD-MV) refers to one of

the application formats used for BD-ROM which is one

of the Blu-ray Disc specifications. BDMV is a recording

format equivalent to DVD-Video of the DVD

specification.

Blu-ray 3D™

Blu-ray 3D enables you to view full high definition 3D

images.

BONUSVIEW

BONUSVIEW compatible discs let you simultaneously

enjoy video sub-channel for two screens, audio sub-

channel and sub-titles. A small screen appears within

the main screen during playback (Picture in Picture).

Closed caption

Closed captions are kind of subtitle, and the difference

between subtitles and captions is that subtitles are

intended for hearing persons and captions are for the

hearing impaired. Subtitles rarely show all of the audio.

For example, captions show sound effects (e.g., “phone

ringing” and “footsteps”), while subtitles do not. Before

you select this setting, please ensure that the disc

contains closed caption information.

Color Space

Color Space is a color range that can be represented.

RGB is a color space based on the RGB color model

(red, green and blue) and is typically used for PC

monitors. YCbCr is a color space based on a luminance

signal (Y) and two color difference signals (Cb and Cr).

Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in

displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions

of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows

HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding

for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations

between colors. The increased contrast ratio can

represent many times more shades of gray between

black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number

of available colors within the boundaries defined by the

RGB or YCbCr color space.

DivX®

DivX® is a popular media technology created by DivX,

Inc. DivX® media files contain highly compressed

video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively

small file size. DivX® files can also include advanced

media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio

tracks. Many DivX® media files are available for

download online, and you can create your own using

your personal content and easy-to-use tools from

DivX.com.

Dolby Digital

A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.

that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when

the product is connected to a Dolby Digital processor or

amplifier.

Dolby Digital Plus

A sound system developed as an extension to Dolby

Digital. This audio coding technology supports 7.1

multi-channel surround sound.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a lossless coding technology that

supports up to 8 channels of multi-channel surround

sound for the next generation optical discs. The

reproduced sound is true to the original source bit-for-

bit.

DRC (Dynamic Range Control)

DRC lets you adjust the range between the loudest and

softest sounds (dynamic range) for playback at average

volume. Use this when it is hard to hear dialog, or

during times when playback may disturb neighbors.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD technology stores audio signals on digital storage

media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals

are stored as single bit values at a high- frequency

sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and

oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common

occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals.

Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can

be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used

for normal audio CDs.

DTS

This is a digital sound system developed by DTS, Inc.

for use in cinemas.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a new technology

developed for the next generation high definition optical

disc format.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio compression

technology developed for the next generation high

definition optical disc format.

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential is a lossless audio

compression technology developed for the next

generation high definition optical disc format.

GLOSSARY

SPECIFICATIONS

42 En

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an

interface that supports both video and audio on a single

digital connection. The HDMI connection carries

standard to high definition video signals and multi-

channel audio signals to AV components such as HDMI

equipped TVs, in digital form without degradation.

Letterbox (LB 4:3)

A screen size with black bars on the top and bottom of

the image to allow viewing of wide-screen (16:9)

material on a connected 4:3 TV.

Linear PCM Sound

Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio

CDs and on some DVD and Blu-ray discs. The sound on

Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (Sound

is recorded between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz

with 24 bits on DVD discs and between 48 kHz with 16

bits and 192 kHz with 24 bits on BD discs.)

Lip Sync

Lip Sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a

technical term that involves both a problem and a

capability of maintaining audio and video signals

synchronized during post-production and transmission.

Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex

end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates

an automatic audio and video syncing capability that

allows devices to perform this synchronization

automatically and accurately without user interaction.

Mac address

The Mac address is a unique value assigned to a network

device for identification purposes.

Pan Scan (PS 4:3)

A screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow

viewing of wide-screen (16:9) material on a connected

4:3 TV.

Subtitles

These are the lines of text appearing at the bottom of the

screen which translate or transcribe the dialog. They are

recorded on many DVD and BD discs.

Top menu

In a BD-Video/DVD-Video, this is the menu for

selecting things like the chapter to be played back and

the subtitle language. In some DVD-Videos, the top

menu may be called the “Title Menu”.

x.v.Color

x.v.Color reproduces a greater range of color than

before, showing almost all of the colors that the human

eye can detect.

■ General

Power supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................................AC 110-240 V, 60 Hz

[Central and South America models]................AC 110–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Europe and Russia models] ..........................................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Australia model] ....................................................AC 110-240 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model]...................................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Taiwan model] ..................................................AC 110-120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Korea model] ................................................................ AC 220 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption (Normal) .............................................................. 25 W

Power consumption (Standby) .................................................0.5 W or less

Dimensions (W × H × D) ............................................. 435 × 96 × 316 mm

(17-1/8 × 3-3/4 × 12-1/2 in)

Weight ..............................................................................4.05 kg (8.93 lbs.)

■ Audio performance

Audio output level (1 kHz, 0 dB, BD/DVD/CD-DA).................... 2 ± 0.3 V

Signal to nose ratio (BD/DVD/CD-DA) ..............................115 dB or more

Dynamic range

BD/DVD ...........................................................................105 dB or more

CD-DA ..............................................................................100 dB or more

Harmonic distortion (1 kHz)

BD/DVD ......................................................................... 0.0028 % or less

CD-DA .............................................................................. 0.003 % or less

Frequency response

BD/DVD ............................................ 2 Hz to 22 kHz (48 kHz Sampling)

2 Hz to 44 kHz (96 kHz Sampling)

CD-DA ...............................................................................2 Hz to 20 kHz

■ Input/output

HDMI output.............................................................. Type A connector × 1

480i/576i/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p/1080p@24Hz,

Deep Color, x.v. Color support

Component video output..............................................Y: 1 Vp-p (75 ohms)

B, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohms)

Video output......................................................................1 Vp-p (75 ohms)

Digital output ..........................................................Optical × 1, Coaxial × 1

Analog audio output..................................................................... 7.1 ch × 1,

Mixed 2 ch × 1

USB............................................................................ Type A connector × 2

Other equipments ........................................................ Remote IN/OUT × 1,

RS-232C × 1 (for custom installer),

Ethernet × 1

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SPECIFICATIONS

43 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

■ Copyright

– Audio-visual material may consist of copyrighted

works which must not be recorded without the

authority of the owner of the copyright. Refer to

relevant laws in your country.

– This item incorporates copy protection technology

that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.

Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

– Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

– Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:

5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;

7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide

patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are

registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master

Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS,

Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All

Rights Reserved.

– “Blu-ray Disc

”, “Blu-ray

”, “Blu-ray 3D

”,

“BD-Live

”, “BONUSVIEW

”, and the logos

are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

– is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo

Licensing Corporation.

– HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition

Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

– “x.v.Color” and “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks.

– “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks

of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

– Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are

trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other

countries.

– This product is licensed under the AVC patent

portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license

for the personal and non-commercial use of a

consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the

AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1

Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that

was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal

and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained

from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-

1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for

any other use. Additional information may be

obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

– Windows Media Player is a registered trademark or

trademark of Microsoft corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

– DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/

or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

– YouTube and the YouTube logo are trademarks of

Google. Inc.

– “DivX®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus™ HD and

associated logos are registered trademarks of DivX,

Inc. and are used under license.”

– “DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus™

HD (H.264/.MKV) video up to 1080p HD and

premium content.”

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by

DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX

video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to

convert your files into DivX video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device

must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand

(VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD

section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more

information on how to complete your registration.

Precaución-i Es

1 Para asegurar el mejor rendimiento de este aparato, lea

atentamente este manual. Y luego guárdelo en un lugar

seguro para poder consultarlo en el futuro en caso de ser

necesario.

2 Instale esta unidad en un lugar bien ventilado, fresco, seco y

limpio, alejado de la luz directa del sol, fuentes de calor,

vibración, polvo, humedad y/o frío. Para una adecuada

ventilación, permita que el equipo tenga el siguiente espacio

libre mínimo:

Superior: 10 cm

Posterior: 10 cm

Laterales: 10 cm

3 Coloque este aparato lejos de otros aparatos eléctricos,

motores o transformadores, para evitar así los ruidos de

zumbido.

4 No exponga este aparato a cambios bruscos de temperaturas,

del frío al calor, ni lo coloque en lugares muy húmedos (una

habitación con deshumidificador, por ejemplo), para impedir

así que se forme condensación en su interior, lo que podría

causar una descarga eléctrica, un incendio, daños en el

aparato y/o lesiones a las personas.

5 Evite instalar este aparato en un lugar donde puedan caerle

encima objetos extraños y/o donde quede expuesto al goteo o

a la salpicadura de líquidos. Encima de este aparato no ponga:

– Otros componentes, porque pueden causar daños y/o

decoloración en la superficie de este aparato.

– Objetos con fuego (velas, por ejemplo), porque

pueden causar un incendio, daños en el aparato y/o

lesiones a las personas.

– Recipientes con líquidos, porque pueden caerse y

derramar el líquido, causando descargas eléctricas al

usuario y/o dañando el aparato.

6 No tape este aparato con un periódico, mantel, cortina, etc.

para no impedir el escape del calor. Si aumenta la

temperatura en el interior del aparato, esto puede causar un

incendio, daños en el aparato y/o lesiones a las personas.

7 No enchufe este aparato a una toma de corriente hasta

después de haber terminado todas las conexiones.

8 No ponga el aparato al revés. Podría recalentarse y

posiblemente causar daños.

9 No utilice una fuerza excesiva con los conmutadores, los

controles y/o los cables.

10 Cuando desconecte el cable de alimentación de la toma de

corriente, sujete la clavija y tire de ella; no tire del propio

cable.

11 No limpie este aparato con disolventes químicos porque

podría estropear el acabado. Utilice un paño limpio y seco

para limpiar el aparato.

12 Utilice solamente la tensión especificada en este aparato.

Utilizar el aparato con una tensión superior a la especificada

resulta peligroso y puede producir un incendio, daños en el

aparato y/o lesiones a las personas. Yamaha no se hará

responsable de ningún daño debido al uso de este aparato con

una tensión diferente de la especificada.

13 Para impedir daños debidos a relámpagos, desconecte el

cable de alimentación de la toma de corriente durante una

tormenta eléctrica.

14 No intente modificar ni arreglar este aparato. Póngase en

contacto con el personal de servicio Yamaha cualificado

cuando necesite realizar alguna reparación. La caja no deberá

abrirse nunca por ninguna razón.

15 Cuando no piense utilizar este aparato durante mucho tiempo

(cuando se ausente de casa por vacaciones, por ejemplo)

desconecte el cable de alimentación de la toma de corriente.

16 Asegúrese de leer la sección “RESOLUCIÓN DE

PROBLEMAS” antes de dar por concluido que su aparato

está averiado.

17 Antes de trasladar este aparato, pulse p para ponerlo en el

modo de espera, y luego desconecte el cable de alimentación

de CA de la toma de corriente.

18 La condensación se formará cuando cambie de repente la

temperatura ambiental. Desconecte en este caso el cable de

alimentación de la toma de corriente y no utilice el aparato.

19 El aparato se calentará cuando la utilice durante mucho

tiempo. Desconecte en este caso la alimentación y luego no

utilice el aparato para permitir que se enfríe.

20 Instale este aparato cerca de la toma de CA y donde se pueda

alcanzar fácilmente la clavija de alimentación.

21 Las baterías no deberán exponerse a un calor excesivo como,

por ejemplo, el que producen los rayos del sol, el fuego y

similares.

SEGURIDAD CONTRA LA RADIACIÓN LÁSER

Este aparato utiliza rayos láser. Debido a la posibilidad de

que se produzcan daños en los ojos, la extracción de la

cubierta del aparato o las reparaciones solamente deberán ser

realizadas por un técnico cualificado.

PELIGRO

Este aparato emite radiación láser visible cuando se abre.

Evite la exposición directa a los rayos láser. Cuando se

conecte este aparato a una toma de corriente no acerque sus

ojos a la abertura de la bandeja del disco ni a otras aberturas

para mirar al interior.

PRECAUCIÓN: LEA LAS INDICACIONES SIGUIENTES ANTES DE

UTILIZAR ESTE APARATO

Este aparato no se desconecta de la fuente de

alimentación de CA si está conectada a una toma de

corriente, aunque la propia aparato esté apagada con p.

A este estado se le llama modo de espera. En este

estado, este aparato ha sido diseñada para que consuma

un cantidad de corriente muy pequeña.

ADVERTENCIA

PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O

DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA, NO EXPONGA ESTE

APARATO A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD.

El componente láser de este producto es capaz de emitir

radiación que sobrepasa el límite establecido para la

clase 1.

PRECAUCIÓN

El uso de los controles, los ajustes o los procedimientos

que no se especifican enste manual pueden causar una

exposición peligrosa a la radiación.

Especificaciones LÁSER:

Producto LÁSER de Clase 1

Longitud de onda: 790 nm (CD)/655 nm (DVD)/405 nm (BD)

Salida de láser: máxima de 1 mW

1 Es

Español

QUÉ PUEDE HACER CON ESTE

REPRODUCTOR ............................................. 2

PIEZAS INCLUIDAS............................................ 2

INFORMACIÓN SOBRE DISCOS Y ARCHIVOS 3

Tipos de discos/archivos que se pueden utilizar

con este reproductor................................................... 3

Para cargar un disco........................................................ 4

Precauciones con los discos............................................ 4

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES ............................. 5

Panel delantero ............................................................... 5

Mando a distancia........................................................... 6

INTRODUCCIÓN A LAS CONEXIONES........... 10

Panel trasero ................................................................. 10

HDMI CONEXIONES ......................................... 12

Conexión con el terminal HDMI.................................. 12

Conexión para la reproducción de discos 3D de

Blu-ray ..................................................................... 12

CONEXIONES DE VÍDEO ................................. 13

Conexión a la toma de vídeo componente.................... 13

CONEXIONES DE AUDIO................................. 14

Conexión con el terminal/toma de audio digital........... 14

Conexión con las tomas de audio ................................. 15

CONEXIÓN DE RED Y USB.............................. 16

Conexión con el terminal NETWORK

y el puerto USB........................................................ 16

OTRAS CONEXIONES...................................... 17

Conexión a las tomas REMOTE CONTROL............... 17

Conexión del cable de alimentación............................. 17

ASISTENTE INICIAL/CONFIGURACIÓN

SENCILLA ..................................................... 18

Configuración con el Asistente inicial/

Configuración Sencilla............................................. 18

MENÚ HOME/MEDIA ........................................ 19

Reproducción de Foto/Música/Vídeo........................... 19

Uso del contenido de red .............................................. 21

USO DE SERVICIOS DE RED .......................... 22

REPRODUCCIÓN DE VÍDEOS DESDE

YouTube™ .................................................... 22

FUNCIONAMIENTO DE REPRODUCCIÓN

AVANZADO ................................................... 23

Menú en pantalla .......................................................... 23

Menú de estado............................................................. 24

Uso de Marcador .......................................................... 25

Reproducción de programa........................................... 25

Uso de la búsqueda ....................................................... 25

Disfrute de BONUSVIEW™ y BD-Live™ ................. 26

Utilización de la función Imagen en Imagen

(reproducción de audio/vídeo secundario) ............... 26

Utilización de la función de BD-Live™....................... 26

MENÚ SETUP.................................................... 27

Ejemplo de funcionamiento del menú SETUP............. 29

Configuración General ................................................. 30

Configuración de pantalla ............................................. 32

Configuración de audio................................................. 34

Sistema de Información ................................................ 34

Formatos de salida de audio.......................................... 35

Acerca de los formatos de salida de vídeo .................... 36

ACTUALIZACIÓN DE SOFTWARE .................. 37

Actualización del software............................................ 37

RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS...................... 38

Alimentación................................................................. 38

Funcionamiento básico ................................................. 38

Reproducción de disco.................................................. 38

Imagen........................................................................... 39

Sonido ........................................................................... 39

Red ................................................................................ 40

Mensajes en pantalla ..................................................... 40

GLOSARIO ........................................................ 41

ESPECIFICACIONES ........................................ 42

Generalidades................................................................ 42

Rendimiento de audio ................................................... 42

Entrada/salida................................................................ 42

Propiedad intelectual..................................................... 43

(al final de este manual)

■ Acerca de este manual

– Este manual describe cómo utilizar este reproductor

con un mando a distancia, excepto cuando no esté

disponible. También se puede acceder a algunas de

estas operaciones mediante los botones del panel

delantero.

– Las notas contienen información importante sobre

seguridad e instrucciones de funcionamiento. Las

indicaciones señalan consejos de funcionamiento.

– Este manual se ha impreso antes de la fabricación.

El diseño y las especificaciones están sujetos a cambios

en parte como resultado de mejoras, etc. En caso de

diferencias entre el manual y el producto, este último

tiene prioridad.

Iconos utilizados en este manual

Los iconos se utilizan para indicar botones/funciones

disponibles para un formato particular.

: Vídeo BD

: Vídeo DVD, DVD-VR, DVD+VR, DVD-Audio

: Audio CD, Super Audio CD

: AVCHD, WMV, DivX

: MP3, WMA, WAV

: JPEG

CONTENIDO

1. INTRODUCCIÓN

2. CONEXIONES

3. REPRODUCCIÓN

4. AJUSTES

5. INFORMACIÓN ADICIONAL

Information about software ....................................i

DVD

VIDEO

MUSIC

PHOTO

2 Es

INTRODUCCIÓN

* Para conocer los detalles sobre los discos y formatos que se pueden reproducir, consulte la página 3.

** Para utilizar esta función es necesaria la configuración de red.

Asegúrese de que con el producto se han suministrado los siguientes accesorios.

QUÉ PUEDE HACER CON ESTE REPRODUCTOR

Configuración sencilla de idioma, resolución, relación de aspecto

de la pantalla

\ pág. 18

Puede ajustar la configuración de idioma y TV.

Reproducción de discos Blu-ray™/DVD/CD/SA-CD/DVD-Audio

lanzados comercialmente

\ pág. 23

Además de Blu-ray Discs™ (discos BD), este reproductor también admite la reproducción de

otros discos diversos.

Reproducción de BONUSVIEW™, BD-Live™, etc.

\ pág. 26

Puede disfrutar de películas adicionales en los discos BD más recientes.

Reproducción de archivos de Vídeo, Música, Foto de un disco

\ pág. 19

Este reproductor puede reproducir los discos que usted grabe.

Reproducción de archivos de Vídeo, Música, Foto de un disco/

dispositivos de memoria USB

\ pág. 19

Con este reproductor se pueden reproducir archivos grabados en discos/dispositivos

de memoria USB.

Reproducción de archivos de Vídeo, Música, Foto de un servidor

doméstico de red

\ pág. 21

El contenido del PC se puede reproducir en el televisor o el receptor de A/V conectando este

reproductor a un servidor de red.

Funcionamiento con el mando a distancia del televisor,

receptor de A/V, etc.

\ pág. 30

Puede conectar dispositivos con un cable HDMI y controlarlos con un único mando a distancia

utilizando la función Control HDMI.

Transferencia de contenidos de reproducción en los servicios de

red

\ pág. 22

Puede disfrutar instantáneamente de vídeos a través de Internet con este reproductor.

PIEZAS INCLUIDAS

Pilas (×2)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Cable de alimentaciónMando

adistancia

Cable de clavijas

de audio

Cable de clavijas

de vídeo

3 Es

Español

INTRODUCCIÓN

■ Tipos de discos/archivos que se

pueden utilizar con este

reproductor

– En este reproductor se pueden reproducir discos

de 12 cm y 8 cm. No utilice un adaptador de 8 cm

a12cm.

– Utilice discos que sean compatibles con los

estándares que se indican con la presencia de

logotipos oficiales marcados en la etiqueta del disco.

La reproducción de discos que no cumplan con estos

estándares no está garantizada. Además, la calidad

de imagen o sonido no está garantizada incluso si

tales discos se pueden reproducir.

– Los discos y los reproductores de vídeo BD/DVD

tienen códigos de región que dictan las regiones en

las que se puede reproducir un disco.

– Las operaciones y funciones de vídeo BD/DVD

pueden ser diferentes de las explicaciones que

aparecen en este manual y algunas operaciones

pueden estar prohibidas debido a las configuraciones

del fabricante del disco.

– Si se visualiza una pantalla de menú o instrucciones de

funcionamiento durante la reproducción de un disco,

siga el procedimiento de funcionamiento visualizado.

– Según el disco, puede que no sea posible la

reproducción de algunos de los discos de las tablas

de la columna izquierda.

– Finalice todos los medios de reproducción que se

reproduzcan en este reproductor.

– “Finalizar” hace referencia a un procesamiento del

grabador sobre un disco grabado para que se pueda

reproducir en otros reproductores/grabadores, así como

en este reproductor. Sólo se podrán reproducir en el

reproductor los discos que se hayan finalizado. (Este

reproductor no dispone de función para finalizar discos.)

– No se garantiza la reproducción de todos los archivos

del disco, dispositivo de memoria USB y red.

INFORMACIÓN SOBRE DISCOS Y ARCHIVOS

Tipo de disco

Formato

de grabación

Formato

de datos

BD-ROM/BD-R/

BD-RE

Vídeo BD --

DVD-ROM Vídeo DVD/DVD-

Audio

DVD-R/DVD-R DL/

DVD-RW

Vídeo DVD/DVD-

VR/AVCHD/disco

de datos

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

DVD+R/DVD+R

DL/DVD+RW

Vídeo DVD/

DVD+VR/AVCHD/

disco de datos

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

CD-ROM CDDA/HDCD --

CD-R/CD-RW CDDA/disco de

datos

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

SA-CD SA-CD --

USB -- DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

Red -- WMV/MP3/WMA/

WAV/JPEG

Información de gestión de la región

Destino Vídeo BD Vídeo DVD

EE.UU. y Canadá Código de región

“A” o “ALL”

Número de región

“1” o “ALL”

Asia Código de región

“A” o “ALL”

Número de región

“3” o “ALL”

Taiwán Código de región

“A” o “ALL”

Número de región

“3” o “ALL”

ALL

Corea Código de región

“A” o “ALL”

Número de región

“3” o “ALL”

América Central

y del Sur

Código de región

“A” o “ALL”

Número de región

“4” o “ALL”

Europa Código de región

“B” o “ALL”

Número de región

“2” o “ALL”

Australia Código de región

“B” o “ALL”

Número de región

“4” o “ALL”

Rusia Código de región

“C” o “ALL”

Número de región

“5” o “ALL”

Notas

Información de gestión de la región

Destino Vídeo BD Vídeo DVD

ALL

4 Es

INFORMACIÓN SOBRE DISCOS Y ARCHIVOS

– Un archivo con propiedad intelectual protegida no se

puede reproducir a través de un dispositivo de

memoria USB o red.

Requisitos de archivos de audio MP3/

WMA/WAV

– Frecuencia de muestreo: entre 32 – 48 kHz (MP3/

WMA), LPCM 44,1 kHz/16 bits/estéreo (WAV)

– Bitrate: entre 8 – 320 kbps (MP3), 32 – 192 kbps

(WMA)

Requisitos de archivo WMV

– WMV9, la resolución máxima es 1.920 × 1.080.

Acerca de Super Audio CD (SA-CD)

– Formato de audio basado en los estándares actuales

de CD pero con mayor cantidad de información, lo

que se traduce en un sonido de una calidad superior.

Existen tres tipos de discos: de una capa, de doble

capa e híbridos. El disco híbrido puede reproducirse

en los reproductores de CD existentes y en los

reproductores de Super Audio CD, ya que contiene

información de CD de audio estándar y de Super

Audio CD.

– Este reproductor admite la transmisión de datos DSD

a través de HDMI con un receptor A/V compatible.

– Esta unidad no muestra los datos de texto incluidos

en los discos en el visor del panel delantero.

■ Para cargar un disco

– Inserte el disco con la etiqueta hacia arriba.

– En el caso de un disco grabado por ambos lados,

ponga boca abajo el lado que va a reproducir.

– La reproducción podría iniciarse automáticamente,

dependiendo del disco y la configuración del

reproductor.

– El menú podrá visualizarse primero, según el disco.

– El tiempo para cargar el disco puede variar

dependiendo del disco.

■ Precauciones con los discos

Tenga cuidado con los arañazos y el

polvo

– Los discos BD, DVD y CD son sensibles al polvo, a las

huellas dactilares y especialmente, a los arañazos.

Es posible que no se pueda reproducir un disco con

arañazos. Maneje los discos con cuidado y almacénelos

en un lugar seguro.

Almacenamiento apropiado de los

discos

Precauciones para el manejo

Limpieza de la lente lectora

– No utilice nunca discos de limpieza de venta en el

comercio. La utilización de esos discos podría dañar

la lente.

– Solicite la limpieza de la lente en el centro de atención

al cliente aprobado por Yamaha más cercano.

Consejo

Nota

Tipo de disco Super Audio CD

Disco de una

capa

Capa de HD

Disco de doble

capa

Disco de capa

híbrida

Capa de HD

Capa de CD

Capa de HD

Disco Super Audio CD híbrido

Capa de CD que se reproduce

en cualquier reproductor de CD

- DSD estéreo de alta calidad

- DSD multicanal de alta calidad

Capa de alta densidad que

Notas

Ponga el disco en el centro de la caja

y almacene la caja y el disco en posición

vertical.

Evite guardar los discos en lugares con luz

solar directa, cerca de dispositivos de

calefacción o en lugares con alta humedad.

No deje caer los discos ni los someta

a vibraciones o impactos fuertes.

Evite almacenar los discos en lugares

donde haya mucha cantidad de polvo

o humedad

– Si la superficie tiene manchas, límpiela

suavemente con un paño suave

humedecido (con agua solamente).

Cuando limpie los discos, mueva siempre

el paño desde el orificio central hacia el

borde exterior.

– No utilice pulverizadores de limpieza de

discos de vinilo, bencina, diluyente,

líquidos para prevención de electricidad

estática u otros disolventes.

– No toque la superficie.

– No adhiera papel ni etiquetas adhesivas en el disco.

– Si la superficie de reproducción de un disco está

manchada o raspada, el reproductor podrá decidir

que el disco es incompatible y expulsar la bandeja

portadiscos, o podría no reproducir el disco

correctamente. Limpie cualquier mancha de la

superficie de reproducción con un paño suave.

5 Es

Español

INTRODUCCIÓN

■ Panel delantero

1 p (Encendido/En espera)

2 Puerto USB (pág. 16)

3 Indicador SA-CD: Se enciende cuando se carga un

SA-CD y se selecciona la capa SA-CD (pág. 4).

4 Visor del panel delantero

5 Bandeja portadiscos (pág. 4)

6 (Expulsar): Abre/cierra la bandeja portadiscos.

7 (Búsqueda hacia atrás/Salto hacia

atrás): Pulse para saltar hacia atrás y mantenga

pulsado para buscar hacia atrás.

8 (Búsqueda hacia adelante/Salto

hacia adelante):

Pulse para saltar hacia adelante y mantenga pulsado

para buscar hacia adelante.

9 (Reproducción)

0 (Pausa)

A (Detener)

B PURE DIRECT: Pulse esta opción para cambiar el

modo Pure Direct (pág. 7) a modo 1/modo 2/

desactivado. Este botón se enciende cuando el modo

Pure Direct se sitúa en modo 1/modo 2.

Instalación de las pilas en el mando

a distancia

– No someta al mando a distancia a golpes, agua ni

humedad excesiva.

– El mando a distancia podría no funcionar si el sensor

del reproductor está expuesto a la luz solar directa

o cualquier otra luz fuerte.

– El uso incorrecto de las pilas puede provocar que

revienten o tengan fugas. Lea las advertencias para

las pilas y utilícelas correctamente.

– No mezcle pilas viejas y nuevas, ni mezcle diferentes

marcas.

– Extraiga las pilas si no va a utilizar el mando

a distancia durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado.

– Deshágase de las pilas según la normativa de su

región.

Alcance aproximado de funcionamiento

del mando a distancia

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES

2 5 61 43 7 8 9 0 A B

Notas

30˚30˚

Sensor del mando a distancia

6 m

6 Es

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES

■ Mando a distancia

– En la esquina superior izquierda de la pantalla aparecerá

cuando la tecla pulsada no esté disponible.

1 Transmisor de señales infrarrojas: Emite la

señal infrarroja. Oriente esta ventana al sensor del

mando a distancia (pág. 5).

2 MARKER : Establece un Marcador

(pág. 25) en un punto especificado de una película.

Tras definir un Marcador, para seleccionar el punto de

ajuste al que desea saltar, pulse DIGEST. Puede definir

hasta 12 marcadores.

3 : Abre/cierra la bandeja portadiscos.

4 PROGRAM : Establece el orden de

reproducción (pág. 25). Puede configurar hasta

15 pistas (para discos de audio) o títulos/capítulos

(Vídeo DVD).

5 Teclas de colores : Utilice estas teclas según

las instrucciones en pantalla.

6 Teclas numéricas: Permiten introducir números,

o durante la reproducción, saltar a la pista/capítulo

correspondiente al número introducido. Es posible que

estos botones no estén disponibles en función del tipo

de disco y la situación de reproducción.

7 CLEAR: Borra el número introducido o elemento

establecido.

8 SETUP: Muestra la pantalla de menú SETUP

(pág. 27).

9 PIP : Permite encender/apagar la función Imagen

en imagen (pág. 26). Marca PIP ( ) se muestra en

pantalla cuando esta función está disponible. También

puede seleccionar este elemento desde el menú en

pantalla (pág. 23).

– Marca PIP se muestra sólo cuando la Marca PIP está

encendida (pág. 31).

0 2ND AUDIO : Selecciona el audio secundario de

la función Imagen en imagen (pág. 26) o los

comentarios de audio. Cuando esta función está

disponible se muestra en pantalla Marca Audio

Secundario ( ) (pág. 34). También puede

seleccionar este elemento desde el menú en pantalla

(pág. 23).

– Marca Audio Secundario se muestra sólo cuando la

Marca Audio Secundario está encendida (pág. 31).

Nota

DVD

VIDEO

DVD CD

7 Es

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES

Español

INTRODUCCIÓN

A TOP MENU : Muestra la pantalla de

menú principal (pág. 42) si el disco contiene un menú.

Seleccione el elemento deseado mediante 5/a /2/3

y ENTER.

– Las operaciones concretas pueden diferir dependiendo

del disco. Siga las instrucciones de cada pantalla

de menú,

B Teclas de cursor (5 /a /2 /3): Permiten mover la

selección en la pantalla de menú.

ENTER: Elige el menú/elemento seleccionado.

RETURN:

Permite volver al menú o pantalla anterior, etc.

D SUBTITLE : Permite cambiar

el idioma de los subtítulos (pág. 42) si está disponible.

También puede seleccionar este elemento desde el

menú en pantalla (pág. 23).

E STATUS: Muestra la información de reproducción

(pág. 24).

F Teclas de control

Permite buscar hacia atrás/hacia adelante. La

velocidad de búsqueda cambiará cada vez que pulse la

techa (buscar hacia atrás/adelante: 5 pasos cada una).

Pulse para reanudar la reproducción normal.

: Permite cambiar la velocidad de un pase de

diapositivas (más lento/más rápido: 3 pasos).

/ :

Manténgalo pulsado para realizar una búsqueda o una

repetición instantánea. La búsqueda instantánea salta

30 segundos en el contenido. La repetición instantánea

reproduce el contenido desde 10 segundos antes.

/: Permite saltar hacia atrás/hacia adelante.

Detiene la reproducción. Para detener la

reproducción completamente, pulse este botón dos veces.

: Pausa la reproducción.

: Reproduce el contenido.

()/ ()

: Realiza una ejecución lenta hacia atrás/

hacia adelante. La velocidad de reproducción lenta

cambiará cada vez que pulse la tecla (reproducción

lenta hacia atrás/adelante: 4 pasos cada una).

Estos botones también permiten la reproducción de

avance/retroceso de fotograma durante la pausa.

Pulse para reanudar la reproducción normal.

Muchos discos de DVD-Audio permiten reproducir

pases de diapositivas y girar páginas. Pulse / para

pasar a una página anterior o siguiente. Esta función

sirve solamente para los DVD-Audio.

– Algunos discos BD/DVD no son compatibles con la

reproducción de avance/retroceso de fotograma.

– En función del disco, el reproductor reanuda la

reproducción desde el punto en el que se paró

anteriormente el reproductor. Para reproducir desde

el principio, pulse dos veces y después .

G SA-CD/CD: Cambia la capa de reproducción de un

SA-CD híbrido entre SA-CD y CD (pág. 4).

– El indicador SA-CD/CD (pág. 5), situado en el panel

delantero, se enciende cuando se carga un SA-CD

y se selecciona la capa SA-CD (pág. 34).

– Las señales de audio solamente se emiten desde las

tomas AUDIO OUT (pág. 11) si la capa SA-CD está

seleccionada.

– No es posible reproducir en este reproductor señales

de audio grabadas en formato DSD multicanal.

H PURE DIRECT: Permite cambiar el modo Pure

Direct. El modo Pure Direct mostrado a continuación

cambiará cada vez que se pulse el botón. El modo Pure

Direct mejora la calidad del sonido. En el panel

delantero, se enciende PURE DIRECT cuando el

modo Pure Direct está en modo 1/modo 2.

Modo 1:

el panel delantero se apaga y no se emiten

señales de vídeo. Este modo es ideal para escuchar audio.

Modo 2: el visor del panel delantero se apaga y no se

emiten las señales de vídeo que no sean del terminal

HDMI. Este modo es adecuado para ver películas con

sonido de alta calidad.

desactivado: Reproducción normal.

I DIMMER: Cambia el brillo del visor del panel

delantero en 5 pasos.

DIGEST :

Muestra 12 fotografías en

miniatura. Cuando se muestran las miniaturas, puede

continuar a la página siguiente o anterior con / .

: Muestra la barra de selección

Marcador (pág. 25).

Enciende el reproductor o lo pone en modo de espera.

L ZOOM : Ampliar/reducir

zoom. El tamaño de la pantalla cambiará cada vez que

pulse la tecla (ampliar/reducir zoom: 3 pasos cada uno).

Nota

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

Notas

Consejo

Notas

PHOTO

DVD VIDEO

DVD VIDEO PHOTO

Continúa en la página siguiente.

8 Es

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES

M SEARCH :

Permite saltar a un punto especificado durante la

reproducción. Para conocer los detalles sobre esta

función, consulte “Uso de la búsqueda” (pág. 25).

También puede seleccionar este elemento desde el

menú de estado (pág. 24).

N HOME: Muestra la pantalla de menú HOME (pág. 19).

O REPEAT

: Permite cambiar el modo de repetición. El

modo de repetición mostrado a continuación cambiará

cada vez que se pulse el botón.

: Permite repetir el título que se está

reproduciendo.

: Permite repetir el capítulo que se está

reproduciendo.

: Permite repetir la carpeta que se está

reproduciendo.

: Permite repetir todas las pistas o los archivos del

disco.

: Permite repetir la pista o el archivo que se está

reproduciendo.

P A/B : Permite

reproducir una parte específica que desee repetir.

1 Pulse A/B en la escena donde desee establecer el

punto inicial. En la pantalla se muestra “A-”.

2 Vuelva a pulsar A/B en la escena donde desee

establecer el punto final. En la pantalla se muestra

“A-B”. Se inicia la reproducción de repetición.

3 Para cancelar la reproducción de repetición, pulse

A/B. “A-B” desaparece y finaliza la reproducción

de repetición.

– Es posible que esta función no se pueda realizar

dependiendo de las especificaciones del disco.

Q POP-UP/MENU : Muestra el menú

emergente. Los contenidos del menú que se visualiza

varían en función del disco. Consulte los detalles

sobre cómo ver y operar el menú emergente en el

manual del disco.

La pantalla del menú principal se puede mostrar

pulsando POP-UP/MENU, dependiendo del DVD.

R ON SCREEN: Muestra el menú en pantalla (pág. 23).

ANGLE :

Permite cambiar el ángulo de la

cámara si el vídeo se ha grabado con varios ángulos.

Cuando esta función está disponible se muestra en pantalla

Marca de Angulo ( ). También puede seleccionar este

elemento desde el menú en pantalla (pág. 23).

Nota

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

9 Es

CONTROLES Y FUNCIONES

Español

INTRODUCCIÓN

– Marca de Angulo se muestra sólo cuando la Marca

de Angulo está encendida (pág. 31).

T AUDIO : Permite cambiar el idioma

o formato de audio. También puede seleccionar este

elemento desde el menú en pantalla (pág. 23).

Función ID

Puede modificar el ID del mando a distancia para evitar

una utilización no deseada de otro reproductor Yamaha,

como un reproductor de DVD. Si modifica el ID del

mando a distancia, seleccione el mismo ID para la unidad

principal. La configuración predeterminada es ID1.

1 Configuración del mando a distancia

Para modificar el ID de ID1 a ID2, mantenga

pulsado el botón de color rojo y el botón 2 de los

botones numéricos simultáneamente durante

7 segundos. Para modificar el ID de ID2 a ID1,

mantenga pulsado el botón de color rojo y el

botón 1 de los botones numéricos simultáneamente

durante 7 segundos.

2 Configuración de la unidad principal

Mantenga pulsado y en el

panel delantero simultáneamente durante

2 segundos para mostrar el ID actual si:

– No hay ningún disco en el reproductor.

– La bandeja portadiscos está cerrada.

– Se detiene la reproducción.

– “NO DISC” aparece en el visor del panel

delantero.

Mantenga pulsadas las teclas durante 2 segundos

más para cambiar el ID de ID1 a ID2.

– Si el mando a distancia está sin pilas durante unos

minutos o si se dejan pilas agotadas en el mando

a distancia, el ID del mando a distancia se ajusta

automáticamente en ID1. Si desea utilizar el mando

a distancia con el ajuste ID2, coloque pilas nuevas

y vuelva a configurar el ID del mando a distancia.

Nota

BD DVD

10 Es

CONEXIONES

Encuentre el método de conexión que corresponde a su equipo de vídeo/audio. Le recomendamos que utilice el terminal

HDMI que ofrece audio y vídeo digital de alta calidad en una única conexión. Si utiliza los demás terminales/conectores,

conecte el vídeo en primer lugar. A continuación, conecte el audio.

■ Panel trasero

INTRODUCCIÓN A LAS CONEXIONES

Sí

¿Utilizar receptor de A/V?

¿Terminal HDMI en el

receptor de A/V? *

¿Terminal HDMI en el

televisor?

¿Terminal HDMI en el

televisor?

¿Terminal HDMI en el

televisor?

Conecte el vídeo y el audio al televisor mediante cable HDMI.

Conecte el vídeo al televisor.

Conecte el vídeo al televisor mediante cable HDMI.

Conecte el vídeo al receptor de AV.

Conecte el vídeo y audio al

receptor de A/V mediante cable

HDMI.

Consulte el manual de

instrucciones del

receptor de A/V.

INICIO

* Cuando conecte a un receptor de A/V que no pueda dar salida a la entrada de

sonido a través de su terminal HDMI, consulte el manual de instrucciones del

receptor de A/V.

67 0 A93214 85

11 Es

Español

CONEXIONES

1 NETWORK (pág. 16)

2 HDMI (pág. 12)

3 Puerto USB (pág. 16)

4 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT/RS-232C)

(pág. 17)

5 Sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales

(AUDIO OUT) (pág. 15)

6 MIXED 2CH (AUDIO OUT) (pág. 15)

7 VIDEO (pág. 13)

8 COMPONENT (pág. 13)

9 COAXIAL (pág. 14)

0 OPTICAL (pág. 14)

A AC IN (pág. 17)

Conexiones para vídeo

Conecte el audio al

receptor de AV.

Conexiones de vídeo al televisor

Conecte el audio al

televisor.

HDMI (pág. 12)

Conexión de audio y vídeo

al receptor de A/V

Conexiones de audio para

el receptor de A/V

Conexiones de vídeo y audio

al televisor

Conexiones de audio al televisor

HDMI (pág. 12)

A’

COMPONENT (pág. 13)

VIDEO (pág. 13)

al televisor

al receptor de A/V

COMPONENT (pág. 13)

B’

VIDEO (pág. 13)

C’

COAXIAL (pág. 14)

OPTICAL (pág. 14)

MIXED 2CH (pág. 15)

COAXIAL (pág. 14)

D’

OPTICAL (pág. 14)

E’

MIXED 2CH (pág. 15)

F’

HDMI (pág. 12)

A’

Sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales (pág. 15)

12 Es

■ Conexión con el terminal HDMI

– Puede disfrutar de imagen y sonido digital de alta calidad a través del terminal HDMI.

– Conecte con firmeza un cable HDMI (de venta en el comercio) a los terminales HDMI.

– Consulte la página 35 para obtener información sobre los formatos de salida de audio/vídeo.

– Utilice cables HIGH SPEED HDMI que dispongan del logotipo HDMI (tal como se muestra en la cubierta trasera).

¡Precaución!

No conecte el cable de alimentación del reproductor hasta haber finalizado todas las

conexiones.

HDMI CONEXIONES

HDMI IN

Este reproductor

Al terminal

HDMI

Cable HDMI

(de venta en el comercio)

– Cuando utilice la función Control HDMI,

consulte “Control HDMI” (pág. 30).

– Para más información sobre el modo de salida

del terminal HDMI, consulte “HDMI” (pág. 34).

– Si no se muestra la imagen, consulte

“RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS”

(pág. 39).

■ Conexión para la

reproducción de discos 3D

de Blu-ray

Para disfrutar de discos 3D de Blu-ray en este

reproductor, necesita los equipos y conexiones

siguientes:

– Necesita un televisor y un receptor de A/V (en

caso necesario) con funcionalidad 3D.

– Todos los componentes deben estar

conectados con cables HDMI.

– El disco Blu-ray debe contener imágenes 3D.

Consejos

Receptor de A/V

A A’

Al terminal de entrada

HDMI

13 Es

Español

CONEXIONES

■ Conexión a la toma de vídeo componente

– Puede disfrutar de una reproducción de color precisa y de imágenes de alta calidad a través de las tomas de componente.

– Conecte con firmeza un cable de vídeo componente (vendido en comercios) o un cable de clavijas de vídeo a la

toma COMPONENT/toma de VIDEO.

– Consulte la página 36 para obtener información sobre los formatos de salida de vídeo.

¡Precaución!

No conecte el cable de alimentación del reproductor hasta haber finalizado todas las

conexiones.

– Si reproduce la imagen mediante una videograbadora, la imagen puede deteriorarse debido a la función de

protección contra la copia.

– Para disfrutar de discos BD-3D en este reproductor, necesita conectar un receptor de A/V, un televisor y este

reproductor con cables HDMI. Consulte la página anterior.

CONEXIONES DE VÍDEO

COMPONENT IN

Este reproductor

Cable de vídeo componente

(de venta en el comercio)

Receptor de A/V

(Verde)

(Azul)

(Rojo)

(Verde)

(Azúl)

(Rojo)

A la toma

COMPONENT

A las tomas de entrada

de componente

B B’

(Verde)

(Azúl)

(Rojo)

(Verde)

(Azúl)

(Rojo)

VIDEO

AV INPUT

Este reproductor

Cable de clavijas de vídeo

(suministrado)

Receptor de A/V TV

(Amarillo)

A la toma

VIDEO

A la toma de entrada

de vídeo

(Amarillo)

C C’

Notas

14 Es

■ Conexión con el terminal/toma de audio digital

– Puede conectar el equipo de audio o el televisor en la toma COAXIAL o el terminal OPTICAL.

– Conecte con firmeza un cable de audio digital coaxial (de venta en el comercio) o un cable óptico (de venta en el

comercio) a la toma de audio digital coaxial o al terminal de audio digital óptico.

– Consulte la información sobre los formatos de salida de audio en la página 35.

¡Precaución!

No conecte el cable de alimentación del reproductor hasta haber finalizado todas las

conexiones.

– Para más información sobre el modo de salida de la toma COAXIAL o terminal OPTICAL, consulte “Coaxial/

Optica” (pág. 34).

CONEXIONES DE AUDIO

Consejo

AV INPUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO IN

OPTICAL

Este reproductor

Al terminal

OPTICAL

TVReceptor de A/V

Cable óptico

(de venta en el comercio)

Cable de audio digital coaxial

(de venta en el comercio)

Este reproductor

Receptor de A/V

D D’

A la toma

COAXIAL

A la toma de

entrada coaxial

Al terminal de

entrada óptica

D’ E E’

CONEXIONES DE AUDIO

15 Es

Español

CONEXIONES

■ Conexión con las tomas de audio

– Puede conectar el equipo de audio o el televisor en las tomas MIXED 2CH/sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales.

– Conecte con firmeza cables de clavijas de audio (suministrados o vendidos en comercios) a las tomas MIXED 2CH

o las tomas de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales.

– Consulte la información sobre los formatos de salida de audio en la página 35.

– Si desea reproducir audio SA-CD y DVD-Audio multicanal, conecte las tomas de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales

a las tomas de entrada correspondientes del receptor de A/V mediante cables de clavijas de audio vendidos en

comercios.

¡Precaución!

No conecte el cable de alimentación del reproductor hasta haber finalizado todas las

conexiones.

– Puede conectar un altavoz de graves directamente a la toma SUBWOOFER. Si conecta el televisor directamente

a este reproductor, conecte un altavoz de graves activo, como el Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, a esta toma.

– Para emitir la señal de audio desde las tomas MIXED 2CH/de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales, consulte “Ajuste

de altavoz” (pág. 34).

AUDIO

AUDIO IN

A las tomas

AUDIO OUT

MIXED 2CH

Cable de clavijas

de audio

(suministrado)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco) (Rojo)

TVReceptor de A/V

Este reproductor

A la toma de

entrada de audio

F F’

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

MULTICH IN

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

FRONT

CENTER SUBWOOFER

Receptor de A/V

Este reproductor

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

Cables de clavijas de

audio (suministrados

y vendidos en

comercios)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

(Blanco)

(Rojo)

A las tomas de

sonido envolvente

de 7.1 canales

A la toma

MULTI CH IN

(Blanco)(Rojo) (Blanco) (Rojo) (Blanco) (Rojo)

Consejos

16 Es

■ Conexión con el terminal NETWORK y el puerto USB

– El contenido del PC se puede reproducir conectando este reproductor a la red.

– Puede disfrutar de una variedad de contenido con funciones interactivas gracias a la conexión a Internet cuando

reproduzca discos compatibles BD-Live. Consulte la página 26 para obtener información adicional sobre las

funciones de BD-Live.

– Puede conectar un dispositivo de memoria USB (2 GB o superior y formateado con FAT 32/16) para BD

Almacenamiento Local al puerto USB del panel posterior (o delantero) del reproductor para guardar los datos

BD-Live o para actualizar el software de este reproductor.

– Conecte con firmeza un cable de red (vendido en comercios) y un dispositivo de memoria USB

(vendido en comercios) al terminal NETWORK y al puerto USB.

– Utilice sólo un cable de red STP (par trenzado blindado).

– Cuando se emplee Internet, se necesita una conexión a Internet de banda ancha como se muestra más abajo.

– Conecte el otro conector del cable de red al nodo/enrutador de banda ancha.

Antes de utilizar el dispositivo de memoria USB

Después de la conexión

– Para establecer el parámetro de Red manualmente, consulte “Red” (pág. 32).

– Para reproducir el contenido del PC en su red, consulte “Uso del contenido de red” (pág. 21).

CONEXIÓN DE RED Y USB

LAN

Este reproductor

– Cuando utilice una conexión a Internet de

banda ancha, es necesario un contrato con

un proveedor de servicios de Internet. Para

más información, póngase en contacto con

su proveedor de servicios de Internet más

cercano.

– Consulte el manual de manejo de su equipo

ya que el equipo conectado y el método de

conexión pueden variar dependiendo de su

entorno de Internet.

– Emplee un cable de red/enrutador

compatible con 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.

PRECAUCIÓN:

– No desconecte el dispositivo de memoria

USB ni desenchufe el cable de alimentación

mientras se estén realizando las operaciones

de BD-Live (pág. 26) o se esté llevando a

cabo la actualización del software.

– No utilice un cable de extensión USB

cuando conecte un dispositivo de memoria

USB al puerto USB del reproductor. El uso

de un cable de extensión USB podría

impedir que el reproductor funcione

correctamente.

– Yamaha no puede garantizar que todas

las marcas de dispositivos de memoria

USB funcionen con este reproductor.

Notas

Nota

Al terminal

NETWORK

Internet

Módem

Cable de red

(de venta en el comercio)

Nodo o enrutador

de banda ancha

Al puerto USB

Dispositivo de memoria USB

(de venta en el comercio)

Al terminal LAN

– Para guardar los datos de

BD-Live en el

dispositivo de memoria

USB del panel frontal,

establezca

Almacenamiento Local

en USB Frontal

(pág. 30).

Consejo

17 Es

Español

CONEXIONES

■ Conexión a las tomas REMOTE

CONTROL

– Puede transmitir y recibir las señales del mando

a distancia conectando a las tomas REMOTE

CONTROL (OUT/IN).

– Conecte con firmeza cables con mini clavija mono

de 3,5 mm (de venta en el comercio) en los

terminales REMOTE CONTROL (OUT/IN).

– Si su receptor de AV es un producto Yamaha y tiene

la capacidad de transmitir señales de control

SCENE, puede controlar el reproductor con

la función SCENE.

¡Precaución!

No conecte el cable de alimentación del

reproductor hasta haber finalizado todas

las conexiones.

– Para más detalles sobre la función SCENE, consulte

el manual de instrucciones de su receptor de A/V

Yamaha.

– Puede conectar un componente Yamaha (como, por

ejemplo, un reproductor de CD) que sea compatible

con la función SCENE a la toma REMOTE

CONTROL (OUT) de este reproductor.

– El terminal RS-232C es un terminal de ampliación

de control para usos comerciales. Solicite más

información a su distribuidor.

■ Conexión del cable de

alimentación

– Después de realizar todas las conexiones, enchufe el

cable de alimentación suministrado a la AC IN de la

parte trasera del reproductor. A continuación

enchúfelo en una toma de CA.

– PARA PREVENIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGAS

ELÉCTRICAS, NO TOQUE LAS PARTES SIN

AISLAMIENTO DE NINGÚN CABLE CUANDO EL

CABLE DE ALIMENTACIÓN ESTÉ CONECTADO.

OTRAS CONEXIONES

Consejos

REMOTE CONTROL IN

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

Este reproductor

A la toma

REMOTE

CONTROL (IN)

Cable con mini clavija

mono de 3,5 mm

(de venta en el

comercio)

A la toma de

entrada del

mando

a distancia

Componente Yamaha

A la toma de

salida del

mando

a distancia

Cable con mini clavija

mono de 3,5 mm

(de venta en el

comercio)

Receptor de señales infrarrojas

o componente Yamaha

(por ejemplo, un receptor A/V)

A la toma

REMOTE

CONTROL (OUT)

Nota

A la toma de CA

A AC IN

18 Es

REPRODUCCIÓN

■ Configuración con el Asistente

inicial/Configuración Sencilla

Asistente inicial/Configuración Sencilla le permite establecer

con facilidad el idioma, la resolución y la relación de aspecto

de pantalla. La pantalla Asistente inicial se muestra cuando

enciende el reproductor por primera vez después de la compra

o actualización. El mismo ajuste se puede realizar desde el

menú SETUP

Sistema

Configuración Sencilla.

1 Cuando se muestre la pantalla Configuración Sencilla,

pulse ENTER para iniciar Configuración Sencilla.

2 Pulse 5/a para seleccionar el idioma que desea ver en

la pantalla y, después, pulse ENTER.

3 Pulse 5/a para seleccionar la resolución,

a continuación pulse ENTER. Para obtener detalles

sobre la configuración de elementos, consulte

“Resolución” (pág. 33).

4 Pulse 5/a para seleccionar la relación de aspecto de

pantalla, a continuación pulse ENTER. Para más

detalles sobre la configuración de elementos, consulte

“Pantalla de TV” (pág. 32).

La Configuración Sencilla se ha completado.

5 Pulse ENTER para salir de Configuración Sencilla.

– Si no se muestra la imagen tras completar Asistente

inicial/Configuración Sencilla, consulte

“RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS” (pág. 39).

– Aparecerá un mensaje de advertencia acerca de la

reproducción de vídeo en 3D cuando este

reproductor esté encendido. Pulse ENTER para

descartar el mensaje o CLEAR para desactivarlo

(pág. 30).

ASISTENTE INICIAL/CONFIGURACIÓN SENCILLA

Notas

ENTER

FinalizarAnterior

Configuración

Página: 5/5

Configuración Sencilla

¡ se va a finalizar el asistente !

Ahora presione el botón Finalizar para ir al Menú

Inicio. Por favor, disfrútelo.

19 Es

Español

REPRODUCCIÓN

Los menús HOME y MEDIA le permiten examinar y

reproducir archivos multimedia en discos de datos,

dispositivos de memoria USB y su red.

– Para conocer los detalles sobre los discos y formatos

que se pueden reproducir, consulte la página 3.

■ Reproducción de Foto/Música/

Vídeo

Funcionamiento básico

5/a : Mueve la selección.

2: Vuelve a la carpeta principal.

3: Activa/desactiva el archivo/carpeta simple.

HOME: Permite entrar/salir de la pantalla de menú HOME.

ENTER: Confirma la carpeta/archivo.

Iconos sobre el menú MEDIA

: Reproduce el disco que hay en la bandeja o muestra

el contenido del disco de datos.

: Muestra el contenido del dispositivo de memoria

USB conectado al puerto USB.

: Busca un servidor DLNA (pág. 21) en la red.

: Muestra el contenido del servidor DLNA conectado.

Operaciones comunes para la

reproducción de archivos en una

carpeta seleccionada

Ejemplo: Selección de un archivo de película en un

dispositivo de memoria USB

– Detenga la reproducción del vídeo antes de

desplazarse a la pantalla de menú MEDIA.

1 Pulse HOME para pasar a la pantalla del menú HOME.

Pulse 2/3 para seleccionar MEDIA y pulse ENTER.

2 Aparece la pantalla MEDIA.

3 Seleccione el elemento que contiene el archivo que

desea reproducir, a continuación pulse ENTER.

MENÚ HOME/MEDIA

Nota

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

2ND

AUDIO

A/B

HOME

Nota

MENÚ HOME/MEDIA

20 Es

4 Seleccione la carpeta Foto, Música, Vídeo o AVCHD

que desea reproducir, a continuación pulse ENTER.

Para volver a la carpeta principal, pulse

o seleccione .

– Tenga en cuenta que en el siguiente paso sólo se

mostrarán los archivos del tipo que seleccione en

este paso. Por ejemplo, si selecciona la carpeta Foto

en este paso, sólo se mostrarán archivos de fotos

después de este paso. Cuando desee reproducir un

tipo de archivo distinto a foto, vuelva a esta jerarquía

y seleccione de nuevo el tipo de archivo.

5 Seleccione las carpetas que contienen el archivo que

desea reproducir.

6 Seleccione el archivo que desea reproducir,

a continuación pulse ENTER.

Cuando se selecciona un archivo de vídeo se inicia la

reproducción.

Cuando se selecciona un archivo de música, se muestra

la pantalla de estado y se inicia la reproducción.

Cuando se selecciona un archivo de fotografía se inicia

el pase de diapositivas.

– Para disfrutar del pase de diapositivas con música,

pulse

HOME

para volver a la pantalla de menú HOME

mientras se reproduce la música y seleccione archivo

de fotos.

– Es posible que el archivo mostrado no se reproduzca

dependiendo del contenido.

Operaciones para visualización de

fotos

Mientras se ven fotos los botones del mando a distancia

funcionan como se indica a continuación.

: Detiene el pase de diapositivas y vuelve al explorador

de archivos.

: Establece una pausa en un pase de diapositivas.

: Reproduce un pase de diapositivas.

: Pasa a la fotografía siguiente.

: Pasa a la fotografía anterior.

: Acelera un pase de diapositivas en 3 pasos.

: Ralentiza un pase de diapositivas en 3 pasos.

5: Invierte una foto.

a : Muestra la foto reflejada.

2: Gira una foto en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj.

3: Gira una foto en el sentido de las agujas del reloj.

ZOOM: Amplía/reduce una foto (ampliar/reducir zoom:

3 pasos cada uno).

5/a /2/3 : Permite desplazarse en modo de zoom

cuando la foto es mayor que la pantalla.

DIGEST: Cambia a modo de miniaturas (pág. 7). Cuando

se muestran las miniaturas, puede continuar a la página

siguiente o anterior con / .

Nota

Consejo

Nota

MENÚ HOME/MEDIA

21 Es

REPRODUCCIÓN

Español

■ Uso del contenido de red

Este reproductor es un reproductor multimedia digital

certificado para DLNA. Puede administrar contenido de

fotos, música y vídeo almacenado en servidores DLNA en

su red doméstica.

Acerca de DLNA

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite compartir

de forma sencilla medios digitales a través de una red

doméstica y puede disfrutar del contenido digital almacenado

en su software, PC instalado, servidor DLNA u otro

dispositivo compatible con DLNA con su TV a través de este

reproductor. Para conectar este reproductor a sus servidores

DLNA se requieren algunos ajustes del dispositivo o del

servidor DLNA. Para más detalles, consulte el software del

servidor DLNA o el dispositivo DLNA.

Reproducción de contenido compartido

1 Para reproducir archivos en el PC, instale un software de

servidor DLNA como, por ejemplo Windows Media

Player 12 y comparta los archivos que desee reproducir.

2 Encienda el PC con el software de servidor DLNA

instalado o el dispositivo DLNA conectado a su red

doméstica.

3 Pulse HOME para mostrar la pantalla de menú HOME.

Seleccione MEDIA para pasar al menú MEDIA. Los

servidores DLNA conectados a la red aparecen en

pantalla.

– Si su servidor DLNA no aparece en la lista,

seleccione Buscar DLNA para buscarlo.

– Dependiendo del servidor DLNA, es posible que sea

necesario autorizar al reproductor desde el servidor.

– Para reproducir el archivo en el servidor DLNA, el

reproductor y el servidor deben estar conectados al

mismo punto de acceso.

– Es posible que los requisitos de archivo no siempre

sean compatibles. Podría haber algunas restricciones

dependiendo de las características de los archivos

y de la capacidad del servidor DLNA.

4 Seleccione el archivo que desee reproducir.

– La calidad de funcionamiento y reproducción podría

verse afectada por las condiciones de la red doméstica.

– Es posible que los archivos de medios extraíbles

tales como dispositivos de memoria USB o unidades

de DVD del servidor de medios no se compartan

correctamente.

Notas

22 Es

Puede ver instantáneamente los vídeos que proporcionan los servicios de red siguientes.

– YouTube

– El acceso a contenido suministrado por terceros requiere una conexión de Internet de alta velocidad y también un

registro de cuenta y una suscripción de pago.

– Los servicios de contenido de terceros pueden modificarse, suspenderse, interrumpirse o dejar de proporcionarse en

cualquier momento sin previo aviso, y Yamaha no asume ninguna responsabilidad en relación con dichos sucesos.

– Es posible que parte del contenido sólo esté disponible para países específicos y que se presente en idiomas

específicos.

– Yamaha no representa ni garantiza que los servicios de contenido se seguirán proporcionando o estarán disponibles

durante un periodo de tiempo concreto, y se rechaza cualquier garantía de este tipo, ya sea expresa o implícita.

Puede ver películas desde YouTube a través de Internet

mediante este reproductor.

Los servicios pueden modificarse sin previo aviso.

1 Pulse HOME para mostrar la pantalla de menú HOME.

– La pantalla de menú HOME puede variar en función

del modelo.

2 Pulse 5/a /2/3 para seleccionar YouTube, a

continuación pulse ENTER.

– Para volver a la pantalla de menú HOME, pulse

RETURN.

USO DE SERVICIOS DE RED

Notas

REPRODUCCIÓN DE VÍDEOS DESDE YouTube™

Consejo

EnterSeleccione

23 Es

Español

REPRODUCCIÓN

En este capítulo se explica la reproducción de discos BD

y DVD vendidos en comercios, SA-CD, CD y discos

DVD-RW/R grabados.

– Para conocer el funcionamiento básico de reproducción,

consulte la página 6.

■ Menú en pantalla

Para mostrar el menú en pantalla, pulse ON SCREEN.

A continuación, pulse 5/a /2/3 para seleccionar un

elemento, después pulse ENTER para utilizar la función

deseada.

El menú en pantalla consta de los siguientes elementos.

Título : Muestra el número del

título que se está reproduciendo. Puede saltar al título

deseado seleccionándolo desde este elemento.

Capítulo : Muestra el número del

capítulo que se está reproduciendo. Puede saltar al

capítulo deseado seleccionándolo desde este elemento.

Pista/Archivo :

Muestra el número de la pista o archivo que se está

reproduciendo. Puede saltar a la pista o al archivo deseado

seleccionándolo desde este elemento.

Hora : Muestra el

tiempo de reproducción. Seleccione el tipo de

visualización entre los siguientes:

– Tiempo de reproducción transcurrido del título,

capítulo, disco, pista o archivo

– Tiempo de reproducción restante del título, capítulo,

disco, pista o archivo

Modo/Modo de reproducción

: Muestra el

modo de reproducción actual. Puede seleccionar uno de

los modos de reproducción siguientes:

– Normal: Reproducción normal.

– Shuffle: Reproducción aleatoria sin repetición.

– Aleatorio: Reproducción aleatoria con repetición.

– Normal

– Shuffle CH (capítulo)

– Shuffle TT (título)

– Shuffle All

– Aleatorio CH (capítulo)

– Aleatorio TT (título)

– Aleatorio All

– Normal

– Shuffle F (carpeta)

– Shuffle All

– Aleatorio F (carpeta)

– Aleatorio All

Audio : Muestra el idioma/señal de

audio del disco BD/DVD seleccionado actualmente.

Puede seleccionar el tipo de audio deseado.

Ángulo : Muestra el número del ángulo

seleccionado actualmente. Si el vídeo se ha grabado con

varios ángulos, puede cambiar el ángulo.

Subtítulo : Muestra el idioma de

los subtítulos seleccionados actualmente si hay subtítulos.

Estilo subtítulos : Muestra el estilo de los

subtítulos seleccionados actualmente. Esta función sólo

está disponible para subtítulos externos de archivo de

vídeo. Puede seleccionar el estilo de texto deseado de los

subtítulos.

Bitrate : Muestra el

bitrate de la señal de audio/vídeo.

Video secundario : Activa o desactiva PIP (pág. 6).

Audio Secundario : Activa o desactiva el audio

secundario (pág. 6).

Búsqueda Ins

: Salta 30 segundos.

Repetición Ins

: Reproduce el

contenido desde 10 segundos antes.

Pase de diapositivas :

Muestra la velocidad del pase de diapositivas. Puede

seleccionar la velocidad del pase de diapositivas entre

Lento/Medio/Rápido.

Transición : Muestra cómo aparece la foto en

la pantalla. Puede seleccionar el tipo de transición.

Code Page : Permite seleccionar el código de

caracteres de los subtítulos que ha agregado al vídeo DivX

(pág. 41).

FUNCIONAMIENTO DE REPRODUCCIÓN AVANZADO

Nota

BD DVD VIDEO

CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

DVD

VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

VIDEO

FUNCIONAMIENTO DE REPRODUCCIÓN AVANZADO

24 Es

■ Menú de estado

Muestra varios ajustes, cómo los subtítulos, el ángulo y el

número de título/capítulo/pista reproducido actualmente.

Para mostrar el menú de estado, pulse STATUS. El menú

de estado consta de los siguientes menús.

Ejemplo: Iconos cuando se reproduce BD

1 (Estado de reproducción)

2 (Icono de tipo de disco/archivo de vídeo)

3 (Número de título que se reproduce): Puede

saltar al título especificado con la tecla SEARCH

(pág. 8).

4 (Número de capítulo que se reproduce):

Puede saltar al capítulo especificado con la

tecla SEARCH (pág. 8).

5 (Tiempo de reproducción transcurrido):

Puede saltar al punto especificado con la

tecla SEARCH (pág. 8).

6 (Subtítulos seleccionados actualmente):

Puede cambiar el idioma de los subtítulos con la

tecla SUBTITLE.

7 (Audio seleccionado actualmente): Puede

cambiar el formato o idioma de audio con la

tecla AUDIO.

(Modo repetición):

Muestra el modo repetición

actual (pág. 8).

Ejemplo

: Iconos cuando se reproduce un archivo de música

1 (Estado de reproducción)

(Modo repetición):

Muestra el modo repetición

actual (pág. 8).

3 (Icono de tipo de disco/archivo de música)

4 (Gráficos) : Muestra gráficos si están

contenidos en el archivo.

5 (Número de pista/archivo que se

reproduce): Puede saltar a la pista especificada con

la tecla SEARCH (pág. 8).

6 (Información) : Muestra información

musical si está contenida en el archivo.

7 (Tiempo de reproducción transcurrido):

Puede saltar al punto especificado con la tecla

SEARCH (pág. 8).

8 (Barra de progreso) : Muestra el estado de

progreso de la canción actual.

9 (Medidor de nivel de audio): Muestra el nivel de

volumen actual.

1 (Estado de reproducción)

2 (Icono de archivo de fotos)

3 (Número de archivo que se muestra)

(Modo repetición):

Muestra el modo repetición

actual (pág. 8).

5 (Velocidad de pase de diapositivas)

BD DVD VIDEO

678

245

DVD CD MUSIC

14327

MUSIC

PHOTO

FUNCIONAMIENTO DE REPRODUCCIÓN AVANZADO

25 Es

REPRODUCCIÓN

Español

■ Uso de Marcador

Le permite establecer un Marcador en un punto

especificado del vídeo. Después de establecer el

Marcador, puede saltar al punto utilizando esta función.

Puede definir hasta 12 marcadores.

1 Pulse MARKER durante la reproducción de la película

para definir el Marcador. Se muestran el número de

Marcador y el estado.

2 Después de establecer el Marcador, pulse DIGEST

para mostrar la barra de selección de Marcador.

3 Pulse 2/3 para seleccionar el Marcador que desee

reproducir, a continuación pulse ENTER.

Pulse CLEAR para eliminar el Marcador seleccionado.

– Cuando finaliza la reproducción (por ejemplo,

al expulsar el disco o al presionar dos veces),

los marcadores se eliminan automáticamente.

■

Reproducción de programa

Esta opción le permite programar el orden de reproducción

de las pistas de un disco de audio o de los capítulos de DVD.

Pulse PROGRAM durante la reproducción para mostrar

la ventana PROGRAMA para programar el orden de

reproducción.

Puede programar hasta 15 pistas/capítulos.

Ejemplo: Programación del orden de reproducción de

pistas de CD

1 Pulse PROGRAM durante la reproducción.

2 Pulse ENTER para programar el orden de reproducción.

Para un disco de audio, pulse 5/a para seleccionar

una pista deseada y, a continuación, pulse ENTER.

Para un disco DVD-Vídeo, seleccione un título

deseado (mostrado como TT) y capítulo (mostrado

como CH) en lugar de una pista.

Para borrar una pista establecida, seleccione la pista

que desea borrar y, a continuación, pulse CLEAR.

Pulse RETURN para cancelar la reproducción del

programa.

3 Una vez finalizada la programación, pulse para

definir e iniciar la reproducción del programa.

4 Para cancelar la reproducción del programa, detenga la

reproducción por completo pulsando dos veces.

■ Uso de la búsqueda

Esta opción le permite saltar a un punto específico durante

la reproducción.

1 Pulse SEARCH durante la reproducción. Aparece la

barra de estado.

2 Pulse 5/a /2/3 para seleccionar uno de los

elementos siguientes, a continuación pulse ENTER.

– Número de título (mostrado como )

– Número de capítulo (mostrado como )

– Tiempo de título transcurrido (mostrado como )

– Tiempo de capítulo transcurrido (mostrado como )

– Número de pista (mostrado como )

– Tiempo de pista transcurrido (mostrado como )

– Tiempo de disco transcurrido (mostrado como )

– Número de archivo (mostrado como )

– Tiempo de archivo transcurrido (mostrado como )

3 Pulse 5 /a o las teclas de número para definir o ajustar

el valor del elemento seleccionado y pulse ENTER

para saltar al punto especificado.

4 Para cerrar la barra de estado, pulse STATUS.

Nota

DVD VIDEO

DVD CD

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

VIDEO MUSIC

FUNCIONAMIENTO DE REPRODUCCIÓN AVANZADO

26 Es

■

Disfrute de BONUSVIEW™ y BD-

Live™

Este reproductor admite las funciones de reproducción de

BONUSVIEW (pág. 41) (BD-ROM Perfil 1 Versión 1.1)

y BD-Live (pág. 41) (BD-ROM Perfil 2).

– Las funciones y el método de reproducción varían

según el disco. Siga las indicaciones del disco o del

manual de usuario suministrado.

■ Utilización de la función Imagen

en Imagen (reproducción de

audio/vídeo secundario)

El Vídeo BD que incluye audio y vídeo secundario

compatible con Imagen en Imagen se puede reproducir

con audio y vídeo secundario simultáneamente como un

vídeo pequeño en la esquina.

Mientras se muestra Marca PIP ( )

o Marca Audio Secundario ( ),

pulse PIP para activar o desactivar

la función Imagen en imagen.

– Para escuchar audio secundario, asegúrese de que el

ajuste Salida de audio (Coaxial/Optica o HDMI) se

ha definido en PCM o Recodificar (pág. 34).

– Dependiendo del disco, para escuchar audio

secundario, es posible que tenga que activar el audio

secundario en el menú principal del disco (pág. 7).

– Dependiendo del contenido, el audio y el vídeo

secundario para Imagen en Imagen pudiera

reproducirse y desaparecer automáticamente.

Además, pudiera haber restricción respecto a las

áreas que pueden visualizarse.

■

Utilización de la función de BD-

Live

™

1. Ajuste de la configuración de red

(pág. 32).

2. Conecte el dispositivo de memoria

USB al reproductor (pág. 16).

Los datos de BD-Live se guardan en un dispositivo de

memoria USB conectado a este reproductor. Para

disfrutar de estas funciones, conecte un dispositivo de

memoria USB (2 GB o superior y formateado con

FAT 32/16) compatible con USB 2.0 de alta velocidad

(480 Mbit/s) al puerto USB seleccionado en

Almacenamiento Local (pág. 30). La configuración

predeterminada es el puerto USB del panel trasero.

– La carpeta BUDA se crea automáticamente en el

dispositivo de memoria USB cuando es necesario.

– Si el espacio de almacenamiento es insuficiente, los datos

no se copiarán/descargarán. Elimine datos innecesarios

o utilice un nuevo dispositivo de memoria USB.

– Puede requerirse algún tiempo para que se carguen

(lectura/escritura) los datos.

– Yamaha no puede garantizar que todas las marcas de

dispositivos de memoria USB funcionen con este

reproductor.

– No utilice un cable de extensión USB cuando conecte un

dispositivo de memoria USB al puerto USB del

reproductor. El uso de un cable de extensión USB podría

impedir que el reproductor funcione correctamente.

3. Reproducción del disco.

4. Ejecute BD-Live siguiendo las

instrucciones del disco.

– En relación con el método de reproducción de contenidos

BD-Live, etc., lleve a cabo las operaciones de acuerdo

con las instrucciones del manual del disco BD.

– Para disfrutar de las funciones de BD-Live, realice la

conexión de red (pág. 16) y los ajustes de Red (pág. 32).

– Consulte la “Conexión BD-Live” (pág. 32) en

relación con la configuración para restringir el

acceso a contenidos BD-Live.

– El tiempo que se necesita para descargar los

programas que se ofrecen al dispositivo de memoria

USB conectado en este reproductor depende de las

velocidades de conexión a Internet y del volumen de

datos de los programas.

– Los programas BD-Live suministrados a través de

Internet podrían no ser capaces de mostrar la conexión

dependiendo del estado (actualización) del proveedor.

En tal caso, extraiga el disco y vuelva a intentarlo.

– Si la pantalla BD-Live no aparece durante un rato

después de seleccionar la función BD-Live en el menú

del disco BD, es posible que el dispositivo de memoria

USB no tenga suficiente espacio libre. En tal caso,

expulse el disco del reproductor y, a continuación, borre

los datos del dispositivo de memoria USB utilizando el

menú “Formato” de “Almacenamiento Local” (pág. 30).

Nota

Notas

Vídeo principal Vídeo secundario

Notas

27 Es

Español

AJUSTES

El Menú SETUP permite realizar diversos ajustes y configuraciones audiovisuales en las funciones utilizando el mando

a distancia.

MENÚ SETUP

Menú/Submenú Elemento Función Página

Configuración

General

Sistema Protector de

pantalla

Activa/desactiva el protector de pantalla.

Reproducción

Automática Disco

Ajusta el reproductor para que inicie automáticamente

la reproducción del disco.

Control HDMI Configura el reproductor para que reciba la señal de control

desde el mando a distancia de su receptor de TV/AV.

Control de Red Activa o desactiva el control a través de Ethernet. 30

Cargar

configuración

por defecto

Restablece todos los ajustes a los valores predeterminados,

excepto el ajuste Seguridad. 30

Actualizar Realiza la actualización del reproductor. 30

Configuración

Sencilla

Ajusta el idioma, la resolución y la relación de aspecto

de la pantalla.

Almacenamiento

Local

Muestra el estado de Almacenamiento Local (pág. 30),

formatea Almacenamiento Local y selecciona el puerto

USB delantero o posterior de Almacenamiento Local.

Mensaje

Reproducción 3D

Muestra un mensaje de advertencia acerca de la reproducción

de vídeo en 3D cuando este reproductor esté encendido.

Idioma OSD Selecciona el idioma del menú en pantalla. 31

Menú Permite dar prioridad al idioma del menú del disco. 31

Audio Permite dar prioridad al idioma del audio. 31

Subtítulo Permite dar prioridad al idioma de los subtítulos. 31

Reproducción Subtítulos Activa o desactiva los subtítulos. 31

Marca de Angulo Ajuste para mostrar la Marca de Angulo cuando se reproducen

BD/DVD con ángulos múltiples.

Marca PIP Ajuste para mostrar la Marca PIP cuando se reproducen BD/

DVD con Imagen en imagen.

Marca Audio

Secundario

Ajuste para mostrar la Marca Audio Secundario cuando

se reproducen BD/DVD con audio secundario.

DivX(R) VOD

DRM

Muestra el código de registro del vídeo DivX(R).

Modo DVD-Audio Ajusta el modo DVD-Audio en DVD-Audio/DVD-Vídeo. 31

Seguridad Cambiar

Contraseña

Permite cambiar la contraseña de Control Paterno y Código

de país.

Control Paterno Establece el Control Paterno en función del contenido

del disco.

Código de país Establece el Código de país. 31

Red Conexión a Internet Permite definir la conexión a Internet en Permitir/Desactivar. 32

Información Muestra la pantalla de información de red. 32

Prueba de conexión Realiza la prueba de conexión de red. 32

Configuración IP Permite definir la configuración IP en Auto/Manual. 32

Conexión BD-Live Permite definir la conexión a BD-Live en Autorizada/

Permitida Parcialmente/Prohibido.

DLNA Permite definir la conexión a DLNA en Permitir/Desactivar. 32

Configuración

Proxy

Permite definir la configuración proxy.

MENÚ SETUP

28 Es

Configuración

de pantalla

TV Salida 3D Selecciona vídeos en 3D o 2D. 32

Pantalla de TV Ajusta la relación de aspecto de la pantalla del televisor

conectado, y ajusta la salida de vídeo.

Resolución Selecciona la resolución del vídeo de salida. 33

Sistema de TV Permite seleccionar el Sistema de TV entre NTSC/PAL/Multi. 33

Color Space Selecciona el espacio de color entre las opciones RGB/YCbCr

4:4:4/YCbCr 4:2:2/Full RGB.

HDMI Deep Color Permite seleccionar HDMI Deep Color entre 30 bits/36 bits/

Desactivar.

HDMI 1080p 24Hz Activa o desactiva HDMI 1080p 24Hz. 33

Sincronismo de

labios

Ajusta el retardo entre vídeo y audio, como por ejemplo

cuando el movimiento de la boca no se corresponde con la voz.

Procesamiento

de Video

Modo de Vídeo Ajusta la imagen visual. 33

Ajuste de color Ajusta Brillo/Saturación/Tonalidad para cada color. 33

Contraste

automático

Ajusta el contraste para optimizar la imagen reproducida.

Reducción de ruido Ajusta el nivel de Reducción de ruido. 33

Modo

desentrelazado

Ajusta cómo detectar la señal de vídeo.

Configuración

de audio

Salida de audio Coaxial/Optica Permite seleccionar el modo de salida de la toma COAXIAL/

terminal OPTICAL entre Bitstream/PCM/Recodificar/

Desactivar.

HDMI Permite seleccionar el modo de salida del terminal HDMI entre

Bitstream/PCM/Recodificar/Desactivar.

Downsampling Permite seleccionar la frecuencia de submuestreo de la señal de

audio digital entre 48k/96k/192k.

DRC Define el DRC (Control de gama dinámica). 34

Salida SACD Prioridad SACD Selecciona un contenido cuando se reproduce un SA-CD

híbrido.

Salida HDMI Selecciona el modo de salida del terminal HDMI entre DSD/

PCM cuando se reproduce un SA-CD.

Ajuste de

altavoz

Configuración Establece la salida de audio de la toma sonido envolvente de

7.1 canales.

Mezcla descendente

2 Canales

Selecciona el método de mezcla descendente de 2 canales

analógico.

Post-

procesamiento

Mezcla ascendente Convierte la señal de audio de 2 canales en multicanal.

Sistema de

Información

Muestra la versión de software y la dirección MAC (pág. 42).

Menú/Submenú Elemento Función Página

MENÚ SETUP

29 Es

AJUSTES

Español

■ Ejemplo de funcionamiento del

menú SETUP

Debe llamar a la pantalla de menú SETUP para realizar

los ajustes en el reproductor. A continuación se explican

las operaciones básicas del menú SETUP.

Ejemplo: Ajuste de Control Paterno

– Algunos elementos no se pueden ajustar durante la

reproducción. En este caso, pulse dos veces para

detener la reproducción completamente antes de

realizar el ajuste.

1. Muestre la pantalla de menú SETUP.

Pulse

SETUP

para mostrar la pantalla de menú SETUP.

Pulse 2/3 para seleccionar Configuración General,

a continuación pulse ENTER o a .

2. Seleccione un submenú.

Pulse 5/a para seleccionar Seguridad,

a continuación pulse ENTER o el cursor 3.

3. Seleccione un elemento del menú.

Pulse 5 /a para seleccionar Control Paterno,

a continuación pulse ENTER o el cursor 3.

4. Introduzca la contraseña.

Introduzca la contraseña con las teclas numéricas.

– La contraseña predeterminada es 0000.

– No puede ir a la siguiente pantalla de configuración

hasta que no haya introducido la contraseña correcta.

– Para cambiar la contraseña, consulte “Cambiar

Contraseña” (pág. 31).

5. Seleccione un elemento siguiente.

Pulse 5/a para seleccionar el nivel de Control

Paterno para BD/DVD, a continuación pulse ENTER.

6. Salga de la pantalla del menú

Pulse 2 para volver al menú anterior.

Nota

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

CLEAR SEARCH

SETUP

PIP

REPEAT

HOME

MENÚ SETUP

30 Es

■ Configuración General

Los ajustes predeterminados están marcados con “

”.

Sistema

Protector de pantalla

Puede definir el protector de pantalla en activado o desactivado.

Cuando se activa, el reproductor pasará a modo de protector

de pantalla si no se utiliza durante 3 minutos. Posteriormente,

el reproductor pasará a modo de espera cuando no se utilice

durante 6 minutos.

Activar

, Desactivar

Reproducción Automática Disco

Puede activar o desactivar la Reproducción Automática

Disco. Cuando se activa, el disco se reproducirá

automáticamente después de cargarlo.

Activar

, Desactivar

Control HDMI

Puede ajustar el reproductor para que reciba una señal de

control desde un receptor de TV/AV compatible con la

función Control HDMI a través de un cable HDMI (pág. 12).

Activar, Desactivar

Control de Red

Puede activar el control a través de Ethernet. Este

reproductor utiliza el protocolo Yamaha Network

Control (YNC).

Activar, Desactivar

– Cuando está activado, el consumo de energía durante

el modo de espera aumenta por la función de control

de red.

– Cuando está activado, se reduce el tiempo de inicio

del sistema.

Cargar configuración por defecto

Puede restablecer todos los ajustes de este reproductor al

ajuste predefinido, excepto el ajuste Seguridad (pág. 31).

Para conocer detalles sobre los ajustes predeterminados,

consulte las páginas 27-34.

Actualizar

Puede actualizar el software manualmente desde Disc,

USB Storage o Network. Para conocer detalles sobre la

actualización de software, consulte “ACTUALIZACIÓN

DE SOFTWARE” (pág. 37).

Configuración Sencilla

Puede realizar la Configuración Sencilla (pág. 18).

Almacenamiento Local

Puede mostrar información de Almacenamiento Local,

formatear Almacenamiento Local y seleccionar USB

Frontal/USB Trasera para guardar los datos de BD-Live.

Para formatear (vaciar) la carpeta “BUDA” en el

dispositivo de memoria USB, seleccione Información y

pulse ENTER mientras “Formato” está seleccionado en la

pantalla.

USB Frontal, USB Trasera

– Almacenamiento Local se utiliza como memoria

auxiliar cuando se reproduce el disco Blu-ray.

Mensaje Reproducción 3D

Puede activar o desactivar un mensaje de advertencia

acerca de la reproducción de vídeo en 3D que aparezca en

el televisor cuando este reproductor está activado.

Activar

, Desactivar

Utilización de la función Control HDMI

Con la función de Control HDMI, puede operar

interactivamente este reproductor con su televisor

(si soporta la función de Control HDMI).

Cuando se conecta el reproductor al televisor compatible

con la función de Control HDMI mediante un cable HDMI

y se activa el Control HDMI en el menú SETUP (pág. 30),

puede realizar las funciones indicadas a continuación.

• Función de selección de entrada automática

Cuando inicie la reproducción en este reproductor, el

selector de entrada del televisor (y de un receptor A/V

si este reproductor esta conectado con el televisor

mediante un receptor A/V) cambia automáticamente

a este reproductor. La alimentación del televisor se

enciende automáticamente dependiendo del televisor.

• Función de apagado automático

Si apaga el televisor cuando este reproductor está en

modo de parada y no se visualiza menú SETUP, este

reproductor también se apagará automáticamente.

– Es posible que la función de Control HDMI no

funcione correctamente dependiendo del televisor.

– Otras funciones, aparte de las que se han

mencionado anteriormente, pueden funcionar

según el televisor o receptor A/V.

– Para hacer que la función de Control HDMI esté

disponible, configure los ajustes de la función de Control

HDMI en TODOS los componentes (este reproductor, el

televisor y el receptor de A/V). Es posible que también

sean necesarias determinadas operaciones.

– Cada función se puede configurar de forma independiente

para activar o desactivar según el televisor.

– Consulte los detalles relacionados con la

configuración en los manuales de funcionamiento que

se proporcionan con el televisor y/o el receptor A/V.

– Cuando está activado, el consumo de energía

durante el modo de espera aumenta por la función

de control de HDMI.

Notas

Consejo

MENÚ SETUP

31 Es

AJUSTES

Español

Idioma

OSD

Puede seleccionar el idioma de pantalla, es decir, el menú

o los mensajes mostrados en pantalla como, por ejemplo,

el menú SETUP.

English

, , , , ,

, ,

Menú

Puede dar prioridad al idioma del menú del disco.

English

, , , , , ,

, Portugués, Danés, , Finlandés,

Noruega, , Corea, Japonés, Más

Audio

Puede dar prioridad al idioma del audio para la reproducción

de BD/DVD. Para obtener detalles sobre la configuración de

elementos, consulte “Menú” (pág. 31).

Subtítulo

Puede dar prioridad al idioma de los Subtítulo.

English, , , , , ,

, Portugués, Danés, , Finlandés,

Noruega, , Corea, Japonés, Más, Desactivar

Reproducción

Subtítulos

Puede ajustar que se visualicen los subtítulos (pág. 42)

cuando se reproducen BD/DVD con subtítulos.

Activar, Desactivar

Marca de Angulo

Puede ajustar la visualización de Marca de Angulo ( )

cuando se reproducen BD/DVD con ángulos múltiples.

Activar

, Desactivar

Marca PIP

Puede ajustar la visualización de Marca PIP ( ) cuando

se reproducen BD (pág. 26) con Imagen en imagen.

Activar

, Desactivar

Marca Audio Secundario

Puede ajustar la visualización de Marca Audio Secundario

( ) cuando se reproducen BD con audio secundario.

Activar

, Desactivar

DivX(R) VOD DRM

Puede mostrar el código de registro del vídeo DivX(R).

Modo DVD-Audio

Algunos discos DVD-Audio contienen información de

DVD-Vídeo además del contenido de DVD-Audio. Puede

seleccionar el modo DVD-Audio o DVD-Vídeo.

– Este ajuste solamente está disponible si no hay

ningún disco cargado.

Seguridad

Cambiar Contraseña

Puede ajustar la contraseña para cambiar el nivel de

Control Paterno y Código de país. Consulte “Control

Paterno” (pág. 31) y “Código de país” (pág. 31).

– La contraseña predeterminada es 0000.

– Si olvida la contraseña, consulte “RESOLUCIÓN

DE PROBLEMAS” (pág. 38) y configure todos los

ajustes de Seguridad en sus valores predeterminados.

Control Paterno

En algunos discos de BD/DVD, existe un nivel de control

para la visualización del disco en función de la edad del

espectador. Puede ajustar el Control Paterno mostrado en

pantalla en función del contenido del disco.

Es necesario introducir la contraseña (consulte “Cambiar

Contraseña” en pág. 31) antes de ajustar los niveles

de Control Paterno.

Después de ajustar el Control Paterno, si reproduce un

disco con un nivel más alto del nivel de Control Paterno

actual o si desea cambiar el nivel de Control Paterno,

aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo solicitando que introduzca

la contraseña.

Desactivar*, 1 a 8

Código de país

Puede ajustar el Código de país en el que vive.

Es necesario introducir la contraseña (consulte “Cambiar

Contraseña” en pág. 31) antes de ajustar el Código de país.

Este parámetro podría utilizarse para la calificación

de Control Paterno y reproducción de discos.

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Svenska Nederlandse

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

DVD-AUDIO

Se reproducen los contenidos de DVD-Audio

y Vídeo. En función del disco, tal vez solamente

pueda reproducirse el contenido de DVD-Audio.

DVD-VÍDEO Solamente se reproduce el contenido

de DVD-Vídeo.

Nota

Notas

MENÚ SETUP

32 Es

Red

Conexión a Internet

Defina este elemento en Permitir cuando utilice BD-Live

(pág. 26), DLNA (pág. 21) y actualice el software desde la

red (pág. 37).

Permitir

, Desactivar

Información

Puede mostrar la pantalla de información de red. En esta

pantalla puede ver información de Interfaz (Ethernet),

Tipo de dirección, Dirección IP, Máscara de subred,

Puerta de enlace predeterminada y DNS.

Prueba de conexión

Puede realizar una prueba de conexión a Internet. Si la

prueba falla, compruebe la “Configuración IP” (pág. 32)

y vuelva a realizar la prueba.

Configuración IP

Puede configurar los ajustes de red.

–

Teclas numéricas

Permiten introducir caracteres.

– 2/3 Permiten desplazar el elemento

resaltado.

– CLEAR Permite eliminar un carácter.

– ENTER Permite guardar los valores y

salir del menú.

Conexión BD-Live

Puede definir la restricción de acceso al contenido

de BD-Live.

DLNA

Puede definir la función DLNA (pág. 21) en Permitir/

Desactivar. Cuando no utilice la función DLNA, defínala

en Desactivar.

Permitir

, Desactivar

Configuración Proxy

Puede definir Configuración Proxy. Defínalo en

Desactivar para uso normal. Seleccione Permitir para

definir la configuración del proxy.

■ Configuración de pantalla

Los ajustes predeterminados están marcados con “

”.

Salida 3D

Puede seleccionar salida de vídeo en 3D o 2D desde este

reproductor.

– Aunque establezca “Salida 3D” en “Auto” y

reproduzca un disco 3D de Blu-ray, este reproductor

selecciona imágenes en 2D en función de la

conexión y del ajuste del televisor, etc. (pág. 12).

Pantalla de TV

Puede ajustar la relación de aspecto de la pantalla del

televisor conectado, y ajustar la salida de vídeo.

Si cambia de televisor, por ejemplo, porque ha adquirido

uno nuevo, y la relación de aspecto de la pantalla del

televisor conectado cambia, también tendrá que cambiar

el ajuste Pantalla de TV.

Auto* Seleccione este valor para configurar

automáticamente los ajustes de red de este

reproductor con el servidor DHCP.

Manual Seleccione este valor para configurar los ajustes de

red (Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Default

Gateway y DNS) manualmente.

Consejos

Autorizada Permite que todos los discos de BD-Live se conecten

a la red.

Permitida

Parcialmente

Permite únicamente los discos con certificación

de propietario.

Prohibido Prohíbe que todos los discos de BD-Live se conecten

a la red.

Permitir Activa los ajustes del host y el puerto proxy.

Desactivar

Desactiva el servidor proxy. Seleccione esta opción

cuando no utilice el servidor proxy.

Host Proxy Define el host proxy.

Puerto proxy Define el puerto proxy.

Auto* Este reproductor selecciona automáticamente vídeos

en 3D o 2D.

Desactivar Este reproductor siempre selecciona vídeos en 2D.

Nota

16:9 Lleno Selecciónelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un

televisor con pantalla 16:9. Cuando se reproduce

vídeo con una relación de aspecto 4:3, el vídeo

se muestra como aparece en la ilustración.

16:9 Normal

Selecciónelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un

televisor con pantalla 16:9. Cuando se reproduce

vídeo con una relación de aspecto 4:3, el vídeo

se muestra como aparece en la ilustración.

4:3

Panorámico

Selecciónelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un

televisor con pantalla 4:3. Cuando se reproduce

vídeo con una relación de aspecto 16:9, el vídeo

se muestra como aparece en la ilustración.

4:3 Buzón Selecciónelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un

televisor con pantalla 4:3. Cuando se reproduce

vídeo con una relación de aspecto 16:9, el vídeo

se muestra como aparece en la ilustración.

Tamaño

de imagen

original

En televisor 16:9 (pantalla

panorámica)

16:9 Lleno 16:9 Normal

4:3

Tamaño

de imagen

original

En televisor 4:3

4:3 Panorámico 4:3 Buzón

16:9

MENÚ SETUP

33 Es

AJUSTES

Español

Resolución

Puede seleccionar la resolución de salida de vídeo entre

Auto, 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i y 1080p. Cuando

se define en Auto, la resolución se ajusta a la resolución

máxima según el televisor conectado. Para obtener

detalles adicionales sobre los formatos de salida, consulte

“Acerca de los formatos de salida de vídeo” (pág. 36).

Auto

, 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p

– Para emitir audio HD (como Dolby TrueHD o DTS-HD

Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI, configure

Resolución como Auto o un ajuste superior a 720p.

Sistema de TV

Puede seleccionar el valor de Sistema de TV entre PAL,

NTSC y Multi. Ajuste el mismo valor de Sistema de TV

que su televisor. Para obtener detalles adicionales sobre

los formatos de salida, consulte “Acerca de los formatos

de salida de vídeo” (pág. 36).

Color Space

Puede seleccionar la salida Color Space (pág. 41) desde

HDMI. Esta función está disponible cuando el reproductor

se conecta con un cable HDMI.

– Esta función sólo está disponible en televisores que

admitan dicha función.

HDMI Deep Color

Si su televisor y/o receptor de A/V es compatible con

Deep Color (pág. 41), ajuste este elemento según su

televisor o receptor de A/V. Esta función está disponible

cuando el reproductor se conecta con un cable HDMI.

30 bits, 36 bits, Desactivar

HDMI 1080p 24Hz

Permite la salida del Vídeo BD codificado con una velocidad

de fotogramas de 24 Hz en HDMI 1080p 24Hz. Con esta

función es posible que disponga de una reproducción de

vídeo más suave. Esta función está disponible si el receptor

de A/V o el televisor admiten esta función y el reproductor

está conectado con un cable HDMI. Para obtener detalles

adicionales sobre los formatos de salida, consulte “Acerca de

los formatos de salida de vídeo” (pág. 36).

Auto

, Desactivar

– Este parámetro está desactivado cuando la

resolución de salida es diferente de 1080p.

Sincronismo de labios

Puede definir o ajustar la función Sincronismo de labios

(pág. 42).

Procesamiento de Video

Modo de Vídeo

Puede seleccionar Modo de Vídeo más abajo.

Ajuste de color

Ajusta Brillo/Saturación/Tonalidad para cada color (Rojo/

Verde/Azul/Amarillo/Cian/Magenta). Para utilizar esta

función, configure Modo de Vídeo como Particularizado.

Para obtener detalles sobre la configuración de elementos,

consulte “Modo de Vídeo” (pág. 33).

Los valores predeterminados son 0.

Contraste automático

Ajusta el contraste para optimizar la imagen reproducida.

Para utilizar esta función, configure Modo de vídeo como

Particularizado.

Desactivar

, Activar

Reducción de ruido

Puede configurar la Reducción de ruido a un nivel entre 0

y 3. 0 equivale a desactivado y 3 es el nivel máximo.

, 1, 2, 3

Nota

NTSC, PAL

, Multi

(Modelos de Australia, Asia, Reino Unido,

Europa y Rusia)

NTSC

, PAL, Multi

(Modelos de EE. UU., Canadá, América

Central y del Sur, Taiwán y Corea)

RGB Permite la salida de la señal de vídeo con el rango

normal de señal.

YCbCr 4:4:4

Permite definir Color Space en YCbCr 4:4:4.

YCbCr 4:2:2 Permite definir Color Space en YCbCr 4:2:2.

Full RGB Si se ha configurado RGB y el blanco y negro de la

pantalla está demasiado difuminado, seleccione este

elemento. Esta opción se aplica si un componente

conectado admite el intervalo RGB 0-255.

Nota

Auto* Este reproductor ajusta la función Sincronismo de

labios automáticamente.

Manual Puede ajustar la función Sincronismo de labios

manualmente. Puede establecer el retraso del audio

para contenido 2D y 3D de forma independiente.

Desactivar Este reproductor no ajusta la función Sincronismo de

labios.

Estándar* La imagen es más natural y equilibrada. Este modo

es adecuado para usos normales.

Rico La imagen es más viva e intensa.

Cine La imagen es adecuada para ver películas en

una habitación a oscuras.

Particularizado Puede ajustar la imagen visual manualmente. Pulse

5/a para seleccionar el parámetro, a continuación

pulse 2 /3 para ajustar la figura.

Brillo

Ajusta el brillo global de la imagen.

Nitidez

Ajusta la nitidez de los elementos del vídeo.

Tonalidad

Ajusta el tono de la imagen proyectada.

Saturación

Ajusta la riqueza de color de la imagen proyectada.

Contraste

Ajusta las áreas claras (niveles blancos) de la imagen.

CTI

Suaviza los bordes de las imágenes en color. De este

modo, las imágenes en color se distinguen más.

Los valores predeterminados son 0.

MENÚ SETUP

34 Es

Modo desentrelazado

Puede seleccionar cómo detectar la señal de vídeo.

Defínalo en Auto para uso normal. Cuando aparece en la

pantalla un ruido de desgarro horizontal, configure esta

opción en Película/Vídeo para eliminar el ruido.

Auto

, Película, Vídeo

■ Configuración de audio

Los ajustes predeterminados están marcados con “

”.

Salida de audio

Coaxial/Optica

Puede seleccionar el modo de salida de la toma COAXIAL

y del terminal OPTICAL. Para obtener detalles adicionales

sobre los formatos de salida, consulte “Formatos de salida de

audio” (pág. 35).

HDMI

Puede seleccionar el modo de salida del terminal HDMI.

Para obtener detalles sobre la configuración de elementos,

consulte “Coaxial/Optica” (pág. 34). Para obtener detalles

adicionales sobre los formatos de salida, consulte “Formatos

de salida de audio” (pág. 35).

Bitstream

, PCM, Recodificar, Desactivar

– Para emitir audio HD (como Dolby TrueHD

o DTS-HD Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI,

configure Resolución como Auto o un ajuste

superior a 720p (pág. 33).

Downsampling

Puede seleccionar la frecuencia de submuestreo de

la señal de audio digital. Esta función está activa para

la salida de señal de audio desde la toma COAXIAL/

terminal OPTICAL.

DRC

Puede activar, desactivar o poner en modo Auto el DRC

(Control de gama dinámica) (pág. 41). Cuando se define

en Auto, DRC se enciende automáticamente para una

fuente con información DRC en formatoDolby TrueHD.

DRC hace que los sonidos fuertes como oclusivos suenen

más bajo y que las conversaciones sean más audibles.

Resulta útil cuando se ven películas de noche.

Desactivar

, Activar, Auto

Salida SACD

Prioridad SACD

Puede seleccionar un contenido reproducido desde datos

multicanal o estéreo (2 canales) si se carga un SA-CD

híbrido (pág. 4) o los dos.

Multi-ch

, 2-ch

Salida HDMI

Puede seleccionar la salida de la señal de audio desde el

terminal HDMI cuando se reproduce un SA-CD.

Ajuste de altavoz

Configuración

Puede definir la salida de sonido envolvente de 7.1 canales

dependiendo del altavoz o amplificador conectado.

1 Pulse 5/a para seleccionar el altavoz que desea

configurar y, a continuación pulse ENTER.

2 Ajuste las cifras siguientes. En función del altavoz

seleccionado algunos elementos no aparecen.

3 Pulse RETURN para volver a la selección del altavoz.

Mezcla descendente 2 Canales

Puede seleccionar 2 canales analógico como método de

mezcla descendente desde Estéreo o Lt/Rt.

Post-procesamiento

Mezcla ascendente

Permite convertir la señal de audio de 2 canales en

multicanal. Para realizar esta conversión, seleccione

NEO6, y seleccione el modo Cinema o Music.

Desactivar

, NEO6

■ Sistema de Información

Se muestran la versión de software y la dirección MAC

(pág. 42).

Bitstream

Permite la salida de la señal digital sin ningún

procesamiento. No se produce la salida del audio

secundario.

PCM Permite la salida de PCM de 2 canales.

Recodificar

Permite la salida de Bitstream con audio secundario.

Desactivar Silencia el sonido.

Nota

48k

La tasa de muestreo más alta de la salida PCM

digital es 48 kHz.

96k La tasa de muestreo más alta de la salida PCM

digital es 96 kHz.

192k La tasa de muestreo más alta de la salida PCM

digital es 192 kHz.

DSD

Emite una señal DSD en bruto. Al conectar el

reproductor a un receptor A/V compatible con DSD,

esta puede resultar una opción útil.

PCM Emite una señal PCM descodificada por este

reproductor.

Tamaño Cuando la parte del altavoz de graves del altavoz

mide 16 cm o más, seleccione Grande. Si es inferior

a 16 cm, seleccione Pequeño.

Grande

, Pequeño

Trim -12 a 0 dB (en pasos de 0,5 dB)

La configuración predeterminada es 0 dB.

Retraso 0,5 a 10 m (en pasos de 0,5 m)

La configuración predeterminada es 3 m.

Desactivar Cuando el altavoz seleccionado no se utiliza,

seleccione Sí.

Sí, No

Estéreo

Cambia la salida del canal a estéreo, con lo que

solamente se emite sonido desde los dos altavoces

frontales.

Lt/Rt Seleccione este elemento si la unidad está conectada

a un descodificador Dolby Pro Logic. El sonido de

los altavoces posteriores se mezcla con el sonido

estéreo de 2 canales.

MENÚ SETUP

35 Es

AJUSTES

Español

■ Formatos de salida de audio

* “AS” es audio secundario.

** “SCB” es el sonido clic del botón, el efecto de sonido de los menús emergentes, etc.

Formatos de salida SA-CD

– Si Coaxial/Optica o HDMI se define en Bitstream, no se produce la salida de audio secundario. (pág. 34)

– Para emitir audio HD (como Dolby TrueHD o DTS-HD Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI, configure

Resolución como Auto o un ajuste superior a 720p (pág. 33).

– Para la reproducción de SA-CD, la configuración de Ajuste del altavoz (pág. 34) solamente tiene efecto si Salida

HDMI está ajustada en PCM.

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/

Sonido

envolvente

de 7.1

canales

Formato de origen Bitstream PCM Recodificar Bitstream PCM Recodificar

PCM 2 canales PCM 2 canales PCM 2 canales 2 canales

PCM 5.1 canales PCM 5.1 canales PCM 2 canales

2 canales/

5.1 canales

PCM 7.1 canales PCM 7.1 canales PCM 2 canales

2 canales/

7.1 canales

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital

PCM hasta 5.1

canales

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital

PCM 2

canales

Dolby Digital

2 canales/

5.1 canales

con AS

oSCB

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital

Plus

PCM hasta 7.1

canales

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital

PCM 2

canales

Dolby Digital

2 canales/

7.1 canales

con AS

oSCB

Dolby Digital

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

TrueHD

PCM hasta 7.1

canales

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby Digital

PCM 2

canales

Dolby Digital

con AS

oSCB

Dolby Digital

DTS DTS

PCM hasta 5.1

canales

DTS DTS

PCM 2

canales

DTS

2 canales/

5.1 canales

con AS

oSCB

DTS HD High

Resolution

DTS HD High

Resolution

PCM hasta 7.1

canales

DTS HD High

Resolution

DTS

PCM 2

canales

DTS

2 canales/

7.1 canales

con AS

oSCB

DTS

DTS-HD

Master Audio

DTS-HD

Master Audio

PCM hasta 7.1

canales

DTS-HD

Master Audio

DTS

PCM 2

canales

DTS

con AS

oSCB

DTS

Ajustes de salida SACD

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/7.1 canales

sonido envolvente

Prioridad SACD Salida HDMI

Multi-ch

DSD DSD hasta 5.1 canales Sin salida 2 canales/5.1 canales

PCM PCM hasta 5.1 canales Sin salida 2 canales/5.1 canales

2-ch

DSD DSD 2 canales Sin salida 2 canales/2 canales

PCM PCM 2 canales Sin salida 2 canales/2 canales

Notas

MENÚ SETUP

36 Es

■ Acerca de los formatos de salida de vídeo

Si Sistema de TV se define en NTSC

* En función del disco o del contenido, este reproductor permite la salida de señal de vídeo de 480p.

Si Sistema de TV se define en PAL

* En función del disco o del contenido, este reproductor permite la salida de señal de vídeo de 576p.

Si Sistema de TV se define en Multi

Si Sistema de TV está configurado como Multi, la salida de la señal de vídeo tiene la misma frecuencia que la fuente.

Consulte las tablas anteriores para obtener información sobre la configuración de frecuencia del televisor y la resolución

de la señal de vídeo de salida.

Si se muestra una pantalla de menú como, por ejemplo, SETUP la salida de la señal de vídeo tiene la misma frecuencia

que el origen.

– “Máx.” en la tabla significa que la resolución se ha definido en la resolución máxima admitida por el televisor

conectado.

– El parámetro HDMI 1080p 24Hz está desactivado cuando la resolución de salida es diferente de 1080p.

– Cuando este reproductor permite la salida de vídeo de 1080p 24 Hz desde HDMI, no se emiten señales desde las

tomas COMPONENT y VIDEO.

– Cuando se reproduce un DVD comercial con salida de componente, la resolución máxima es 480p/576p.

– Cuando Sistema de TV se define en NTSC y el origen de vídeo no es 60 Hz, la salida de vídeo se convierte a 60 Hz.

– Cuando Sistema de TV se define en PAL y el origen de vídeo no es 50 Hz, la salida de vídeo se convierte a 50 Hz.

Resolución Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24 Hz Otros

HDMI

Reproducción

de BD

Máx. Máx. Máx. 720p 60 Hz 1080i 60 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 60 Hz

otros 1080p 60 Hz

COMPONENT

Reproducción

de DVD

comercial

480i 480i

480p 480p 480p 480p

Reproducción

de BD

480i 480i 480i desactivado 480i

otros 480p 720p 60 Hz * 1080i 60 Hz * 1080i 60 Hz *

VIDEO

Reproducción

de BD

480i 480i 480i 480i 480i

desactivado

480i

otros 480i

Resolución Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24 Hz Otros

HDMI

Reproducción

de BD

Máx. Máx. Máx. 720p 50 Hz 1080i 50 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 50 Hz

otros 1080p 50 Hz

COMPONENT

Reproducción

de DVD

comercial

576i 576i

576p 576p 576p 576p

Reproducción

de BD

576i 576i 576i desactivado 576i

otros 576p 720p 50 Hz * 1080i 50 Hz * 1080i 50 Hz *

VIDEO

Reproducción

de BD

576i 576i 576i 576i 576i

desactivado

576i

otros 576i

Notas

37 Es

AJUSTES

Español

Algunos de los discos BD recién lanzados no se pueden

reproducir a menos que actualice el software del

reproductor a la versión más reciente. Le recomendamos

la actualización para que el reproductor funcione con el

software más actual.

Para comprobar la disponibilidad de una actualización de

software, visite

http://download.yamaha.com/downloads/service/top/

?site=europe.yamaha.com&language=en

– La actualización del software se inicia

automáticamente tras cargar el disco que contiene el

paquete de actualización.

– No saque el disco/dispositivo de memoria USB, no

ponga el reproductor en modo de espera ni

desenchufe el cable de alimentación o el cable LAN

mientras se lleva a cabo la actualización de software.

■ Actualización del software

1. Prepare la actualización de

software.

Si actualiza el software desde Disc/USB Storage:

1 Guarde el paquete de archivos de actualización en

la carpeta correspondiente en el disco/dispositivo

de memoria USB. Para más información,

consulte el documento de procedimientos adjunto

con el paquete de archivos de actualización.

2 Cargue el disco o conecte el dispositivo de

memoria USB.

Al cargar el disco, la actualización de software

se inicia automáticamente. Omita el paso 2.

Si actualiza el software desde Network:

Confirme que el reproductor está conectado

alared.

2. Seleccione el método de

actualización e inicie la

actualización desde el menú SETUP.

1 Pulse SETUP para mostrar la pantalla de menú

SETUP.

2 Seleccione Configuración General = Sistema =

Actualizar.

3 Seleccione el elemento que contiene el paquete

de archivos de actualización desde Disc/USB

Storage/Network.

3. El sistema buscará el paquete

de archivos de actualización.

4. Pulse ENTER para iniciar

la actualización.

5. La actualización se ha

completado. El sistema se

reiniciará.

ACTUALIZACIÓN DE SOFTWARE

Consejo

Notas

¡ buscando archivo de actualización !

Por favor, espere. . .

Actualizar

38 Es

INFORMACIÓN ADICIONAL

Consulte la tabla inferior cuando el equipo no funcione correctamente. Si el problema que usted tiene no aparece en la

lista inferior o las instrucciones no le sirven de ayuda, apague este reproductor, desenchufe el cable de alimentación

y póngase en contacto con un centro de servicio o concesionario Yamaha autorizado.

■ Alimentación

■ Funcionamiento básico

■ Reproducción de disco

RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

No hay alimentación. – Conecte correctamente el cable de alimentación de CA.

–Pulse p en el panel delantero para encender la alimentación.

La alimentación del reproductor

está apagada.

– La alimentación se desconectará automáticamente pasados 10 minutos continuos

de inactividad (sin reproducción).

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

El mando a distancia no funciona. – Utilice el mando a distancia dentro de su alcance operativo. (pág. 5)

– Cambie las pilas. (pág. 5)

– Compruebe la configuración de ID de la unidad principal y el mando a distancia. (pág. 9)

Las teclas no funcionan. – Mantenga pulsado p en el panel delantero durante unos 5 segundos para reiniciar

el reproductor.

– Para reiniciar completamente el reproductor, desenchufe el cable de alimentación de la

toma de CA durante 10 segundos o más, vuelva a enchufarlo y, a continuación, encienda

el reproductor.

Se ha olvidado la contraseña.

– Mantenga pulsado y en el panel delantero a la vez si no hay ningún disco

insertado y con la reproducción detenida para situar el reproductor en la configuración

predeterminada (el ajuste de Seguridad (pág. 31) también se restablece). Una vez que la

alimentación se desconecte automáticamente, pulse p para volver a conectarla.

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

El reproductor no puede reproducir

un disco.

– Extraiga el disco y límpielo. (pág. 4)

– Asegúrese de que se ha cargado correctamente el disco (alineado en la bandeja

portadiscos y con la cara de la etiqueta hacia arriba). (pág. 4)

– Utilice un disco admitido por el reproductor. (pág. 3)

– Extraiga el disco y compruebe si es un disco admitido por el reproductor o no. (pág. 3)

– Compruebe el código de región. (pág. 3)

– Compruebe si el disco está defectuoso probando con otro disco.

– Los discos CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW/R DL y DVD-R/RW/R DL deben estar finalizados.

(pág. 3)

El vídeo se para. – El reproductor se parará si detecta golpes o vibraciones.

El reproductor hace un sonido

de chasquido cuando comienza

la reproducción o al cargar un disco.

– Estos sonidos no son averías sino condiciones normales de funcionamiento

del reproductor.

RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS

39 Es

INFORMACIÓN ADICIONAL

Español

■ Imagen

■ Sonido

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

No hay imagen. – Asegúrese de que los cables están correctamente conectados. (pág. 10)

– Asegúrese de que el televisor o receptor de A/V conectado está ajustado a la entrada

correcta. (pág. 10)

– Conecte el reproductor al televisor con la toma VIDEO (pág. 13) mediante el cable

de clavijas de vídeo suministrado y definiendo correctamente la Resolución. (pág. 33)

– El sistema de TV está mal ajustado. Mantenga pulsado DIMMER en el mando a

distancia para restablecer la configuración predeterminada del sistema de TV.

La pantalla se congela y las teclas

de operación no responden.

– Pulse y, después, reinicie la reproducción.

– Desconecte la alimentación y conéctela de nuevo.

– Mantenga pulsado p en el panel delantero durante unos 5 segundos para reiniciar

el reproductor.

La salida de vídeo no tiene la resolución

deseada.

– Ajuste la resolución deseada. (pág. 33)

El vídeo de ancho horizontal aparece

estirado verticalmente, o aparecen

bandas negras en las partes superior

e inferior de la pantalla. O el vídeo 4:3

aparece estirado horizontalmente.

– Cambie la relación de aspecto del televisor. (pág. 32)

Aparece ruido cuadrado (mosaicos)

en la pantalla.

– Se podrían ver bloques en las imágenes en escenas que contengan movimientos rápidos

debido a las características de la tecnología de compresión de imagen digital.

La pantalla de reproducción

se perturbará si se graba vídeo DVD

en una videograbadora, o se reproduce

a través de una videograbadora.

– Este reproductor cumple con la protección contra copias analógicas. Algunos discos

contienen una señal de prohibición de copia. Si intenta reproducir tales discos a través

de una videograbadora, o grabar a una videograbadora y reproducir la señal,

la protección contra copia impedirá la reproducción normal.

No hay salida de audio o las imágenes

no se reproducen adecuadamente.

– En algunos discos en los que se ha grabado contenido protegido por derechos de autor

es posible que no haya salida de audio o que las imágenes no se reproduzcan

adecuadamente.

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

No hay sonido o está distorsionado. – Compruebe que el cable de audio está correctamente conectado. (pág. 10)

– No hay sonido durante el modo de reproducción fija, cámara lenta, avance rápido

y retroceso rápido. (pág. 7)

– El audio puede no salir dependiendo del estado de grabación del audio, por ejemplo,

cuando se haya grabado como contenido de audio, audio que no sea una señal de audio

o audio no estándar. (pág. 3)

Los canales de audio izquierdo

y derecho están invertidos o el

sonido sólo sale por uno de ellos.

– Compruebe la conexión de audio. (pág. 10)

No hay salida de audio o las imágenes

no se reproducen adecuadamente.

– En algunos discos en los que se ha grabado contenido protegido por derechos de autor

es posible que no haya salida de audio o que las imágenes no se reproduzcan

adecuadamente.

No se puede escuchar el tipo de audio

que se desea y/o el número de canales.

– Consulte el ajuste Salida de audio y “Formatos de salida de audio”. (pág. 34, 35)

No se escucha el sonido de PIP

(audio secundario).

– Ajuste Coaxial/Optica o HDMI en PCM/Recodificar. (pág. 34)

– Para escuchar el audio secundario, pulse 2ND AUDIO. (pág. 6)

– Dependiendo del disco, es posible que tenga que activar el audio secundario en el menú

principal del disco (pág. 7)

RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS

40 Es

■ Red

■ Mensajes en pantalla

– Los mensajes siguientes aparecerán en la pantalla del televisor si el disco que intenta reproducir no es apropiado

o la operación no es correcta.

Problema Causas posibles y soluciones

No se puede conectar a Internet. – Conecte correctamente el cable de red.

– Encienda el equipo conectado como, por ejemplo, un módem o enrutador de banda ancha.

– Conecte correctamente el módem y/o el enrutador de banda ancha.

– Configure correctamente el valor o valores de la red. Compruebe “Red”. (pág. 32)

No se pueden descargar contenidos

BD-Live.

– Conecte correctamente el cable de red. (pág. 16)

– Conecte el dispositivo de memoria USB correctamente. Compruebe que el dispositivo

de memoria USB está conectado al puerto USB del reproductor. (pág. 16)

– Compruebe si el disco BD admite BD-Live.

– Compruebe el ajuste de “Conexión a Internet”. (pág. 32)

– Conecte el dispositivo de memoria USB formateado en FAT16 o FAT32.

– Se recomienda conectar el dispositivo de memoria USB con al menos 2 GB de espacio libre.

Si no hay suficiente espacio libre, formatee el dispositivo de memoria USB. (pág. 30)

– Consulte el manual del usuario suministrado del disco o póngase en contacto con el

fabricante del disco.

No se puede detectar el servidor DLNA. – Conecte correctamente el cable de red.

– Encienda el equipo conectado como, por ejemplo un enrutador de banda ancha

o el servidor.

– Asegúrese de que el reproductor y el servidor están conectados al mismo punto de

acceso.

– Configure correctamente el valor o valores de la red. Compruebe “Red”. (pág. 32)

– Dependiendo del servidor DLNA, es posible que sea necesario autorizar al reproductor

desde el servidor.

No se puede reproducir el archivo

en el servidor doméstico de red.

– Asegúrese de que el archivo se puede reproducir. (pág. 3)

– Compruebe la configuración del servidor DLNA.

– La calidad de funcionamiento y reproducción podría verse afectada por las condiciones

de la red doméstica.

Mensaje de error Causas posibles y soluciones

Not Support This File! – El reproductor no admite el archivo. Consulte “Tipos de discos/archivos que se pueden utilizar con

este reproductor” (pág. 3).

¡Código de región erróneo! – El disco tiene un código de región incompatible. Consulte “Información de gestión de la región”

(pág. 3).

La red ha fallado. – El reproductor no se puede conectar a la red. Compruebe la conexión (pág. 16) y los valores de la red

(pág. 32).

Red está bien, proxy ha

fallado.

– El reproductor no se puede conectar al servidor proxy. Consulte “Configuración Proxy” (pág. 32).

The Setting is prohibited,

please setup again.

– La conexión de BD-Live está prohibida. Consulte “Conexión BD-Live” (pág. 32).

¡No se encuentra un fichero

válido para actualización!

– Compruebe si el archivo de actualización está en la carpeta apropiada.

¡La actualización ha fallado

por alguna razón!

– La actualización ha fallado. Compruebe si el archivo de actualización está dañado o es ilegible.

41 Es

INFORMACIÓN ADICIONAL

Español

AVCHD

AVCHD es un nuevo formato (estándar) para cámaras

de vídeo de alta definición que se puede utilizar para

grabar y reproducir imágenes de alta definición (HD).

BD-Live™

BD-Live es un estándar de BD que utiliza una conexión

de red y permite al reproductor conectarse a la red para

descargar vídeos promocionales y otros datos.

BDMV

BDMV (Blu-ray Disc Movie, BD-MV=Películas en

disco Blu-ray BD-MV) se refiere a uno de los formatos

de aplicación utilizados para BD-ROM que constituye

una de las especificaciones de los discos Blu-ray.

BDMV es un formato de grabación equivalente al Vídeo

DVD de la especificación DVD.

Blu-ray 3D™

Blu-ray 3D le permite ver imágenes 3D de alta

definición completa.

BONUSVIEW

Los discos compatibles con BONUSVIEW le permiten

disfrutar simultáneamente de subcanal de vídeo para dos

pantallas, subcanal de audio y subtítulos. Aparece una

pequeña pantalla dentro de la pantalla principal durante

la reproducción (Imagen en imagen).

Buzón (LB 4:3)

Un tamaño de pantalla con barras negras en las partes

superior e inferior de la imagen para permitir la

visualización de material en pantalla ancha (16:9) en un

televisor 4:3 conectado.

Color Space

El Color Space es una gama de colores que se puede

representar. RGB es un espacio de color basado en el

modelo de color RGB (rojo, verde y azul) y se utiliza

normalmente para monitores de PC. YCbCr es un

espacio de color basado en una señal de luminancia (Y)

y dos señales de diferencia de color (Cb y Cr).

Deep Color

Deep Color se refiere al uso de diversas profundidades de

color en pantallas, a partir de las profundidades de 24 bits

de versiones anteriores de la especificación HDMI. Esta

profundidad de bits adicional permite que las pantallas

HDTV y otros tipos de pantallas pasen de millones a miles

de millones de colores y eliminan la aparición de bandas

de color en pantallas permitiendo unas transiciones tonales

suaves y una gradación ligera entre colores. La mayor

relación de contraste permite representar muchos más

tonos de gris entre blanco y negro. Además Deep Color

aumenta el número de colores disponibles dentro de los

límites definidos por el espacio de color RGB o YCbCr.

Dirección MAC

La dirección MAC es un valor único asignado a un

dispositivo de red para fines identificativos.

DivX®

DivX® es una tecnología multimedia popular creada por

DivX, Inc. Los archivos multimedia DivX® contienen

vídeo muy comprimido con una alta calidad visual que

mantiene un tamaño de archivo relativamente pequeño.

Los archivos DivX® también pueden incluir características

multimedia avanzadas como menús, subtítulos y pistas de

audio alternativas. Muchos archivos multimedia DivX®

están disponibles para descarga en línea y puede crear sus

propios archivos utilizando su propio contenido

y herramientas fáciles de utilizar de DivX.com.

Dolby Digital

Un sistema de sonido desarrollado por Dolby Laboratories

Inc. que da un ambiente de sala de cine a la salida de audio

cuando el producto está conectado con un amplificador

o procesador Dolby Digital.

Dolby Digital Plus

Un sistema de sonido desarrollado como una extensión

de Dolby Digital. Esta tecnología de codificación de

audio soporta sonido envolvente de 7.1 multicanales.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD es una tecnología de codificación sin

pérdidas que soporta hasta 8 canales de sonido envolvente

multicanal para los discos ópticos de próxima generación.

El sonido reproducido conserva fielmente, bit a bit,

la fuente original.

DRC (Control de gama dinámica)

DRC le permite ajustar la gama entre los sonidos más

alto y más bajo (gama dinámica) para reproducir a un

volumen intermedio. Utilícela cuando sea difícil

escuchar los diálogos o durante las horas en que la

reproducción pueda molestar a los vecinos.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

La tecnología DSD guarda señales de vídeo en soportes de

almacenamiento digitales, como Super Audio CD.

Mediante DSD, las señales se guardan como valores de un

solo bit en frecuencias de muestreo altas, de 2,8224 MHz,

mientras que el modelado del ruido y el sobremuestreo se

utilizan para reducir la distorsión, un fenómeno habitual en

situaciones de alta cuantificación de señales de audio.

Debido a la elevada frecuencia de muestreo, es posible

obtener una calidad de audio superior a la que ofrece el

formato PCM utilizado para CD de audio normales.

DTS

Un sistema de sonido digital desarrollado por DTS, Inc.

para su uso en salas de cine.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio es una nueva tecnología

desarrollada para el formato de disco óptico de alta

definición de próxima generación.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio es una tecnología de compresión

de audio sin pérdidas desarrollada para el formato de disco

óptico de alta definición de próxima generación.

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential es una tecnología de

compresión de audio sin pérdidas desarrollada para el

formato de disco óptico de alta definición de próxima

generación.

GLOSARIO

ESPECIFICACIONES

42 Es

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, Interfaz

Multimedia de Alta Definición) es una interfaz que

soporta vídeo y audio en una sola conexión digital. La

conexión HDMI lleva señales de vídeo, lo mismo

estándar que de alta definición, y señales de audio en

multicanal a componentes A/V, por ejemplo, televisores

equipados con HDMI en forma digital y sin degradación.

Sonido PCM lineal

PCM lineal es un formato de grabación de señales

utilizado para CD de audio y en algunos discos DVD

y Blu-ray. El sonido de CD de audio se graba a 44,1 kHz

con 16 bits. (El sonido se graba entre 48 kHz con 16 bits

y 96 kHz con 24 bits en discos DVD y entre 48 kHz con

16 bits y 192 kHz con 24 bits en discos BD.)

Sincronismo de labios

Sincronismo de labios, una abreviatura de “lip

synchronization”, o sincronización de labios, es un

término que hace referencia tanto a un problema habitual

como a la posibilidad de mantener sincronizadas las

señales de audio y vídeo durante la posproducción y la

transmisión. La latencia de audio y vídeo requiere

complejos ajustes por parte del usuario, pero la versión

1.3 de HDMI incorpora una función de sincronización

automática de audio y vídeo que permite a los

dispositivos sincronizarse de forma automática y precisa

y sin la intervención del usuario.

Panorámico (PS 4:3)

Un tamaño de pantalla que recorta los costados de la

imagen para permitir la visualización de material de

pantalla ancha (16:9) en un televisor 4:3 conectado.

Subtítulos

Son las líneas de texto que aparecen en la parte inferior

de la pantalla y que traducen o transcriben el diálogo.

Están grabadas en muchos discos de vídeo DVD y BD.

Subtítulos

La audiodescripción es un tipo de subtítulos, la diferencia entre

los subtítulos y la audiodescripción es que los primeros están

diseñados para personas sin problemas auditivos, mientras que

los segundos lo están para personas que no oyen. Los

subtítulos no suelen mostrar todo el audio. La audiodescripción

muestra efectos de sonido (por ejemplo, un “suena el teléfono”

y “ruido de pasos”), mientras que los subtítulos no lo hacen.

Antes de seleccionar este ajuste, asegúrese de que el disco

contiene información de audiodescripción.

Menú principal

En un Vídeo BD/Vídeo DVD es el menú para

seleccionar elementos tales como el capítulo que se va

a reproducir y el idioma de los subtítulos. En algunos

vídeos DVD, al menú principal también se le denomina

“Menú de títulos”.

x.v.Color

x.v.Color reproduce una gama de colores más amplia

que antes, mostrando casi todos los colores que puede

■ Generalidades

Alimentación

[Modelos de EE. UU. y Canadá].............................110-240 V CA, 60 Hz

[Modelos para América Central y del Sur] .....110 – 240 V CA, 50/60 Hz

[Modelos para Europa y Rusia] ..................................... CA 230 V, 50 Hz

[Modelo para Australia] ..........................................110-240 V CA, 50 Hz

[Modelo para Asia] .........................................CA 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Modelo para Taiwán].....................................CA 110 – 120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Modelo para Corea] ...................................................... CA 220 V, 60 Hz

Consumo de energía (normal) .............................................................. 25 W

Consumo (en espera) .............................................................0,5 W o menos

Dimensiones (Ancho × Alto × Largo) .......................... 435 × 96 × 316 mm

Peso ................................................................................................... 4,05 kg

■ Rendimiento de audio

Nivel de salida de audio (1 kHz, 0 dB, BD/DVD/CD-DA) ........... 2 ± 0,3 V

Relación señal/ruido (BD/DVD/CD-DA) ............................... 115 dB o más

Rango dinámico

BD/DVD .............................................................................. 105 dB o más

CD-DA ................................................................................. 100 dB o más

Distorsión armónica (1 kHz)

BD/DVD ....................................................................... 0,0028% o menos

CD-DA ........................................................................... 0,003 % o menos

Respuesta de frecuencia

BD/DVD ........................................... 2 Hz a 22 kHz (muestreo a 48 kHz)

2 Hz a 44 kHz (muestreo a 96 kHz)

CD-DA ................................................................................ 2 Hz a 20 kHz

■ Entrada/salida

Salida HDMI ................................................................. Conector tipo A × 1

480i/576i/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p/1080p@24Hz,

Soporte Deep Color, x.v. Color

Salida de vídeo componente......................................Y: 1 Vp-p (75 ohmios)

B, PR: 0,7 Vp-p (75 ohmios)

Salida de vídeo ...............................................................1 Vp-p (75 ohmios)

Salida digital.............................................................Óptica × 1, Coaxial × 1

Salida de audio analógica...................................................... 7.1 canales × 1

Mixed 2 canales × 1

Conectores USB ...........................................................................Tipo A × 2

Otros equipos ............................................................... Remote IN/OUT × 1

RS-232C × 1 (instalación personalizada),

Ethernet × 1

Las especificaciones están sujetas a cambio sin previo aviso.

ESPECIFICACIONES

43 Es

INFORMACIÓN ADICIONAL

Español

■ Propiedad intelectual

– El material audio-visual puede consistir de productos

con propiedad intelectual que no se deben grabar sin

la autorización del poseedor de dicha propiedad

intelectual. Remítase a las leyes aplicables en su país.

– Este producto contiene tecnología de protección de

copia que está protegida por patentes de los EE. UU.

y otros derechos de propiedad intelectual de Rovi

Corporation. Se prohíbe la ingeniería inversa o el

desarmado de la unidad.

– Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas

comerciales de Dolby Laboratories.

– Fabricado con licencia bajo las patentes de EE.UU.

número: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;

5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 y otras patentes de

los EE.UU. e internacionales emitidas o pendientes.

DTS y el símbolo son marcas registradas y los

logotipos DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio y DTS

son marcas comerciales de DTS, Inc.. El producto

comprende también el software. © DTS, Inc. Todos

– “Blu-ray Disc

™

”, “Blu-ray

™

”, “Blu-ray 3D

™

”,

“BD-Live

™

”, “BONUSVIEW

™

” y los logotipos son

marcas comerciales de Blu-ray Disc Association.

– es una marca comercial de DVD Format/Logo

Licensing Corporation.

– HDMI, el logotipo HDMI y High-Definition

Multimedia Interface son marcas comerciales

o marcas registradas de HDMI Licensing LLC.

– “x.v.Color” y el logotipo “x.v.Color” son marcas

comerciales.

– “AVCHD” y el logotipo “AVCHD” son marcas

comerciales de Panasonic Corporation y Sony

Corporation.

– Java y todas las marcas comerciales y logotipos

basados en Java son marcas comerciales o marcas

registradas de Sun Microsystems, Inc. en los Estados

Unidos y/o otros países.

– Este producto se otorga con licencia bajo la licencia

de cartera de patentes AVC y la licencia de cartera

de patentes VC-1 para su uso personal y no

comercial por parte de un consumidor para (i)

codificar vídeo que cumpla con las normas AVC

y VC-1 (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) y/o (ii) descodificar

vídeo AVC/VC-1 codificado por un consumidor

dedicado a una actividad personal y no comercial y/o

que se obtuvo de un proveedor de vídeo con licencia

para proporcionar vídeo AVC/VC-1. No se otorga

o se da por supuesta licencia alguna para cualquier

otro uso. Se puede obtener información adicional de

MPEG LA, LLC.

Consulte http://www.mpegla.com.

– Windows Media Player es una marca comercial

o una marca comercial registrada de Microsoft

Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros países.

– DLNA y DLNA CERTIFIED son marcas

comerciales y/o marcas de servicio de Digital Living

Network Alliance.

– YouTube y el logotipo YouTube son marcas

comerciales de Google. Inc.

– “DivX®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus™ HD y los

logotipos asociados son marcas comerciales

registradas de DivX, Inc. y se utilizan con licencia.”

– “DivX Certified® para reproducir vídeo DivX®

y DivX Plus™ HD (H.264/.MKV) hasta 1080p HD

y contenido de calidad.”

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® es un formato de vídeo digital creado

por DivX, Inc. Este equipo es un dispositivo DivX Certified® oficial

que reproduce vídeo DivX. Visite divx.com para obtener más

información y conseguir herramientas de software para convertir

sus archivos a vídeo DivX.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: este dispositivo DivX

Certified® debe registrarse para poder reproducir películas DivX

Video-on-Demand (VOD) compradas. Para obtener el código de

registro, busque el apartado DivX VOD en el menú de configuración

del dispositivo. Visite el sitio vod.divx.com para obtener más

información sobre el proceso de registro.

i Ko

최고의 성능을 위하여 본 설명서를 주의깊게 읽어 보십시오.

본 설명서를 안전한 곳에 보관하고 나중에 참고하십시오.

2 서늘하고 건조하며 통풍이 잘 되는 청결한 곳에 본 기기를

설치하고, 직사광선, 발열기구, 진동, 먼지, 습기를 멀리하고

추운 곳에 두지 마십시오. 환기가 잘 되게 하려면 아래와 같

이 여유를 두십시오.

위쪽: 10 cm

뒤쪽: 10 cm

옆쪽: 10 cm

3 윙윙거리는 소리를 방지하려면 다른 전자 제품, 모터 또는

변압기에서 본 기기를 멀리 떨어뜨려 설치하십시오.

4 본 기기 내부의 결로 현상을 방지하려면 낮은 온도에서 높

은 온도로 온도가 급격하게 변하는 곳에 본 기기를 노출시

키거나 습도가 높은 환경 (예, 가습기가 있는 룸)에 본 기기

를 설치하지 마십시오. 화재가 발생하거나, 기기가 손상되

거나, 사용자가 감전되거나 부상당할 수도 있습니다.

5 이물질이 본 기기에 떨어질 수 있는 곳, 또는 액체가 떨어지

거나 흐를 수 있는 곳에 본 기기를 설치하지 마십시오. 본

기기위에 다음과 같은 물체를 올려놓지 마십시오:

– 다른 기기. 본 기기의 표면이 손상되거나 변색될 수도 있

습니다.

– 연소되는 물체 (예, 초). 화재가 발생하거나 본 기기가 손

상되거나 사용자가 부상당할 수도 있습니다.

– 액체가 담긴 용기. 용기가 넘어져 사용자가 감전되거나

본 기기가 손상될 수도 있습니다.

6 열 복사가 방해되지 않도록 신문, 책상보 및 커튼 등으로 본

기기를 덮지 마십시오. 본 기기의 내부 온도가 높아지면 화

재가 발생하거나 본 기기가 손상되거나 사용자가 부상당할

수도 있습니다.

7 모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 기기의 플러그를 연결하지

마십시오.

8 본 기기를 뒤집어서 조작하지 마십시오. 본 기기가 과열되

어 손상될 수도 있습니다.

9 스위치, 노브 또는 코드에 강한 압력을 가하지 마십시오.

10 전원 케이블을 콘센트에서 분리하는 경우, 항상 플러그를

잡고 케이블을 잡아 당기지 마십시오.

화학 솔벤트로 본 기기를 닦지 마십시오. 표면의 마무리가

훼손될 수도 있습니다. 깨끗하고 마른 헝겊을 사용하십시오.

12 반드시 본 기기에 지정된 전압만을 사용하십시오. 지정된

전압 이외의 전압을 사용하는 것은 매우 위험하며 화재가

발생하거나 본 기기가 손상되거나 사용자가 부상당할 수도

있습니다. 지정된 전압 이외의 전압을 사용하여 발생한 손

상에 대해서 Yamaha는 어떠한 책임도 지지 않습니다.

13 번개에 의한 손상을 방지하려면 뇌우시 전원 케이블을 콘센

트에서 분리하십시오.

14 본 기기를 개조하거나 수리하지 마십시오. 서비스가 필요한

때에는 공인 Yamaha 정비사에게 의뢰하십시오. 어떤 이유

로든지 절대로 캐비닛을 열지 마십시오.

15 오랜 기간 동안 본 기기를 사용하지 않는 경우 (예, 휴가),

전원을 콘센트에서 분리하십시오.

16 본 기기의 고장을 결정하기 전에 일반 조작 에러의 "문제 해

결" 장을 반드시 읽어 보십시오.

17 본 기기를 옮기기 전에 을 눌러 본 기기를 대기 모드로 설

정하고 AC 전원 플러그를 콘센트에서 분리하십시오.

18 주변 온도가 급격히 변하는 경우, 결로 현상이 발생합니다.

전원 케이블을 콘센트에서 분리한 후 본 기기를 둡니다.

19 본 기기를 장시간 사용하는 경우, 기기가 과열될 수도 있습

니다. 전원을 끄고 식도록 본 기기를 둡니다.

20 기기를 설치할 때 벽면 콘센트에 쉽게 접근할 수 있도록하

여 주십시오.

21 건전지를 직사광선, 불꽃 등과 같이 과도한 화기에 노출시

키지 마십시오.

레이저 안전

본 기기는 레이저를 사용하고 있습니다. 시력이 손상될 수 있으

므로 공인 서비스 기술자만 커버를 열고 본 기기를 수리해야 합

니다.

위험

본 기기를 열면 가시 레이저 방사선이 방출됩니다. 육안으로 빔

을 직접 보지 마십시오. 본 기기 플러그가 콘센트에 연결된 경

우, 디스크 트레이의 입구나 다른 개구부 또는 내부에 눈을 가

깝게 대지 마십시오.

주의: 본 기기를 조작하기 전에 읽어 주십시오.

본 기기가 콘센트에 연결되어 있으면 으로 본 기기

의 자체 전원을 끄더라도 전원이 차단되지 않습니다.

이를 대기 모드라 합니다. 이 상태에서 본 기기는 아주

적은 양의 전원을 소모하도록 설계되어 있습니다.

경고

화재 및 감전의 위험을 줄이기 위해 본체를 비나 습기

등에 노출시키지 마십시오.

본 제품의 레이저 부품은 클래스 1에 제한을 초과하는

방사능을 방사합니다.

주의

여기서 지정한 이외의, 조정이나 제어 또는 동작을 실시했

을 경우, 유해한 방사선에 노출될 위험이 있습니다.

레이저 사양

Class 1 레이저 제품

파장: 790 nm (CD)/655 nm (DVD)/405 nm (BD)

레이저 출력: 최대 1 mW

1 Ko

한국어

본 플레이어에서 할 수 있는 작업 .............. 2

부속품 ....................................... 2

디스크 및 파일에 대하여 ...................... 3

본 플레이어에서 사용할 수 있는 디스크/파일 유형 ...... 3

디스크 넣기............................................................... 4

디스크 주의사항........................................................ 4

각 부 명칭 및 기능 ........................... 5

앞면 패널 .................................................................. 5

리모콘....................................................................... 6

연결 방법 ................................... 10

뒷면 패널 ................................................................ 10

HDMI 연결 ................................... 12

HDMI 단자에 연결 .................................................. 12

Blu-ray 3D 디스크 재생을 위한 연결...................... 12

비디오 연결 ................................. 13

컴포넌트/비디오 잭에 연결...................................... 13

오디오 연결 ................................. 14

디지털 오디오 잭/단자에 연결 ................................. 14

오디오 잭에 연결..................................................... 15

네트워크 및 USB 연결 ........................ 16

NETWORK 단자 및 USB 포트에 연결 .................... 16

기타 연결 ................................... 17

REMOTE CONTROL 잭에 연결.............................. 17

전원 케이블 연결..................................................... 17

INITIAL WIZARD/EASY SETUP ................... 18

Initial Wizard/Easy Setup을 사용하여 설정 ........... 18

HOME/MEDIA 메뉴 ............................. 19

사진/음악/비디오 재생 ............................................ 19

네트워크 컨텐츠 사용.............................................. 21

네트워크 서비스 사용 ........................ 22

YouTube™에서 비디오 재생.................... 22

고급 재생 조작 .............................. 23

On Screen 메뉴 ...................................................... 23

상태 메뉴 ................................................................ 24

Bookmark 사용 ...................................................... 25

프로그램 재생 ......................................................... 25

검색 사용 ................................................................ 25

BONUSVIEW™ 및 BD-Live™ 즐기기 ..................... 26

Picture in Picture 기능 사용

(보조 오디오/비디오 재생) .................................. 26

BD-Live™ 기능 사용 .............................................. 26

SETUP 메뉴 .................................. 27

SETUP 메뉴 조작 예 .............................................. 29

General Setting ..................................................... 30

Display Setting ...................................................... 32

Audio Setting......................................................... 34

System Information ............................................... 34

오디오 출력 형식에 대하여...................................... 35

비디오 출력 형식에 대하여...................................... 36

소프트웨어 업그레이드 ....................... 37

소프트웨어 업그레이드 ........................................... 37

문제 해결 ................................... 38

전원 ....................................................................... 38

기본 조작 ............................................................... 38

디스크 재생 ............................................................ 38

사진 ....................................................................... 39

사운드 .................................................................... 39

네트워크 ................................................................ 40

화면의 메시지 ........................................................ 40

용어집 ...................................... 41

제품 사양 ................................... 42

일반 사항 ............................................................... 42

오디오 성능 ............................................................ 42

입력/출력 ............................................................... 42

저작권 .................................................................... 43

(본 설명서 끝)

■ 본 사용 설명서에 대하여

– 본 설명서는 리모콘을 사용할 수 있는 경우 리모콘

으로 본 플레이어를 조작하는 방법에 대해 설명합

니다. 일부 조작은 앞면 패널 버튼을 사용하여 수

행할 수도 있습니다.

– 참고에는 안전 및 조작 방법에 대한 중요한 정보가

들어 있습니다. 힌트는 조작을 위한 팁입니다.

– 본 설명서는 제품이 생산되기 전에 인쇄됩니다. 제

품 향상 등에 따라 디자인과 제품 사양이 변경될

수 있습니다. 설명서와 제품 간에 차이가 있는 경

우에는 제품을 우선시 합니다.

본 설명서에 사용된 아이콘

아이콘은 특정 형식에서 사용 가능한 버튼/기능을 나타

내기 위해 사용합니다.

: BD-Video

: DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD+VR, DVD-

Audio

: 오디오 CD, Super Audio CD

: AVCHD, WMV, DivX

: MP3, WMA, WAV

: JPEG

1. 소개

2. 연결

3. 재생

4. 설정

5. 추가 정보

Information about software ......................................... i

DVD

VIDEO

MUSIC

PHOTO

2 Ko

소개

* 재생 가능한 디스크 및 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 3페이지를 참조하십시오.

** 이 기능을 사용하려면 네트워크 설정이 필요합니다.

제품에 다음과 같은 액세서리가 제공되었는지 확인하십시오.

본 플레이어에서 할 수 있는 작업

언어, 해상도, 화면비율 간편 설정

18페이지

언어 및 TV 설정을 할 수 있습니다.

상업용으로 발매된 Blu-ray™/DVD/CD/SA-CD/DVD-Audio 디스크 재생

23페이지

본 플레이어에서는 Blu-ray Discs™(BD 디스크) 이외에 다양한 다른 디스크의 재생도 지원

됩니다.

BONUSVIEW™, BD-Live™ 등 재생

26페이지

최신 BD 디스크에서 동영상을 즐길 수 있습니다.

디스크에서 비디오, 음악, 사진 파일 재생

19페이지

녹화한 디스크를 본 플레이어에서 재생할 수 있습니다.

디스크/USB 메모리 장치에서 비디오, 음악, 사진 파일 재생

19페이지

디스크/USB 메모리 장치에 녹화된 파일을 본 플레이어에서 재생할 수 있습니다.

홈 네트워크 서버에서 비디오, 음악, 사진 파일 재생

21페이지

본 플레이어를 네트워크 서버에 연결하면 TV 또는 AV 리시버에서 PC 컨텐츠를 재생할 수

있습니다.

리모콘으로 TV, AV 리시버 등 조작

30페이지

HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 장치를 연결하면 HDMI Control 기능을 사용하여 리모콘 하나로

여러 장치를 조작할 수 있습니다.

네트워크 서비스 상의 스트리밍 재생 컨텐츠**

22페이지

본 플레이어를 이용하여 인터넷을 통해 즉시 비디오를 즐길 수 있습니다.

부속품

배터리(×2)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

전원 케이블리모콘 오디오 핀 케이블 비디오 핀 케이블

3 Ko

한국어

소개

■ 본 플레이어에서 사용할 수 있는 디스

크/파일 유형

– 본 플레이어에서는 12 cm 및 8 cm 디스크를 재생

할 수 있습니다. 8 cm를 12 cm 어댑터를 사용하지

마십시오.

– 호환 표준을 준수하는 디스크에 한하여 디스크 라

벨에 공식 로고가 표시되어 있습니다. 호환 표준을

준수하는 디스크를 사용하십시오. 이 표준을 따르

지 않는 디스크의 재생은 보장되지 않습니다. 디스

크가 재생되더라도 화질 또는 음질은 보장되지 않

습니다.

– BD/DVD Video 플레이어 및 디스크에는 디스크를

재생할 수 있는 지역을 나타내는 지역 코드가 있습

니다.

– BD/DVD Video 조작 및 기능은 본 설명서의 설명

과 다를 수 있으며, 디스크 제조업체의 설정에 따

라 일부 조작이 제한될 수 있습니다.

– 디스크 재생 도중 메뉴 화면 또는 조작 지침이 표

시되는 경우 표시된 절차를 따르십시오.

– 디스크에 따라 왼쪽 표의 디스크 중 일부가 재생되

지 않을 수 있습니다.

– 본 플레이어에서 재생되는 모든 녹화 미디어를 파

이널라이즈하십시오.

– "파이널라이즈"는 녹화된 디스크가 본 플레이어는

물론 다른 플레이어/레코더에서도 재생되도록 레

코더에서 진행되는 처리 작업입니다. 본 플레이어

에서는 파이널라이즈된 디스크만 재생됩니다. (본

플레이어에는 디스크를 파이널라이즈하는 기능이

없습니다.)

– 디스크, USB 메모리 장치 및 네트워크에서 일부

파일의 재생은 보장되지 않습니다.

– 저작권 보호 파일은 USB 메모리 장치 및 네트워크

를 통해 재생할 수 없습니다.

MP3/WMA/WAV 오디오 파일 요구사항

– 샘플링 주파수: 32 - 48 kHz(MP3/WMA),

LPCM 44.1 kHz/16 비트/스테레오(WAV)

– 비트 전송률: 8 - 320 kbps(MP3) 이내,

32 - 192 kbps(WMA)

디스크 및 파일에 대하여

디스크 유형 녹화 형식 데이터 형식

BD-ROM/BD-R/

BD-RE

BD-Video --

DVD-ROM DVD-Video/DVD-

Audio

DVD-R/DVD-R

DL/DVD-RW

DVD-Video/DVD-

VR/AVCHD/데이터

디스크

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

DVD+R/DVD+R

DL/DVD+RW

DVD-Video/

DVD+VR/AVCHD/

데이터 디스크

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

CD-ROM CDDA/HDCD --

CD-R/CD-RW CDDA/데이터 디스

크

DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

SA-CD SA-CD --

USB -- DivX/WMV/MP3/

WAV/WMA/JPEG

네트워크 -- WMV/MP3/WMA/

WAV/JPEG

지역 관리 정보

지역

BD-Video DVD-Video

미국 및 캐나다 지역 코드 "A" 또는

"ALL"

지역 코드 "1" 또는

"ALL"

아시아 지역 코드 "A" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "3" 또는

"ALL"

대만 지역 코드 "A" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "3" 또는

"ALL"

한국 지역 코드 "A" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "3" 또는

"ALL"

ALL

중남미 지역 코드 "A" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "4" 또는

"ALL"

유럽 지역 코드 "B" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "2" 또는

"ALL"

호주 지역 코드 "B" 또는

"ALL"

지역 코드 "4" 또는

"ALL"

러시아 지역 코드 "C" 또는

"ALL"

지역 번호 "5" 또는

"ALL"

참고

지역 관리 정보

지역

BD-Video DVD-Video

ALL

4 Ko

디스크 및 파일에 대하여

WMV 파일 요구사항

– WMV9, 최대 해상도는 1,920 × 1,080입니다.

Super Audio CD(SA-CD)에 대하여

– 이 오디오 형식은 현재의 CD 표준을 기반으로 하

지만 더 많은 양의 고음질 정보를 포함하고 있습니

다. 디스크에는 단층, 이층, 하이브리드의 3종류가

있습니다. 하이브리드 디스크는 표준 오디오 CD

및 Super Audio CD 정보가 모두 포함되어 있어서

기존 CD 플레이어 및 Super Audio CD 플레이어

에서도 재생할 수 있습니다.

– 호환되는 AV 리시버를 사용하면 본 플레이어에서

HDMI를 통한 DSD 데이터 전송이 지원됩니다.

– 본 기기의 표시창에는 디스크에 들어 있는 텍스트

데이터가 표시되지 않습니다.

■ 디스크 넣기

– 라벨이 위로 오도록 디스크를 넣으십시오.

– 양면 녹화된 디스크의 경우, 재생할 면이 아래로

가도록 넣으십시오.

– 디스크 및 본 플레이어의 설정에 따라 재생이 자동

으로 시작될 수 있습니다.

– 디스크에 따라 메뉴가 먼저 표시될 수 있습니다.

– 디스크에 따라 디스크를 읽어들이는 시간이 다를

수 있습니다.

■ 디스크 주의사항

긁힘 및 먼지 주의

– BD, DVD 및 CD 디스크는 먼지, 지문 및 특히 스

크래치에 취약합니다. 스크래치가 있는 디스크는

재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. 디스크를 조심해서 다

루고 안전한 장소에 보관하십시오.

적절한 디스크 보관

취급 시 주의 사항

픽업 렌즈 청소

– 시판용 클리닝 디스크는 절대 사용하지 마십시오.

렌즈가 손상될 수 있습니다.

– 렌즈를 청소하려면 가까운 공인 Yamaha 서비스

센터에 요청하십시오.

힌트

참고

Super Audio CD 디스크 종류

단층 디스크

HD 계층

이층 디스크

하이브리드 디스크

HD 계층

CD 계층

HD 계층

Hybrid Super Audio CD 디스크

모든 CD 플레이어에서

재생되는 CD 계층

- 고화질 DSD 스테레오

- 고화질 DSD 멀티 채널

다음이 포함된 고밀도 계층:

디스크를 디스크 케이스의 가운데에 넣고

케이스와 디스크를 똑바로 세워 보관하십

시오.

직사광선에 노출된 곳, 난방 기구 근처 또

는 습도가 높은 장소에 디스크를 보관하

지 마십시오.

디스크를 떨어뜨리거나 강한 진동이나

충격을 가하지 마십시오.

먼지 또는 습기가 많은 장소에 디스크를

보관하지 마십시오.

– 표면이 더러워진 경우 물에 살짝 적신

부드러운 헝겊으로 살살 닦으십시오. 디

스크를 닦을 때에는 항상 가운데 구멍에

서 바깥쪽으로 닦으십시오.

– 레코드용 클리닝 스프레이, 벤젠, 시너,

정전기 방지 용액 또는 기타 용해제를

사용하지 마십시오.

– 표면을 만지지 마십시오.

– 디스크에 종이 또는 접착 라벨을 붙이지 마십시오.

– 디스크의 재생 면이 더러워지거나 긁힌 경우 플레

이어가 호환되지 않는 디스크로 판단하여 디스크

트레이가 열리거나, 디스크를 올바로 재생하지 못

할 수 있습니다. 부드러운 헝겊으로 재생 면의 먼

지를 닦아 주십시오.

5 Ko

한국어

소개

■ 앞면 패널

1 p (켬/대기)

2 USB 포트(16페이지)

3 SA-CD 표시등: SA-CD를 넣고 SA-CD 계층(4페이

지)󱽹 󱥕󲤒󲶍󱊩 󲁅󰴦󰱞󰫽󰬙.

4 표시창

5 디스크 트레이(4페이지)

6 (꺼냄): 󰵉󱫙󲢡 󲫭󱀽󱾩󱆱 󱸩󰒥󰣍 󰬠󱫪󰫽󰬙.

7 (뒤로 검색/뒤로 건너뛰기): 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹

󱆩󱊩 󰳙󱂑 󰒩󰤽󰼥󰔕, 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆩󰔕 󱾽󱽱󱊩 󰳙󱂑 󰒵󱣾󲶞

󰫽󰬙.

8 (앞으로 검색/앞으로 건너뛰기):

󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆩󱊩 󱶓󱽱󱂑 󰒩󰤽󰼥󰔕, 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆩󰔕 󱾽󱽱

󱊩 󱶓󱽱󱂑 󰒵󱣾󲶞󰫽󰬙.

9 (재생)

0 (일시 정지)

A (정지)

B PURE DIRECT: Pure Direct 모드(7페이지)󰐵 󱋝󰴑 1/

󱋝󰴑 2/Off󱂑 󱓵󰓲󰱞󰫽󰬙. Pure Direct 󱋝󰴑󰐵 󱋝󰴑 1/

󱋝󰴑 2󱂑 󱥙󲁊󰱑 󰓲󱻥 󱒹󲫱󱾩 󲁅󰴦󰱞󰫽󰬙.

리모콘에 배터리 넣기

– 리모콘에 충격을 가하거나 물이나 습기가 심한 곳

에 놓아두지 마십시오.

– 플레이어의 리모콘 센서가 직사광선 또는 다른 강

한 빛에 노출된 경우 리모콘이 작동하지 않을 수

있습니다.

– 배터리를 잘못 사용하면 누액되거나 파열될 수 있

습니다. 배터리 경고를 읽고 배터리를 올바로 사용

하십시오.

– 쓰던 배터리와 새 배터리를 혼용하거나 브랜드가

다른 배터리를 혼용하지 마십시오.

– 리모콘을 장기간 사용하지 않을 경우 배터리를 꺼

내놓으십시오.

– 해당 지역의 규정에 따라 배터리를 폐기하십시오.

대략적인 리모콘 작동 범위

각 부 명칭 및 기능

2 5 61 43 7 8 9 0 A B

참고

30˚30˚

리모콘 센서

6 m

6 Ko

각 부 명칭 및 기능

■ 리모콘

– 사용할 수 없는 버튼을 누르면 가 화면의 왼쪽

상단에 나타납니다.

1 적외선 신호 송신기: 적외선 신호가 나옵니다. 이 창

을 리모콘 센서 쪽으로 향하게 합니다(5페이지).

2 MARKER : 동영상에서 지정한 지점에

Bookmark(25페이지)를 설정합니다. Bookmark를

설정한 다음 이동하려는 지점을 선택하려면 DIGEST

를 누릅니다. 북마크를 12개까지 설정할 수 있습니다.

3 : 디스크 트레이를 열거나 닫습니다.

4 PROGRAM : 재생 순서(25페이지)를 설정

합니다. 최대 15개의 트랙(오디오 디스크의 경우) 또

는 타이틀/챕터(DVD-Video)를 설정할 수 있습니다.

5 색상 버튼 : 화면 지침에 따라 이 버튼을 사용합

니다.

6 숫자 버튼: 숫자를 입력하거나, 재생 도중 입력한 숫

자에 해당하는 트랙/챕터로 이동합니다. 디스크 종류

및 재생 조건에 따라 이 버튼을 사용하지 못할 수 있

습니다.

7 CLEAR: 입력한 숫자/설정 항목을 지웁니다.

8 SETUP: SETUP 메뉴 화면(27페이지)을 표시합니다.

9 PIP : Picture in Picture(26페이지)를 설정/해

제합니다. 이 기능을 사용할 수 있으면 PIP Mark

( )가 화면에 표시됩니다. On Screen 메뉴(23페

이지)에서 이 항목을 선택할 수도 있습니다.

– PIP Mark가 On으로 설정된 경우에만 PIP Mark가

표시됩니다(31페이지).

0 2ND AUDIO : Picture in Picture(26페이지) 또

는 오디오 방송의 보조 오디오를 선택합니다. 이 기

능을 사용할 수 있으면 Secondary Audio Mark

( )가 화면에 표시됩니다(34페이지). On Screen

메뉴(23페이지)에서 이 항목을 선택할 수도 있습니

다.

– Secondary Audio Mark가 On으로 설정된 경우에

만 Secondary Audio Mark가 표시됩니다(31페이

지).

참고

DVD

VIDEO

DVD CD

7 Ko

각 부 명칭 및 기능

한국어

소개

A TOP MENU : 디스크에 메뉴가 포함된 경

우 맨 처음 메뉴 화면(42페이지)이 표시됩니다.

5/a /2 /3 및 ENTER󱆱 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡 󱼅󲶍󰫉 󲶢󱋞󱽹 󱥕

󲤒󲶞 󰫽󰬙.

– 디스크에 따라 특정 조작이 다를 수 있습니다. 각

메뉴 화면의 지침을 따르십시오.

B 커서 버튼(5/a /2 /3): 메뉴 화면에서 초점을 이동

합니다.

ENTER: 󲔽󲁅󱽹 󱈓󲗍 󱊉󰪩/󲶢󱋞󱽹 󱥕󲤒󲶞󰫽󰬙.

C RETURN: 󱾩󲀹 󱊉󰪩 󰹅󰫉 󲺉󱊩 󰴦󱽱󱂑 󰰁󱵹󰑆󰫽󰬙.

D SUBTITLE : 사용 가능한 경우

자막 언어(42페이지)를 변경합니다. On Screen 메

뉴 (23페이지)󱸅󱥑 󱾩 󲶢󱋞󱽹 󱥕󲤒󲶕 󱩍󰯹 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

E STATUS: 󱿡󱤒 󲁊󱔩(24페이지)󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

F 조절 버튼

앞으로/뒤로 검색합니다. 버튼을 누를 때마다 검색

속도가 변경됩니다(앞/뒤로 검색: 각각 5단계).

를 누르면 일반 재생이 다시 시작됩니다.

: 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 변경합니다. (느리

게/빠르게: 3단계)

/ :

󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆩󰔕 󱾽󱽱󱊩 󲆾󱬑 󰒵󱣾/󰬙󱬑 󱔩󰙥󱆱 󲶞󰫽󰬙.

󲆾󱬑 󰒵󱣾󱽵 󲜝󲦅󲙕󱆱 30󲔽 󰒩󰤽󰼶󰫽󰬙. 󲆾󱬑 󰬙󱬑 󱔩

󰙥󰫉 󲜝󲦅󲙕󱆱 10󲔽 󲀹󱖵󲥥 󰬙󱬑 󱔺󰫽󰬙.

/ : 󱶓/󰳙󱂑 󰒩󰤽󰼶󰫽󰬙.

: 재생을 정지합니다. 재생을 완전히 중지하려면

이 버튼을 두 번 누릅니다.

: 재생을 일시 정지합니다.

: 󲜝󲦅󲙕󱆱 󱿡󱤒󲶞󰫽󰬙.

()/()

: 󰫅󱇡󰓁 󱶓/󰳙󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶞󰫽󰬙. 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹

󱆱 󰶁󱇽󰬙 󲀵󱧂 󱿡󱤒

󱧂󰯹󰐵 󱓵󰓲󰱞󰫽󰬙(󰫅󱇡󰓁 󱶓/󰳙

󱂑 󱾩󰰎: 󰐶󰐶 4󰬝󰓹).

󱾱󱬑 󲁊󲇵 󰯹󲅆 󱾩 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆩󱊩 󲴹󱀽󱾹 󱩑󱑞󲷚/󱸢󱑞

󲷚 󱿡󱤒󱽹 󱩍󲶾󲶞󰫽󰬙.

󱆱 󰨹󱆩󱊩 󱾱󱑍 󱿡󱤒󱾩 󰬙󱬑 󱬑󱿆󰱞󰫽󰬙.

대부분 DVD-Audio 디스크에는 슬라이드 쇼 및 페

이지 넘김 기능이 포함되어 있습니다. / 󱆱 󰨹󱆩

󱊩 󱾩󲀹/󰬙󱾁 󲯍󱾩󲇵󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶞󰫽󰬙. 󱾩 󰙥󰫚󱽵 DVD-

Audio󱸅󱈁 󲶩󰬮󰱞󰫽󰬙.

– 일부 BD/DVD 디스크에서는 프레임 순방향/역방

향 재생 기능이 호환되지 않습니다.

– 본 플레이어는 디스크에 따라 플레이어가 이전에

정지된 지점부터 재생이 다시 시작됩니다. 처음부

터 재생하려면 를 두 번 누른 다음 를 누르

십시오.

G SA-CD/CD: 󲶍󱾩󱙁󱇡󰴑 SA-CD󱾍 󱿡󱤒 󰓹󲙪󱽹 SA-CD

󱑄 CD 󲅆󱸅󱥑 󲀹󲺍󲶞󰫽󰬙(4페이지).

– SA-CD를 넣고 SA-CD 계층을 선택하면 앞면 패

널의 SA-CD/CD 표시등(5페이지)이 점등됩니다

(34페이지).

– SA-CD 계층을 선택한 경우 오디오 신호는 AUDIO

OUT 잭(11페이지)에서만 출력됩니다.

– DSD 멀티 채널 형식으로 녹음된 오디오 신호는 본

플레이어에서 재생되지 않습니다.

H PURE DIRECT: Pure Direct 모드를 변경합니다. 버

튼을 누를 때마다 아래 표시된 Pure Direct 모드가

변경됩니다. Pure Direct 모드를 사용하면 음질이

향상됩니다. 앞면 패널의 PURE DIRECT는 Pure

Direct 모드가 모드 1/모드 2로 설정된 경우 점등됩

니다.

모드 1: 표시창이 꺼지고, 비디오 신호가 출력되지

않습니다. 이 모드는 오디오 청취 시 적합합니다.

모드 2: 표시창이 꺼지고, HDMI 단자 이외에서 출력

되는 비디오 신호가 출력되지 않습니다. 이 모드는

고음질의 동영상 시청 시 적합합니다.

Off: 󱾱󱑍 󱿡󱤒.

I DIMMER: 󲲑󱬑󲑲󱾍 󱑒󰙥󰐵 5󰬝󰓹󱂑 󱓵󰓲󰱞󰫽󰬙.

J DIGEST : 12개의 사진 썸네일을 표시합니

다. 썸네일이 표시되면 / 를 사용하여 다음

/이전 페이지로 이동할 수 있습니다.

: Bookmark 󱥕󲤒 󱇾󰬵󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙

(25페이지).

K p: 󱔭 󲵁󱀽󱾩󱷩󱆱 󲝑󰒥󰣍 󰬵󰙥 󱋝󰴑󱂑 󱥙󲁊󲶞󰫽󰬙.

L ZOOM : 󲺊󰬵/󲗊󱧁󲶞󰫽󰬙.

󱒹󲫱󱽹 󰨹󱆱 󰶁󱇽󰬙 󲺉󱊩 󲢡󰙥󰐵 󱓵󰓲󰱞󰫽󰬙(󲺊󰬵/

󲗊󱧁: 󰐶󰐶 3󰬝󰓹).

참고

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

힌트

참고

PHOTO

DVD VIDEO

DVD VIDEO PHOTO

다음 페이지에 계속.

8 Ko

각 부 명칭 및 기능

M SEARCH : 재생

도중 지정한 지점으로 이동합니다. 이 기능에 대한

자세한 내용은 "검색 사용"(25페이지)을 참조하십시

오. 상태 메뉴(24페이지)󱸅󱥑 󱾩 󲶢󱋞󱽹 󱥕󲤒󲶕 󱩍󰯹

󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

N HOME: HOME 메뉴 화면(19페이지)󱽹 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

O REPEAT

: 반복 모드를 변경합니다. 버튼을 누를 때

마다 아래 표시된 반복 모드가 변경됩니다.

: 재생 중인 타이틀을 반복합니다.

: 재생 중인 챕터를 반복합니다.

: 재생 중인 폴더를 반복합니다.

: 디스크의 모든 트랙/파일을 반복합니다.

: 재생 중인 트랙/파일을 반복합니다.

P A/B : 󱑍󱔪󲶍

󱁙󰫉 󲫮󲁊 󱖵󱖹󱽹 󱿡󱤒󲶞󰫽󰬙.

1 시작 지점으로 설정하려는 장면에서 A/B를 누릅니

다. "A-"가 화면에 표시됩니다.

2 끝 지점으로 설정하려는 장면에서 A/B를 다시 누

릅니다. "A-B"가 화면에 표시됩니다. 반복 재생이

시작됩니다.

3 반복 재생을 취소하려면 A/B를 누릅니다. "A-B"

가 사라지고 반복 재생이 종료됩니다.

– 디스크의 사양에 따라 이 기능을 수행하지 못할 수

있습니다.

Q POP-UP/MENU : 󲭒󱷺 󱊉󰪩󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

󲲑󱬑󰱍󰫉 󱊉󰪩 󰣩󱻞󱽵 󰵉󱫙󲢡󱸅 󰵥󰾱 󰬙󱆺󰫽󰬙. 󲭒󱷺

󱊉󰪩󱾍 󲲑󱬑 󱑄 󲂥󱿆 󱑞󱓊󱸅 󰬵󲶑 󱿅󱥭󲶑 󰣩󱻞󱽵 󰵉󱫙

󲢡 󱥙󱊺󱥑󱆱 󲑭󲂥󲶍󱬢󱬑󱹙.

DVD󱸅 󰵥󰾱 POP-UP/MENU󱆱 󰨹󱆩󱊩 󱈝 󲓍󱾁 󱊉󰪩󰐵

󲲑󱬑󰱍󰙥󰯹 󲶞󰫽󰬙.

R ON SCREEN: On Screen 󱊉󰪩(23페이지)󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

S ANGLE : 비디오가 여러 앵글로 녹화된

경우 카메라 앵글을 변경합니다. 이 기능을 사용할

수 있으면 Angle Mark( )가 화면에 표시됩니다.

On Screen 메뉴(23페이지)󱸅󱥑 󱾩 󲶢󱋞󱽹 󱥕󲤒󲶕

󱩍󰯹 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

– Angle Mark가 On으로 설정된 경우에만 Angle

Mark가 표시됩니다(31페이지).

T AUDIO : 오디오 언어 또는 형식을 변경

합니다. On Screen 메뉴(23페이지)󱸅󱥑 󱾩 󲶢󱋞󱽹

󱥕󲤒󲶕 󱩍󰯹 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

참고

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

9 Ko

각 부 명칭 및 기능

한국어

소개

ID 기능

리모콘 ID를 변경하여 DVD 플레이어 같은 다른

Yamaha 플레이어에서 필요 없는 조작을 하지 못하도록

할 수 있습니다. 리모콘 ID를 변경한 경우 기본 기기에

서 동일한 ID를 선택했는지 확인하십시오. 기본 설정은

ID1입니다.

1 리모콘 설정

ID를 ID1에서 ID2로 변경하려면 빨간색 버튼과

숫자 버튼 2를 동시에 7초 동안 누릅니다. ID를

ID2에서 ID1로 변경하려면 빨간색 버튼과 숫자

버튼 및 1을 동시에 7초 동안 동시에 누릅니다.

2 기본 기기 설정

다음과 같은 경우 앞면 패널의 및

를 동시에 2초간 누르고 있으면 현재

ID가 표시됩니다.

– 플레이어에 디스크가 들어있지 않은 경우.

– 디스크 트레이가 닫혀 있는 경우.

– 재생이 중지된 경우.

– "NO DISC"가 표시창에 표시된 경우.

키를 2초 동안 더 누르고 있으면 ID가 ID1과 ID2

중에서 변경됩니다.

– 리모콘 배터리를 몇 분간 빼 놓거나 다 쓴 배터리

를 리모콘에 그대로 두면 리모콘 ID가 자동으로

ID 1로 설정됩니다. 리모콘을 ID2로 설정하고 사

용하려면 새 배터리를 넣고 리모콘 ID를 다시 설정

하십시오.

참고

10 Ko

연결

사용하는 비디오/오디오 기기에 맞는 연결 방법을 찾아 보십시오. 케이블 하나로 고품질의 디지털 오디오 및 비디오

를 볼 수 있는 HDMI 단자를 사용하는 것이 좋습니다. 다른 단자/잭을 사용하는 경우 비디오를 먼저 연결하십시오.

그런 다음 오디오를 연결하십시오.

■ 뒷면 패널

연결 방법

예

아니오

AV 리시버를 사용합니까?

AV 리시버에 HDMI

단자가 있습니까?

TV에 HDMI 단자가

있습니까?

TV에 HDMI 단자가

있습니까?

TV HDMI 단자가 있습니까?

HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 비디오 및 오디오를 TV에 연결합

니다.

비디오를 TV에 연결합니다.

HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 비디오를

TV에 연결합니다.

비디오를 AV 리시버에 연결합니다.

HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 비디오

및 오디오를 AV 리시버에 연결합

니다.

AV 리시버의 설명서를

참조하십시오.

시작

* 사운드 입력이 HDMI 단자로 출력되지 않는 AV 리시버에 연결한 경

우 AV 리시버의 설명서를 참조하십시오.

67 0 A93214 85

11 Ko

한국어

연결

1 NETWORK(16페이지)

2 HDMI(12페이지)

3 USB 포트(16페이지)

4 REMOTE CONTROL(IN/OUT/RS-232C)(17페이지)

5 7.1ch 서라운드(AUDIO OUT)(15페이지)

6 MIXED 2CH(AUDIO OUT) (15페이지)

7 VIDEO(13페이지)

8 COMPONENT(13페이지)

9 COAXIAL(14페이지)

0 OPTICAL(14페이지)

A AC IN(

17페이지)

비디오 연결

오디오를 AV 리시버

에 연결합니다.

TV에 비디오 연결

오디오를 TV에 연결합

니다.

HDMI(12페이지)

AV 리시버에 비디오 및

오디오 연결

AV 리시버에 오디오 연결

TV에 비디오 및 오디오 연결

TV에 오디오 연결

HDMI(12페이지)

A’

COMPONENT(13페이지)

VIDEO(13페이지)

TV에 연결

AV 리시버에 연결

또는

COMPONENT(13페이지)

B’

VIDEO(13페이지)

C’

또는

COAXIAL(14페이지)

OPTICAL(14페이지)

또는

MIXED 2CH(15페이지)

또는

COAXIAL (14페이지)

D’

OPTICAL(14페이지)

E’

또는

MIXED 2CH(15페이지)

F’

또는

HDMI(12페이지)

A’

7.1ch 서라운드(15페이지)

또는

12 Ko

■ HDMI 단자에 연결

– HDMI 단자를 통해 고품질의 디지털 사진 및 사운드를 즐길 수 있습니다.

– HDMI 케이블(시판용)을 HDMI 단자에 단단히 연결하십시오.

– 오디오/비디오 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 35페이지를 참조하십시오.

– HDMI 로고(뒷 표지에 표시되어 있음)가 있는 HIGH SPEED HDMI 케이블을 사용하십시오.

주의!

모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 플레이어의 전원 케이블을 연결하지 마십시오.

HDMI 연결

HDMI IN

본 플레이어

HDMI 󰬝󱿅󱸅 󱸥󰓥

HDMI 케이블

(시판용)

– HDMI Control 기능을 사용하는 경우

"HDMI Control"(30페이지)을 참조하십시

오.

– HDMI 단자의 출력 모드에 대해서는

"HDMI"(34페이지)를 참조하십시오.

– 아무 사진도 표시되지 않으면 "문제 해결"

(39페이지)을 참조하십시오.

■ Blu-ray 3D 디스크 재생을 위한

연결

본 플레이어에서 Blu-ray 3D 디스크를 재생하려

면 다음과 같은 장비를 연결해야 합니다:

– 3D 기능을 갖춘 TV 및 (필요한 경우) AV 리

시버

– 모든 구성품은 HDMI 케이블을 이용하여 연

결해야 합니다.

– Blu-ray 디스크에는 3D 이미지가 있어야

합니다.

힌트

AV 리시버

A A’

HDMI 입력 단자에 연결

13 Ko

한국어

연결

■ 컴포넌트/비디오 잭에 연결

– 컴포넌트 잭을 통해 정확한 색상 재현과 고화질을 즐길 수 있습니다.

– 컴포넌트 비디오 케이블(시판용) 또는 비디오 핀 케이블을 COMPONENT 잭/VIDEO 잭에 단단히 연결하십시

오.

– 비디오 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 36페이지를 참조하십시오.

주의!

모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 플레이어의 전원 케이블을 연결하지 마십시오.

– VCR을 통해 화상을 재생하는 경우 복제 방지 기능으로 인해 화질이 저하될 수 있습니다.

– 본 플레이어에서 BD-3D 디스크를 즐기려면 HDMI 케이블을 이용하여 AV 리시버, TV 및 본 플레이어를 연결

해야 합니다. 이전 페이지를 참조하십시오.

비디오 연결

COMPONENT IN

본 플레이어

컴포넌트 비디오 케이블

(시판용)

AV 리시버

󳶀󴳐

󵼓󴎇󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󳶀󴳐

󵼓󴎇󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

COMPONENT

잭에 연결

컴포넌트 입력 잭

에 연결

B B’

󳶀󴳐

󵼓󴎇󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󳶀󴳐

󵼓󴎇󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

VIDEO

AV INPUT

본 플레이어

비디오 핀 케이블

(부속품)

AV 리시버 TV

󳵿󴎇󴳐

VIDEO 잭

에 연결

비디오 입력

잭에 연결

󳵿󴎇󴳐

C C’

참고

14 Ko

■ 디지털 오디오 잭/단자에 연결

– 오디오 기기 또는 TV를 COAXIAL 잭/OPTICAL 단자에 연결할 수 있습니다.

– 동축 디지털 오디오 케이블(시판용) 또는 광 케이블을 동축 디지털 오디오 잭 또는 광 디지털 오디오 단자에 단

단히 연결하십시오.

– 오디오 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 35페이지를 참조하십시오.

주의!

모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 플레이어의 전원 케이블을 연결하지 마십시오.

– COAXIAL 잭/OPTICAL 단자의 출력 모드에 대한 자세한 내용은 "Coaxial/Optical"(34페이지)을 참조하십시

오.

오디오 연결

힌트

AV INPUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO IN

OPTICAL

본 플레이어

OPTICAL 단자

에 연결

TVAV 리시버

광 케이블

(시판용)

동축 디지털 오디오 케이블

(시판용)

본 플레이어

AV 리시버

D D'

COAXIAL 잭에

연결

동축 입력 잭에

연결

광 입력 단자에

연결

D’ E E’

오디오 연결

15 Ko

한국어

연결

■ 오디오 잭에 연결

– 오디오 기기 또는 TV를 MIXED 2CH/7.1채널 서라운드 잭에 연결할 수 있습니다.

– 오디오 핀 케이블(부속품 및 시판용)을 MIXED 2CH 잭 또는 7.1채널 서라운드 잭에 단단히 연결하십시오.

– 오디오 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 35페이지를 참조하십시오.

– 멀티 채널 SA-CD 및 DVD-Audio를 재생하려면, 시판되는 오디오 핀 케이블을 사용하여 7.1채널 서라운드

잭을 AV 리시버의 해당 입력 잭에 연결하십시오.

주의!

모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 플레이어의 전원 케이블을 연결하지 마십시오.

– 서브우퍼를 SUBWOOFER 잭에 직접 연결할 수 있습니다. 본 플레이어에 TV를 직접 연결할 경우, Yamaha

Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System 같은 활성 서브우퍼를 이 잭에 연결하십시오.

– MIXED 2CH/7.1ch 서라운드 잭에서 오디오 신호를 출력하려면 "Speaker Setting"(34페이지)을 참조하십시

오.

AUDIO

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MIXED 2CH 󱿢󱸅

󱸥󰓥

오디오 핀 케이블

(부속품)

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐 󴩯󳠋󴳐

TVAV 리시버

본 플레이어

오디오 입력

잭에 연결

F F’

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

MULTICH IN

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

FRONT

CENTER SUBWOOFER

AV 리시버

본 플레이어

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

오디오 핀

케이블

(부속품 및

시판용)

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

󶍷󴳐

󴩯󳠋󴳐

7.1ch

서라운드

잭에 연결

MULTI

CH IN

잭에

연결

󶍷󴳐 󴩯󳠋󴳐 󶍷󴳐 󴩯󳠋󴳐󶍷󴳐 󴩯󳠋󴳐

힌트

16 Ko

■ NETWORK 단자 및 USB 포트에 연결

– 본 플레이어를 네트워크에 연결하여 PC 컨텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다.

– BD-Live 호환 디스크를 재생하는 경우 인터넷에 연결하면 인터랙티브 기능을 가진 다양한 컨텐츠를 즐길 수

있습니다. BD-Live 기능에 대한 자세한 내용은 26페이지를 참조하십시오.

– BD Local Storage용 USB 메모리 장치(2 GB 이상, FAT 32/16으로 포맷됨)를 플레이어의 뒷면 패널(또는 앞

면 패널)에 있는 USB 포트에 연결하면 BD-Live 데이터를 저장하거나 본 플레이어의 소프트웨어를 업그레이

드할 수 있습니다.

– 네트워크 케이블(시판용) 및 USB 메모리 장치(시판용)를 NETWORK 단자 및 USB 포트에 단단히 연결하십시

오.

– STP(shielded twisted pair) 네트워크 케이블만 사용하십시오.

– 인터넷을 사용 중일 경우 아래와 같은 광대역 인터넷 연결이 필요합니다.

– 네트워크 케이블의 다른 커넥터를 허브/광대역 라우터에 연결하십시오.

USB 메모리 장치를 사용하기 전에

연결한 후에

– Network 설정을 수동으로 설정하려면 "Network"(32페이지)를 참조하십시오.

– 네트워크에서 PC 컨텐츠를 재생하려면 "네트워크 컨텐츠 사용"(21페이지)을 참조하십시오.

네트워크 및 USB 연결

LAN

본 플레이어

– 광대역 인터넷 연결을 사용하는 경우 인터

넷 서비스 제공자와 계약을 해야 합니다.

자세한 내용은 가까운 인터넷 서비스 제공

자에 문의하십시오.

– 인터넷 환경에 따라 연결하는 기기 및 연결

방법이 다를 수 있으므로 사용하는 기기의

사용 설명서를 참조하십시오.

– 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX를 지원하는

네트워크 케이블/라우터를 사용하십시오.

주의:

– BD-Live(26페이지)를 조작하거나 소

프트웨어 업그레이드를 수행 중일 때는

USB 메모리 장치를 분리하거나 전원

케이블을 뽑지 마십시오.

– USB 메모리 장치를 본 플레이어의

USB 포트에 연결할 때 USB 확장 케이

블을 사용하지 마십시오. USB 확장 케

이블을 사용하면 플레이어가 올바로 실

행되지 않을 수 있습니다.

– Yamaha는 본 플레이어에서 모든 브랜

드의 USB 메모리 장치가 작동된다고

보증하지 않습니다.

참고

NETWORK

단자에 연결

인터넷

모뎀

네트워크 케이블

(시판용)

허브 또는

광대역 라우터

USB 󲰡󲫭󱸅

󱸥󰓥

USB 메모리 장치

(시판용)

LAN 󰬝󱿅󱸅

󱸥󰓥

– 전면 패널의 USB 메모

리 장치에 BD-Live 데

이터를 저장하려면

Local Storage를 Front

USB로 설정하십시오.

(30페이지)

힌트

17 Ko

한국어

연결

■ REMOTE CONTROL 잭에 연결

– REMOTE CONTROL(OUT/IN) 잭에 연결하면 리

모콘 신호를 전송 및 수신할 수 있습니다.

– 모노 3.5 mm 미니 플러그 케이블(시판용)을

REMOTE CONTROL(OUT/IN) 잭에 단단히 연결

하십시오.

– AV 리시버가 SCENE 제어 신호 전송 기능이 있는

Yamaha 제품인 경우 SCENE 기능을 사용하여 본

플레이어를 제어할 수 있습니다.

주의!

모든 연결이 완료될 때까지 본 플레이어의 전원 케이블

을 연결하지 마십시오.

– SCENE 기능에 대한 자세한 내용은 Yamaha AV

리시버에 부속된 설명서를 참조하십시오.

– SCENE 기능이 지원되는 Yamaha 컴포넌트(예:

CD 플레이어)를 본 플레이어의 REMOTE

CONTROL (OUT) 잭에 연결할 수 있습니다.

– RS-232C 단자는 시판되는 제어 확장 단자입니다.

자세한 내용은 가까운 대리점에 문의하십시오.

■ 전원 케이블 연결

– 모든 연결을 완료한 후 부속된 전원 케이블을 플레

이어 뒷면의 AC IN에 꽂으십시오. 그런 다음 AC

전원에 꽂으십시오.

– 감전 사고를 방지하려면 전원 케이블이 연결된 경

우 케이블에서 절연되지 않은 부분을 만지지 마십

시오.

기타 연결

힌트

REMOTE CONTROL IN

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

본 플레이어

REMOTE

CONTROL(IN)

잭에 연결

모노 3.5 mm 미니

플러그 케이블

(시판용)

리모콘

출력 잭에

연결

Yamaha 컴포넌트

리모콘

입력 잭에

연결

모노 3.5 mm 미

니 플러그 케이블

(시판용)

적외선 신호 수신기

또는 Yamaha 컴포넌트

(예: AV 리시버)

REMOTE

CONTROL

(OUT) 잭에

연결

참고

AC 콘센트에 연결

AC IN󱸅 󱸥󰓥

18 Ko

재생

■ Initial Wizard/Easy Setup을 사용하

여 설정

Initial Wizard/Easy Setup을 사용하면 언어, 해상도 및

화면 비율을 간편하게 설정할 수 있습니다. 본 플레이어

를 구입하거나 업그레이드 한 후 처음으로 켜면 Initial

Wizard 화면이 표시됩니다. SETUP 메뉴 = System =

Easy Setup에서 이와 같은 설정을 할 수도 있습니다.

1 Easy Setup 화면이 표시된 경우 ENTER를 누르면

Easy Setup이 시작됩니다.

2 5/a 를 눌러 화면에 표시하려는 언어를 선택한 다음,

ENTER를 누릅니다.

3 5/a 를 눌러 해상도를 선택한 다음, ENTER를 누릅니

다. 설정 항목에 대한 자세한 내용은

"Resolution"(33페이지)를 참조하십시오.

4 5/a 를 눌러 화면 비율을 선택한 다음, ENTER를 누

릅니다. 설정 항목에 대한 자세한 내용은 "TV

Screen"(32페이지)을 참조하십시오.

Easy Setup이 완료되었습니다.

5 ENTER를 눌러 Easy Setup을 종료합니다.

– Initial Wizard/Easy Setup이 완료된 후에 아무 사

진도 표시되지 않으면 "문제 해결"(39페이지)을 참

조하십시오.

– 본 플레이어를 켜면 3D 비디오 재생에 관한 경고

메시지가 표시됩니다. ENTER를 눌러 메시지를 닫거

나 CLEAR를 눌러 메시지를 비활성화시키십시오.

(30페이지)

INITIAL WIZARD/EASY SETUP

참고

ENTER

FinishPrevious

Setting

Page: 5/5

Easy Setup

The set-up wizard is finished!

Now press the Finish button to go to SETUP. Please

enjoy!

19 Ko

한국어

재생

HOME 및 MEDIA 메뉴를 사용하면 데이터 디스크,

USB 메모리 장치 및 네트워크에서 멀티미디어 파일을

찾아 재생할 수 있습니다.

– 재생 가능한 디스크 및 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은

3페이지를 참조하십시오.

■ 사진/음악/비디오 재생

기본 조작

5/a : 초점을 이동합니다.

2: 상위 폴더로 돌아갑니다.

3: 단일 폴더/파일을 선택/선택 해제합니다.

HOME: HOME 메뉴 화면으로 이동/종료합니다.

ENTER: 폴더/파일을 확인합니다.

MEDIA 메뉴 상단의 아이콘

: 트레이에 있는 디스크를 재생하거나 데이터 디스

크의 내용을 표시합니다.

: USB 포트에 연결된 USB 메모리 장치의 내용을

표시합니다.

: 네트워크에서 DLNA(21페이지) 서버를 검색합니

다.

: 연결된 DLNA 서버의 내용을 표시합니다.

선택한 폴더의 파일 재생 시 일반적인 조작

예: USB 메모리 장치에서 동영상 파일 선택

– MEDIA 메뉴 화면으로 이동하기 전에 비디오 재생

을 중지하십시오.

1 HOME을 눌러 HOME 메뉴 화면으로 이동합니다.

2/3 를 눌러 MEDIA를 선택한 다음, ENTER를 누릅니

다.

2 MEDIA 화면이 나타납니다.

3 재생하려는 파일이 포함된 항목을 선택한 다음,

ENTER를 누릅니다.

HOME/MEDIA 메뉴

참고

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

2ND

AUDIO

A/B

HOME

참고

HOME/MEDIA 메뉴

20 Ko

4 재생하려는 Photo, Music, Video 또는 AVCHD 폴

더를 선택한 다음, ENTER를 누릅니다.

상위 폴더로 돌아가려면 2를 누르거나 를 선택

합니다.

– 이 단계에서 선택한 파일 유형만 다음 단계에 표시

됩니다. 예를 들어, 이 단계에서 Photo 폴더를 선

택한 경우 다음 단계에서는 사진 파일만 표시됩니

다. 사진 이외의 다른 것을 재생하려면 이 계층으

로 돌아가 파일 유형을 다시 선택하십시오.

5 재생하려는 파일이 포함된 폴더를 선택합니다.

6 재생하려는 파일을 선택한 다음, ENTER를 누릅니다.

비디오 파일을 선택한 경우 재생이 시작됩니다.

음악 파일을 선택한 경우 상태 화면이 표시되고 재생

이 시작됩니다.

사진 파일을 선택한 경우 슬라이드 쇼가 시작됩니다.

– 음악이 있는 슬라이드 쇼를 즐기려면, 음악이 재생

되는 동안 HOME을 눌러 HOME 메뉴 화면으로 돌아

가 사진 파일을 선택합니다.

– 파일 내용에 따라 표시된 파일이 재생되지 않을 수

있습니다.

사진을 보기 위한 조작

사진을 보는 동안에는 리모콘 버튼이 아래와 같이 작동

합니다.

: 슬라이드 쇼를 정지하고 파일 찾아보기로 돌아갑니

다.

: 슬라이드 쇼를 일시 정지합니다.

: 슬라이드 쇼를 재생합니다.

: 다음 사진으로 이동합니다.

: 이전 사진으로 이동합니다.

: 슬라이드 쇼의 속도가 3단계로 빨라집니다.

: 슬라이드 쇼의 속도가 3단계로 느려집니다.

5: 사진을 뒤집습니다.

a : 사진을 반사합니다.

2: 사진을 시계 반대 방향으로 회전합니다.

3: 사진을 시계 방향으로 회전합니다.

ZOOM: 사진을 확대/축소합니다(확대/축소: 각각 3단계).

5/a /2/3 : 󱣡󲇹󱾩 󲺉󱊩󱔩󰬙 󲢩 󰓲󱻥 󲅁 󱋝󰴑󱸅󱥑 󱾩

󰰎󲶞󰫽󰬙 .

DIGEST: 썸네일 모드(7페이지)로 전환합니다. 썸네일이

표시된 경우 / 를 사용하여 이전/다음 페이지

로 이동할 수 있습니다.

참고

힌트

참고

HOME/MEDIA 메뉴

21 Ko

재생

한국어

■ 네트워크 컨텐츠 사용

본 플레이어는 DLNA 인증 디지털 미디어 플레이어입

니다, 사용자의 홈 네트워크에서 DLNA 서버에 저장된

사진, 음악 및 비디오 컨텐츠를 관리할 수 있습니다.

DLNA에 대하여

DLNA(Digital Living Network Alliance)는 가정에서

네트워크를 통해 디지털 미디어를 간편하게 공유할 수

있으며, DLNA 서버 소프트웨어가 설치된 PC 또는 다른

DLNA 호환 장치에 저장된 디지털 컨텐츠를 본 플레이

어를 통해 TV에서 즐길 수 있습니다. 본 플레이어를

DLNA 서버에 연결하려면 DLNA 서버 또는 장치를 일

부 설정해야 합니다. 자세한 내용은 DLNA 서버 소프트

웨어 또는 DLNA 장치를 참조하십시오.

공유 컨텐츠 재생

1 PC에서 파일을 재생하려면, Windows Media

Player 12 같은 DLNA 서버 소프트웨어를 설치하고

재생하려는 파일을 공유합니다.

2 DLNA 서버 소프트웨어가 설치된 PC 또는 홈 네트워

크에 연결된 DLNA 장치를 켭니다.

3 HOME을 눌러 HOME 메뉴 화면을 표시합니다. 그런 다

음 MEDIA를 선택하여 MEDIA 메뉴로 이동합니다.

네트워크에 연결된 DLNA 서버가 화면에 표시됩니다.

– 사용하는 DLNA 서버가 표시되지 않을 경우

DLNA Search를 선택하고 서버를 찾아보십시오.

– DLNA 서버에 따라 서버에서 본 플레이어를 허가

해야 할 수도 있습니다.

– DLNA 서버에서 파일을 재생하려면 본 플레이어

와 서버가 동일한 액세스 포인트에 연결되어 있어

야 합니다.

– 파일 요구 사항이 호환되지 않을 수도 있습니다.

파일 특징 및 DLNA 서버 용량에 따라 일부 제한이

있을 수 있습니다.

4 재생하려는 파일을 선택합니다.

– 홈 네트워크 조건에 따라 재생 및 작동 상태에 영

향을 미칠 수도 있습니다.

– USB 메모리 장치 또는 미디어 서버의 DVD 드라

이브 같은 이동식 매체의 파일이 올바로 공유되지

않을 수 있습니다.

참고

22 Ko

아래의 네트워크에서 제공하는 비디오를 즉시 시청할 수 있습니다.

– YouTube

– 타사가 제공하는 컨텐츠에 접근하려면 고속 인터넷 연결이 필요하며, 계정 등록 및 유료 구독이 필요할 수도

있습니다.

– 타사가 제공하는 컨텐츠 서비스는 예고 없이 언제든지 변경, 보류, 중단, 또는 중지될 수 있으며, 이와 관련하여

Yamaha에게는 어떠한 책임도 없습니다.

– 일부 컨텐츠는 특정 국가에서만 사용이 가능할 수 있으며 일부 언어로만 제공될 수도 있습니다.

– Yamaha는 특정 기간 동안의 컨텐츠 서비스에 대한 지속적 제공이나 가용성에 대한 진술이나 보증을 제공하지

않으며, 명시적이든 암묵적이든 그러한 모든 보증에 대한 책임이 없습니다.

본 플레이어를 이용하여 인터넷을 통해 YouTube에서

영화를 시청할 수 있습니다.

해당 서비스들은 예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다.

1 HOME을 눌러 HOME 메뉴 화면을 표시합니다.

–

모델에 따라 HOME 메뉴 화면은 다를 수 있습니다.

2 5/a /2 /3를 눌러 YouTube를 선택한 다음, ENTER

를 누릅니다.

– HOME 메뉴 화면으로 돌아가려면 RETURN을 누릅

니다.

네트워크 서비스 사용

참고

YouTube™에서 비디오 재생

힌트

23 Ko

한국어

재생

이 장에서는 시판용 BD 및 DVD 디스크, SA-CD, CD

및 녹화된 DVD-RW/R 디스크의 재생에 대해 설명합니

다.

– 기본적인 재생 조작에 대해서는 6페이지를 참조하

십시오.

■ On Screen 메뉴

On Screen 메뉴를 표시하려면 ON SCREEN을 누릅니다.

그런 다음, 5/a /2 /3를 눌러 항목을 선택하고, ENTER

를 눌러 원하는 기능을 조작합니다.

On Screen 메뉴에 포함된 항목은 다음과 같습니다.

Title : 재생 중인 타이틀 번호를

표시합니다. 이 항목에서 타이틀을 선택하여 원하는 타

이틀로 건너뛸 수 있습니다.

Chapter : 재생 중인 챕터 번호를

표시합니다. 이 항목에서 챕터를 선택하여 원하는 챕터

로 건너뛸 수 있습니다.

Track/File : 재생 중

인 트랙/파일 번호를 표시합니다. 이 항목에서 트랙/파

일을 선택하여 원하는 트랙/파일로 건너뛸 수 있습니다.

Time : 재생 시간

을 표시합니다. 다음 중에서 표시 유형을 선택합니다.

– 타이틀, 챕터, 디스크, 트랙 또는 파일의 경과된 재

생 시간

– 타이틀, 챕터, 디스크, 트랙 또는 파일의 남아 있는

재생 시간

Mode/Play Mode

: 현재 재생

모드를 표시합니다. 다음 중에서 재생 모드를 선택할 수

있습니다.

– Normal: 일반 재생.

– Shuffle: 반복 없이 무작위 재생.

– Random: 반복하여 무작위 재생.

– Normal

– Shuffle CH (챕터)

– Shuffle TT (타이틀)

– Shuffle All

– Random CH (챕터)

– Random TT (타이틀)

– Random All

– Normal

– Shuffle F (폴더)

– Shuffle All

– Random F (폴더)

– Random All

Audio : 현재 선택된 BD/DVD 디

스크의 오디오 언어/신호를 표시합니다. 원하는 오디오

유형을 선택할 수 있습니다.

Angle : 현재 선택된 앵글을 표시합니다. 비

디오가 여러 앵글로 녹화된 경우 앵글을 변경할 수 있습

니다.

Subtitle

: 자막이 제공되는 경우

현재 선택된 자막 언어를 표시합니다.

Subtitle Style : 현재 선택된 자막 스타일을 표시

합니다. 이 기능은 비디오 파일 외부 자막인 경우에만

사용할 수 있습니다. 자막의 텍스트 스타일을 선택할 수

있습니다.

Bitrate : 오디오/비

디오 신호의 비트 전송률을 표시합니다.

Second Video : PIP를 설정/해제합니다(6페이지).

Second Audio : 보조 오디오를 설정/해제합니다

(6페이지).

Ins Search

: 30초를 건너뜁

니다.

Ins Replay

: 10초 전의 내용

부터 다시 봅니다.

Slide Show :

슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 표시합니다. Slow/Medium/Fast

중에서 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 선택할 수 있습니다.

Transition : 화면에 사진이 나타나는 방법을

표시합니다. 전환 유형을 선택할 수 있습니다.

Code Page : DivX 비디오(41페이지)에 추가한

자막의 문자 코드를 선택합니다.

고급 재생 조작

참고

BD DVD VIDEO

CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

DVD

VIDEO MUSIC PHOTO

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD

BD DVD VIDEO

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

PHOTO

VIDEO

고급 재생 조작

24 Ko

■ 상태 메뉴

자막, 앵글 설정 및 현재 재생된 타이틀/챕터/트랙 번호

등 다양한 설정을 표시합니다. 상태 메뉴를 표시하려면

STATUS를 누릅니다. 상태 메뉴에는 다음과 같은 메뉴가

포함되어 있습니다.

예: BD 재생 시 아이콘

1 (재생 상태)

2 (디스크 유형/비디오 파일 아이콘)

3 (재생 중인 타이틀 번호): SEARCH 󱒹󲫱(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)

󱽹 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡 󲇵󲁊󲶑 󲣵󱾩󲫵󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

4 (재생 중인 챕터 번호): SEARCH 󱒹󲫱(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)

󱽹 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡 󲇵󲁊󲶑 󲒊󲥥󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

5 (경과된 재생 시간): SEARCH 󱒹󲫱(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)󱽹 󱣡

󱻞󲶍󱸡 󲇵󲁊󲶑 󲇵󲁅󱽱󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

6 (현재 선택된 자막): SUBTITLE 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡

󱿅󱇾 󱷭󱷩󱆱 󱓵󰓲󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

7 (현재 선택된 오디오): AUDIO 󱒹󲫱󱽹 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡

󱹙󰵉󱹙 󱷭󱷩 󰹅󰫉 󲹊󱬒󱽹 󱓵󰓲󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

(반복 모드):

󲸹󱿡 󱑍󱔪 󱋝󰴑(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽

󰬙.

예: 음악 파일 재생 시 아이콘

1 (재생 상태)

(반복 모드):

󲸹󱿡 󱑍󱔪 󱋝󰴑(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽

󰬙.

3 (디스크 유형/음악 파일 아이콘)

4 (아트워크) : 󲭁󱾱󱸅 󱵹󲫭󱼁󲢡󰐵 󲰡󲶝󰱑 󰓲

󱻥 󱵹󲫭󱼁󲢡󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

5 (재생 중인 트랙/파일 번호): SEARCH 󱒹󲫱(8󲯍

󱾩󲇵)󱽹 󱣡󱻞󲶍󱸡 󲇵󲁊󲶑 󲫭󰿎󱽱󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽

󰬙.

6 (정보) : 󲭁󱾱󱸅 󱾁󱵺 󲁊󱔩󰐵 󲰡󲶝󰱑 󰓲󱻥 󱾁

󱵺 󲁊󱔩󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽󰬙.

7 (경과된 재생 시간): SEARCH 󱒹󲫱(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)󱽹 󱣡

󱻞󲶍󱸡 󲇵󲁊󲶑 󲇵󲁅󱽱󱂑 󱾩󰰎󲶕 󱩍 󱾽󱫪󰫽󰬙.

8 (진행률 막대) : 󲸹󱿡 󰔖󱾍 󲇹󲶾 󱣶󲤑󱆱 󲲑󱬑

󲶞󰫽󰬙.

9 (오디오 레벨 측정계): 󲸹󱿡󱾍 󱾁󰿾 󱀽󱓝󱽹 󲲑󱬑󲶞󰫽

󰬙.

1 (재생 상태)

2 (사진 파일 아이콘)

3 (표시되어 있는 파일 번호)

(반복 모드):

󲸹󱿡 󱑍󱔪 󱋝󰴑(8󲯍󱾩󲇵)󱆱 󲲑󱬑󲶞

󰫽󰬙.

5 (슬라이드 쇼 속도)

BD DVD VIDEO

245

DVD CD MUSIC

MUSIC

PHOTO

고급 재생 조작

25 Ko

재생

한국어

■ Bookmark 사용

이 기능을 사용하면 비디오에서 지정한 지점에

Bookmark를 설정할 수 있습니다. Bookmark를 설정하

면, 이 기능을 사용하여 설정한 지점으로 이동할 수 있

습니다. 북마크를 12개까지 설정할 수 있습니다.

1 동영상 재생 도중 MARKER를 눌러 Bookmark를 설정

합니다. Bookmark 번호 및 상태가 표시됩니다.

2 Bookmark를 설정한 다음, DIGEST를 눌러

Bookmark 선택 막대를 표시합니다.

3 2/3 를 눌러 재생하려는 Bookmark를 선택한 다음,

ENTER를 누릅니다.

선택한 Bookmark를 삭제하려면 CLEAR를 누릅니다.

– 재생이 끝나면(예: 디스크 꺼내기, 두 번 누르

기) 북마크가 자동으로 삭제됩니다.

■ 프로그램 재생

오디오 디스크 트랙 또는 DVD 챕터의 재생 순서를 프로

그래밍할 수 있습니다.

재생 도중 PROGRAM을 눌러 PROGRAM 창을 표시하고

재생 순서를 프로그래밍합니다.

최대 15개의 트랙/챕터를 프로그래밍할 수 있습니다.

예: CD 트랙의 재생 순서 프로그래밍

1 재생 도중 PROGRAM을 누릅니다.

2 ENTER를 눌러 재생 순서를 프로그래밍합니다.

오디오 디스크의 경우, 5/a 를 눌러 원하는 트랙을

선택한 다음 ENTER를 누릅니다.

DVD-Video 디스크의 경우, 트랙 대신 원하는 타이

틀(TT로 표시됨) 및 챕터(CH로 표시됨)를 선택합니

다.

설정 트랙을 지우려면, 지우려는 트랙을 선택한 다음

CLEAR를 누릅니다.

프로그램 재생을 취소하려면 RETURN을 누릅니다.

3 프로그래밍을 완료한 다음, 를 눌러 설정하면 프

로그램 재생이 시작됩니다.

4 프로그램 재생을 취소하려면 를 두 번 눌러 재생

을 완전히 중지합니다.

■ 검색 사용

재생 도중 지정한 지점으로 이동할 수 있습니다.

1 재생 도중 SEARCH를 누릅니다. 상태 표시줄이 나타납

니다.

2 5/a /2/3를 눌러 아래 항목 중 하나를 선택한 다음,

ENTER를 누릅니다.

– 타이틀 번호( 로 표시됨)

– 챕터 번호( 로 표시됨)

– 타이틀 경과 시간( 로 표시됨)

– 챕터 경과 시간( 로 표시됨)

– 트랙 번호( 로 표시됨)

– 트랙 경과 시간( 로 표시됨)

– 디스크 경과 시간( 로 표시됨)

– 파일 번호( 로 표시됨)

– 파일 경과 시간( 로 표시됨)

3 5/a 또는 숫자 버튼을 눌러 초점을 맞춘 항목의 값

을 설정/조정하고, ENTER를 눌러 지정한 지점으로 이

동합니다.

4 상태 표시줄을 닫으려면 STATUS를 누릅니다.

참고

DVD VIDEO

DVD CD

BD DVD CD VIDEO MUSIC

BD DVD

VIDEO MUSIC

고급 재생 조작

26 Ko

■ BONUSVIEW™ 및 BD-Live™ 즐기기

본 플레이어는 BONUSVIEW(41페이지)(BD-ROM

Profile 1 버전 1.1) 및 BD-Live(41페이지)(BD-ROM

Profile 2) 재생 기능을 지원합니다.

– 기능 및 재생 방법은 디스크에 따라 다릅니다. 디

스크 안내 또는 부속된 사용 설명서를 참조하십시

오.

■ Picture in Picture 기능 사용

(보조 오디오/비디오 재생)

Picture in Picture와 호화되는 보조 오디오 및 비디오

가 포함된 BD-Video에서 보조 오디오 및 비디오를 화

면 구석에 작은 비디오로 동시에 재생할 수 있습니다.

PIP Mark( ) 또는 Secondary Audio

Mark( )가 표시된 상태에서 PIP를 누르면

Picture in Picture 기능이 설정/해제됩니다.

– 보조 오디오를 들으려면, Audio Output 설정

(Coaxial/Optical 또는 HDMI)이 PCM 또는

Reencode(34페이지)로 설정되어 있는지 확인하십

시오.

– 디스크에 따라 보조 오디오를 들으려면 디스크의

맨 처음 메뉴에서 보조 오디오를 설정해야 할 수도

있습니다(7페이지).

– Picture in Picture의 보조 오디오 및 비디오는 컨

텐츠에 따라 자동으로 재생되기도 하고 삭제되기

도 합니다. 또한 재생 가능한 영역이 제한되기도

합니다.

■ BD-Live™ 기능 사용

1. 네트워크 설정(32페이지)을 설정합니다.

2. USB 메모리 장치를 본 플레이어에 연결합니

다(16페이지).

BD-Live 데이터가 본 플레이어에 연결된 USB 메

모리 장치에 저장됩니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면

2.0 High Speed(480 Mbit/s)를 지원하는 USB 메

모리 장치(2GB 이상, FAT 32/16 포맷)를 Local

Storage에서 선택한 USB 포트에 연결하십시오

(30페이지). 기본 설정은 후면 패널에 있는 USB

포트입니다.

– 필요할 경우 USB 메모리 장치에 BUDA 폴더가 자

동으로 생성됩니다.

– 저장 공간이 충분하지 않을 경우 데이터가 복사/다

운로드되지 않습니다. 불필요한 데이터를 삭제하

거나 새 USB 메모리 장치를 사용하십시오.

– 데이터를 로드(읽기/쓰기)하는 데 시간이 걸릴 수

있습니다.

– Yamaha는 본 플레이어에서 모든 브랜드의 USB

메모리 장치가 작동된다고 보증하지 않습니다.

– USB 메모리 장치를 플레이어의 USB 포트에 연결

할 때 USB 확장 케이블을 사용하지 마십시오.

USB 확장 케이블을 사용하면 플레이어가 올바로

실행되지 않을 수 있습니다.

3. 디스크를 재생합니다.

4. 디스크 설명서에 따라 BD-Live를 실행합니

다.

– BD-Live 컨텐츠 등의 재생 방법은 BD 디스크 설

명서의 지침에 따라 조작하십시오.

– BD-Live 기능을 사용하려면, 네트워크 연결(16페

이지) 및 Network 설정(32페이지)을 수행하십시

오.

– BD-Live 컨텐츠에 대한 액세스를 제한하는 설정

방법에 대해서는 "BD-Live Connection"(32페이

지)을 참조하십시오.

– 부속된 프로그램을 본 플레이어에 연결된 USB 메

모리 장치로 다운로드하는 데 필요한 시간은 인터

넷 연결 속도 및 프로그램의 데이터량에 따라 다릅

니다.

– 인터넷을 통해 제공된 BD-Live 프로그램은 서비

스 제공자의 상태(업그레이드)에 따라 연결이 표시

되지 않을 수 있습니다. 이 경우 디스크를 꺼내고

다시 시도해 보십시오.

– BD 디스크 메뉴에서 BD-Live 기능을 선택한 후

에도 BD-Live 화면이 표시되지 않을 경우, USB

메모리 장치에 여유 공간이 충분하지 않을 수 있습

니다. 이 경우 플레이어에서 디스크를 꺼낸 다음,

"Local Storage"(30페이지)의 "Format" 메뉴를

사용하여 USB 메모리 장치의 데이터를 지우십시

오.

참고

주 비디오 보조 비디오

참고

27 Ko

한국어

설정

SETUP 메뉴에서는 리모콘을 사용하여 다양한 오디오/비디오 설정을 할 수 있고 기능을 조정할 수 있습니다.

SETUP 메뉴

메뉴/하위 메뉴 항목 기능 페이지

General Setting

System Screen Saver 화면 보호기를 설정/해제합니다. 30

Disc Auto Playback 본 플레이어에서 디스크가 자동으로 재생되도록 설정합니다. 30

HDMI Control 본 플레이어에서 TV/AV 리시버의 리모콘 제어 신호를 수신

하도록 설정합니다.

Network Control 이더넷을 통한 제어를 설정/해제합니다. 30

Load Default Security 설정을 제외한 모든 설정을 기본 설정으로 재설정

합니다.

Upgrade 본 플레이어를 업그레이드합니다. 30

Easy Setup 언어, 해상도, 화면 비율을 설정합니다. 30

Local Storage Local Storage(30페이지)의 상태를 표시하고, Local

Storage를 포맷하고, Local Storage에서 앞/뒤 USB 포트를

선택합니다.

3D Playback

Message

본 플레이어를 켜면 3D 비디오 재생에 관한 경고 메시지가

표시됩니다.

Language OSD On Screen 표시 언어를 선택합니다. 31

Menu 디스크 메뉴 언어에 우선 순위를 부여합니다. 31

Audio 오디오 언어에 우선 순위를 부여합니다. 31

Subtitle 자막 언어에 우선 순위를 부여합니다. 31

Playback Closed Caption 자막 방송을 설정/해제합니다. 31

Angle Mark 앵글이 여러 개인 BD/DVD를 재생하는 경우 Angle Mark가

표시되도록 설정합니다.

PIP Mark Picture in Picture가 있는 BD/DVD를 재생하는 경우 PIP

Mark가 표시되도록 설정합니다.

Secondary Audio

Mark

보조 오디오가 있는 BD/DVD를 재생하는 경우 Secondary

Audio Mark가 표시되도록 설정합니다.

DivX(R) VOD DRM DivX(R) 비디오의 등록 코드를 표시합니다. 31

DVD-Audio Mode DVD-Audio 모드를 DVD-Audio/DVD-Video로 설정합니

다.

Security Change Password Parental Control 및 Country Code의 암호를 변경합니다. 31

Parental Control 디스크 내용에 따라 Parental Control을 설정합니다. 31

Country Code Country Code를 설정합니다. 31

Network Internet Connection 인터넷 연결을 Enable/Disable로 설정합니다. 32

Information 네트워크 정보 화면을 표시합니다. 32

Connection Test 네트워크 연결 테스트를 수행합니다. 32

IP Setting IP 설정을 Auto/Manual로 설정합니다. 32

BD-Live

Connection

BD-Live 연결을 Permitted/Partial Permitted/Prohibited

로 설정합니다.

DLNA DLNA를 Enable/Disable로 설정합니다. 32

Proxy Setting 프록시 설정을 합니다. 32

SETUP 메뉴

28 Ko

Display Setting

TV 3D Output 3D 또는 2D 비디오를 선택합니다. 32

TV Screen 연결된 TV의 화면 비율을 설정하고, 비디오 출력을 조정합

니다.

Resolution 출력 비디오의 해상도를 선택합니다. 33

TV System TV System을 NTSC/PAL/Multi 중에서 선택합니다. 33

Color Space Color Space를 RGB/YCbCr 4:4:4/YCbCr 4:2:2/Full RGB

중에서 선택합니다.

HDMI Deep Color HDMI Deep Color를 30 bits/36 bits/Off 중에서 선택합니

다.

HDMI 1080p 24Hz HDMI 1080p 24Hz를 Auto/Off로 설정합니다. 33

Lip Sync 입모양과 목소리가 서로 동기화되지 않는 경우처럼 비디오와

오디오 사이의 지연을 조정합니다.

Video Process Video Mode 비디오 영상을 조정합니다. 33

Color Adjust 각 색상의 Brightness/Saturation/Hue를 조정합니다. 33

Auto Contrast 컨트라스트를 조정하여 재생되는 화상을 최적화합니다. 33

Noise Reduction Noise Reduction 레벨을 설정합니다. 33

De-interlacing

Mode

비디오 신호 감지 방법을 설정합니다.

Audio Setting

Audio Output Coaxial/Optical COAXIAL 잭/OPTICAL 단자의 출력 모드를 Bitstream/

PCM/Reencode/Off 중에서 선택합니다.

HDMI HDMI 단자의 출력 모드를 Bitstream/PCM/Reencode/Off

중에서 선택합니다.

Downsampling 디지털 오디오 신호의 다운 샘플링 주파수를 48k/96k/192k

중에서 선택합니다.

DRC DRC(Dynamic Range Compression)를 설정합니다. 34

SACD Output SACD Priority 하이브리드 SA-CD를 재생하는 경우 컨텐츠를 선택합니다. 34

HDMI Output SA-CD를 재생하는 경우 HDMI 단자의 출력 모드를 DSD/

PCM 중에서 선택합니다.

Speaker Setting Configuration 7.1채널 서라운드 잭의 오디오 출력을 설정합니다. 34

2ch Downmix 아날로그 2채널로 다운믹스하는 방법을 선택합니다. 34

Post Process Up Mix 2채널 오디오 신호를 멀티 채널화합니다. 34

System Information

소프트웨어 버전 및 MAC 주소(42페이지)를 표시합니다.

메뉴/하위 메뉴 항목 기능 페이지

SETUP 메뉴

29 Ko

설정

한국어

■ SETUP 메뉴 조작 예

본 플레이어에서 설정을 하려면 SETUP 메뉴 화면을 불

러와야 합니다. 다음은 SETUP 메뉴의 기본 조작에 대

한 설명입니다.

예: Parental Control 설정

– 재생 도중에는 일부 항목을 설정할 수 없습니다.

이 경우, 설정하기 전에 를 두 번 눌러 재생을

완전히 중지하십시오.

1. SETUP 메뉴 화면을 표시합니다.

SETUP을 눌러 SETUP 메뉴 화면을 표시합니다.

2/3 를 눌러 General Setting을 선택한 다음,

ENTER 또는 a 를 누릅니다.

2. 하위 메뉴를 선택합니다.

5/a 를 눌러 Security를 선택한 다음, ENTER 또는

커서 3를 누릅니다.

3. 메뉴 항목을 선택합니다.

5/a 를 눌러 Parental Control을 선택한 다음,

ENTER 또는 커서 3를 누릅니다.

4. 암호를 입력합니다.

숫자 버튼으로 압호를 입력합니다.

– 기본 암호는 0000입니다.

– 올바른 암호를 입력해야 다음 설정 화면으로 이

동할 수 있습니다.

– 암호를 변경하려면 "Change Password"(31페

이지)를 참조하십시오.

5. 다음 항목을 선택합니다.

5/a 를 눌러 BD/DVD의 Parental Control 레벨을

선택한 다음, ENTER를 누릅니다.

6. 메뉴 화면을 종료합니다.

2를 누르면 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다.

참고

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

RETURN

ON SCREEN

ENTER

CLEAR SEARCH

SETUP

PIP

REPEAT

HOME

SETUP 메뉴

30 Ko

■ General Setting

기본 설정에는 "

"가 표시되어 있습니다.

System

Screen Saver

화면 보호기를 On/Off로 설정할 수 있습니다.

On으로 설정한 경우, 본 플레이어에서 3분 동안 아무런

조작도 하지 않으면 화면 보호기 모드로 전환됩니다. 그

이후에도 6분 동안 아무런 조작도 하지 않으면 본 플레

이어가 대기 모드로 들어갑니다.

, Off

Disc Auto Playback

Disc Auto Playback을 On/Off로 설정할 수 있습니다.

On으로 설정한 경우, 디스크를 넣으면 디스크가 자동으

로 재생됩니다.

, Off

HDMI Control

플레이어가 HDMI 케이블(12페이지)을 통해 HDMI

Control 기능과 호환되는 TV/AV 리시버의 제어 신호

를 수신하도록 설정할 수 있습니다.

On, Off

Network Control

이더넷을 통한 제어를 On/Off로 설정할 수 있습니다. 본

플레이어는 YNC(Yamaha Network Control) 프로토콜

을 채택하였습니다.

On, Off

– On으로 설정하면 네트워크 제어 기능으로 인해 대

기 모드 동안 전력 소모가 늘어납니다.

– On으로 설정하면 시스템 시작 시간이 단축됩니다.

Load Default

Security 설정(31페이지)을 제외한 본 플레이어의 모든

설정을 기본 설정으로 재설정할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정

에 대한 자세한 내용은 27-34페이지를 참조하십시오.

Upgrade

디스크, USB 저장 장치 또는 네트워크에서 소프트웨어

를 수동으로 업그레이드할 수 있습니다. 소프트웨어 업

그레이드에 대한 자세한 내용은 "소프트웨어 업그레이

드"(37페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Easy Setup

Easy Setup(18페이지)을 수행할 수 있습니다.

Local Storage

Local Storage 정보를 표시하고, Local Storage를 포

맷하고, Front USB/Rear USB를 선택하여 BD-Live 데

이터를 저장할 수 있습니다.

USB 메모리 장치에서 "BUDA" 폴더를 포맷하려면(비

우려면), Information을 선택하고 화면에 "Format" 표

시되면 ENTER를 누릅니다.

Front USB, Rear USB

– Local Storage는 Blu-ray 디스크를 재생하는 경

우 보조 메모리로 사용됩니다.

3D Playback Message

본 플레이어를 켜면 TV에 표시되는 3D 비디오 재생에

관한 경고 메시지를 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다.

, Off

HDMI Control 기능 사용

HDMI Control 기능을 사용하면 본 플레이어와

TV(HDMI Control 기능 지원)를 대화 형식으로 조작

할 수 있습니다.

HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 본 플레이어를 HDMI

Control 기능과 호환되는 TV에 연결하고 SETUP 메

뉴의 HDMI Control을 On으로 설정하면(30페이지)

다음과 같은 기능을 수행할 수 있습니다.

• 자동 입력 선택 기능

본 플레이어에서 재생을 시작하면, TV(및 본 플레이

어가 AV 리시버를 통해 TV에 연결된 경우에는 AV

리시버)의 입력 셀렉터가 본 플레이어로 자동으로

전환됩니다. TV에 따라 TV가 자동으로 켜집니다.

• 자동 전원 꺼짐 기능

본 플레이어가 정지 모드에 있고 SETUP 메뉴 화면

이 표시되지 않은 상태에서 TV를 끄면 본 플레이어

도 자동으로 꺼집니다.

– TV에 따라 HDMI Control 기능이 올바로 작동

하지 않을 수 있습니다.

– TV 또는 AV 리시버에 따라 위에 표시되지 않은

다른 기능이 작동될 수도 있습니다.

– HDMI Control 기능을 사용하려면, 모든 컴포넌

트(본 플레이어, TV 및 AV 리시버)에서 HDMI

Control 기능을 설정해야 합니다. 특정 조작이

필요할 수도 있습니다.

– TV에 따라 각 기능의 활성화/비활성화를 별도

로 설정하기도 합니다.

– 설정과 관련된 자세한 내용은 TV 및/또는 AV

리시버에 부속된 사용 설명서를 참조하십시오.

– On으로 설정하면 HDMI 제어 기능으로 인해 대

기 모드 동안 전력 소모가 증가합니다.

참고

힌트

SETUP 메뉴

31 Ko

설정

한국어

Language

OSD

SETUP 메뉴와 같이 화면에 표시되는 메시지 또는 메뉴

인 On Screen 표시 언어를 선택할 수 있습니다.

English

, , , , ,

, ,

– 러시아 모델의 경우 기본 설정은 입니다.

디스크 메뉴 언어에 우선 순위를 부여할 수 있습니다.

English

, , , , , ,

, Portuguese, Danish, , Finnish,

Norwegian, , Korean, Japanese, More

– 러시아 모델의 경우 기본 설정은 입니다.

– 한국 모델의 경우 기본 설정은 Korean입니다.

Audio

BD/DVD 재생 시 오디오 언어에 우선 순위를 부여할 수

있습니다. 설정 항목에 대한 자세한 내용은 "Menu"(31

페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Subtitle

Subtitle 언어에 우선 순위를 부여할 수 있습니다.

English, , , , , ,

, Portuguese, Danish, , Finnish,

Norwegian, , Korean, Japanese, More, Off

– 러시아 모델의 경우 기본 설정은 입니다.

– 한국 모델의 경우 기본 설정은 Korean입니다.

Playback

Closed Caption

자막 방송이 있는 BD/DVD를 재생하는 경우 자막 방송

(41페이지)이 표시되도록 설정할 수 있습니다.

On, Off

Angle Mark

앵글이 여러 개인 BD/DVD를 재생하는 경우 Angle

Mark( )가 표시되도록 설정할 수 있습니다.

, Off

PIP Mark

Picture in Picture(26페이지)가 있는 BD를 재생하는

경우 PIP Mark( )가 표시되도록 설정할 수 있습니다.

, Off

Secondary Audio Mark

보조 오디오가 있는 BD를 재생하는 경우 Secondary

Audio Mark( )가 표시되도록 설정할 수 있습니다.

, Off

DivX(R) VOD DRM

DivX(R) 비디오의 등록 코드를 표시할 수 있습니다.

DVD-Audio Mode

일부 DVD-Audio 디스크에는 DVD-Audio 컨텐츠 이

외에 DVD-Video 컨텐츠도 포함되어 있습니다. DVD-

Audio 모드 또는 DVD-Video 모드를 선택할 수 있습니

다.

– 이 설정은 디스크를 넣지 않은 경우에만 사용할 수

있습니다.

Security

Change Password

Parental Control 레벨 및 Country Code를 변경하기

위한 암호를 설정할 수 있습니다. "Parental

Control"(31페이지) 및 "Country Code"(31페이지)를

참조하십시오.

– 기본 비밀번호는 0000입니다.

– 비밀번호를 잊은 경우, "문제 해결" (38페이지)를

참조하여 모든 Security 설정값을 기본값으로 설

정하십시오.

Parental Control

일부 BD/DVD 디스크의 경우, 시청자 나이에 따라 디스

크를 볼 수 있는 시청 연령 제한이 설정됩니다. 디스크

컨텐츠에 따라 화면에 표시된 Parental Control을 설정

할 수 있습니다.

Parental Control 레벨을 설정하려면 먼저 암호(31페이

지의 "Change Password" 참조)를 입력해야 합니다.

Parental Control을 설정한 다음, 현재의 Parental

Control 레벨보다 높은 레벨의 디스크를 재생하거나

Parental Control 레벨을 변경하려면 암호를 입력하라

는 대화 상자가 나타납니다.

Off*, 1에서 8

Country Code

거주하고 있는 Country Code를 설정할 수 있습니다.

Country Code를 설정하려면 먼저 암호(31페이지의

"Change Password" 참조)를 입력해야 합니다.

Parental Control 등급 지정 및 디스크 재생 시에도 이

설정이 사용될 수 있습니다.

참고

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Svenska Nederlandse

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

Fran

ais Español Deutsch Italiano

Nederlandse Svenska

DVD-AUDIO

DVD-Audio/Video 컨텐츠 모두 재생됩니다. 디스

크에 따라 DVD-Audio 컨텐츠만 재생되기도 합니

다.

DVD-VIDEO

DVD-Video 컨텐츠만 재생됩니다.

참고

SETUP 메뉴

32 Ko

Network

Internet Connection

네트워크에서 BD-Live(26페이지), DLNA(21페이지) 및

소프트웨어 업그레이드를 사용하는 경우 이 항목을

Enable로 설정합니다(37페이지).

Enable

, Disable

Information

네트워크 정보 화면을 표시할 수 있습니다. 이 화면에서

인터페이스(이더넷), 주소 유형, IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크,

기본 게이트웨이 및 DNS 정보를 볼 수 있습니다.

Connection Test

인터넷 연결 테스트를 실행할 수 있습니다. 테스트가 실

패하면 "IP Setting"(32페이지)을 확인하고 테스트를 다

시 실행하십시오.

IP Setting

다음과 같이 네트워크 설정을 구성할 수 있습니다.

– Numeric keys 문자를 입력합니다.

– 2/3 강조표시를 이동합니다.

– CLEAR 문자를 지웁니다.

– ENTER 설정 내용을 저장한 후 메뉴를 종

료합니다.

BD-Live Connection

BD-Live 컨텐츠에 대한 액세스 제한을 설정할 수 있습

니다.

DLNA

DLNA(21페이지)를 Enable/Disable로 설정할 수 있습

니다. DLNA 기능을 사용하지 않으면 Disable로 설정하

십시오.

Enable

, Disable

Proxy Setting

Proxy Setting을 설정할 수 있습니다. 일반적인 사용 시

Disable로 설정하십시오. 프록시 설정을 하려면 Enable

로 설정하십시오.

■ Display Setting

기본 설정에는 "

"가 표시됩니다.

3D Output

다음과 같이 본 플레이어의 3D 또는 2D 비디오 출력을

선택할 수 있습니다.

– "3D Output" 을 "Auto" 로 선택한 후 Blu-ray 3D

디스크를 재생한다 하더라도 TV와 기타 연결 및

설정(12페이지)에 따라 본 플레이어는 2D 화상을

선택할 수도 있습니다.

TV Screen

연결된 TV의 화면 비율을 설정하고, 비디오 출력을 조

정할 수 있습니다.

TV를 바꾸거나(예를 들면, 새로 구입) 연결된 TV의 화

면 비율을 변경하면 TV Screen 설정을 변경해야 합니

다.

Auto*

이 기능을 선택하면 본 플레이어와 DHCP 서버의

네트워크 설정을 자동으로 구성합니다.

Manual

이 기능을 선택하면 네트워크 설정(IP Address,

Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, DNS)을 수동으

로 구성할 수 있습니다.

힌트

Permitted 모든 BD-Live 디스크를 네트워크에 연결할 수 있

습니다.

Partial

Permitted

소유자 인증이 있는 디스크만 연결할 수 있습니다.

Prohibited

모든 BD-Live 디스크의 네트워크 연결이 금지됩니

다.

Enable 프록시 호스트 및 프록시 포트 설정을 설정합니다.

Disable

프록시 서버를 비활성화합니다. 프록시 서버를 사

용하지 않는 경우 이 항목을 선택합니다.

Proxy Host

프록시 호스트를 설정합니다.

Proxy Port

프록시 포트를 설정합니다.

Auto*

본 플레이어가 3D 또는 2D 비디오를 자동으로 선

택합니다.

Off

본 플레이어가 항상 2D 비디오를 선택합니다.

참고

16:9 Full 화면 비율이 16:9인 TV에 본 플레이어가 연결된

경우 선택합니다. 화면 비율이 4:3인 비디오를 재생

하면 비디오가 아래와 같이 표시됩니다.

16:9 Normal

화면 비율이 16:9인 TV에 본 플레이어가 연결된

경우 선택합니다. 화면 비율이 4:3인 비디오를 재생

하면 비디오가 아래와 같이 표시됩니다.

4:3 Pan Scan

화면 비율이 4:3인 TV에 본 플레이어가 연결된 경

우 선택합니다. 화면 비율이 16:9인 비디오를 재생

하면 비디오가 아래와 같이 표시됩니다.

4:3 Letterbox

화면 비율이 4:3인 TV에 본 플레이어가 연결된 경

우 선택합니다. 화면 비율이 16:9인 비디오를 재생

하면 비디오가 아래와 같이 표시됩니다.

원래 화상

사이즈

16:9(와이드 스크린) TV의 경우

16:9 Full 16:9 Normal

4:3

원래 화상

사이즈

4:3 TV의 경우

4:3 Pan Scan 4:3 Letterbox

16:9

SETUP 메뉴

33 Ko

설정

한국어

Resolution

비디오 출력 해상도를 Auto, 480i/576i, 480p/576p,

720p, 1080i 및 1080p 중에서 선택할 수 있습니다.

Auto로 설정하면, 연결된 TV에 따라 해상도가 최대 해

상도로 설정됩니다. 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은

"비디오 출력 형식에 대하여"(36페이지)를 참조하십시

오.

Auto

, 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p

– HDMI 단자에서 HD 오디오(예: Dolby TrueHD 또

는 DTS-HD Master Audio)를 출력하려면

Resolution을 Auto 또는 720p 이상으로 설정하십

시오.

TV System

TV System을 PAL, NTSC 및 Multi 중에서 선택할 수

있습니다. TV 세트와 동일한 TV System을 설정하십시

오. 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 "비디오 출력 형식

에 대하여"(36페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Color Space

HDMI에서 출력되는 Color Space(41페이지)를 선택할

수 있습니다. 이 기능은 본 플레이어가 HDMI 케이블을

사용하여 연결된 경우에만 사용할 수 있습니다.

– 이 기능을 지원하는 TV에서만 이 기능을 사용할

수 있습니다.

HDMI Deep Color

TV 및/또는 AV 리시버가 Deep Color(41페이지)와 호

환되는 경우, TV/AV 리시버에 맞게 이 항목을 설정하

십시오. 이 기능은 본 플레이어가 HDMI 케이블을 사용

하여 연결된 경우 사용할 수 있습니다.

30 bits, 36 bits, Off

HDMI 1080p 24Hz

이 기능은 프레임 속도가 24Hz로 인코딩된 BD-Video

를 HDMI 1080p 24Hz로 출력합니다. 이 기능을 사용하

면 비디오가 더 매끄럽게 재생될 수 있습니다. 이 기능

은 TV/AV 리시버가 이 기능을 지원하고, 본 플레이어

가 HDMI 케이블을 사용하여 연결된 경우 사용할 수 있

습니다. 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 "비디오 출력

형식에 대하여"(36페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Auto

, Off

– 출력 해상도가 1080p가 아닌 경우 이 설정은 사용

할 수 없습니다.

Lip Sync

다음과 같이 Lip Sync(42페이지) 기능을 설정/조정할

수 있습니다.

Video Process

Video Mode

다음과 같은 Video Mode를 선택할 수 있습니다.

Color Adjust

각 색상(Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta)에

대해 Brightness/Saturation/Hue를 조정할 수 있습니

다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 Video Mode를 Custom으로

설정하십시오. 설정 항목에 대한 자세한 내용은 "Video

Mode"(33페이지)를 참조하십시오.

기본 설정은 0입니다.

Auto Contrast

명암 대비를 조정하여 재생되는 화상을 최적화합니다.

이 기능을 사용하려면 Video Mode를 Custom으로 설

정하십시오.

Off

, On

Noise Reduction

Noise Reduction을 레벨 0에서 3으로 설정할 수 있습

니다. 0은 설정 해제이고, 3은 최대 레벨입니다.

, 1, 2, 3

참고

NTSC, PAL

, Multi

(호주, 아시아, 영국, 유럽 및 러시아 모델)

NTSC

, PAL, Multi

(미국, 캐나다, 중남미, 대만 및 한국 모델)

RGB 일반 신호 범위에서 비디오 신호를 출력합니다.

YCbCr 4:4:4

Color Space를 YCbCr 4:4:4로 설정합니다.

YCbCr 4:2:2

Color Space를 YCbCr 4:2:2로 설정합니다.

Full RGB

RGB를 설정했지만 화면에 흰색과 검은색이 너무

약할 경우 이 항목을 선택합니다. 이 설정은 연결된

컴포넌트가 RGB 0-255 범위를 지원하는 경우 효

과적입니다.

참고

Auto*

본 플레이어가 Lip Sync 기능을 자동으로 조정합니

다.

Manual

Lip Sync 기능을 수동으로 조정할 수 있습니다. 2D

및 3D 컨텐츠의 오디오 지연을 개별적으로 설정할

수 있습니다.

Off

본 플레이어가 Lip Sync 기능을 조정하지 않습니다.

Standard*

화상이 가장 자연스럽고 균형이 잘 맞습니다. 이 모

드는 일반적인 사용에 적합합니다.

Vivid

화상이 훨씬 생생하고 선명합니다.

Cinema

어두운 실내에서 동영상을 시청할 때 적합합니다.

Custom

화상을 수동으로 조정할 수 있습니다. 5 /a 를 눌러

파라미터를 선택한 다음, 2/3 를 눌러 값을 조정합

니다.

Brightness

화상의 전반적인 밝기를 조정합니다.

Saturation

영사된 화상의 색상 포화도를 조정합니다.

Hue

영사된 화상의 색조를 조정합니다.

Contrast

화상에서 밝은 영역(흰색 레벨)을 조정합니다.

Sharpness

비디오에서 물체의 선명도를 조정합니다.

CTI

컬러 영상의 가장자리를 매끄럽게 합니다. 컬러 영

상이 더 뚜렷해집니다.

기본 설정은 0입니다.

SETUP 메뉴

34 Ko

De-interlacing Mode

비디오 신호 감지 방법을 선택할 수 있습니다. 일반적인

사용에서는 Auto로 설정하십시오. 화면에 가로 줄무늬

가 나타나는 경우, 노이즈를 제거하려면 Film/Video로

설정하십시오.

Auto

, Film, Video

■ Audio Setting

기본 설정에는 "

"가 표시됩니다.

Audio Output

Coaxial/Optical

COAXIAL 잭 및 OPTICAL 단자의 출력 모드를 선택할

수 있습니다. 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 "오디오

출력 형식에 대하여"(35페이지)를 참조하십시오.

HDMI

HDMI 단자의 출력 모드를 선택할 수 있습니다. 설정 항

목에 대한 자세한 내용은 "Coaxial/Optical"(34페이지)을

참조하십시오. 출력 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 "오디오

출력 형식에 대하여"(35페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Bitstream

, PCM, Reencode, Off

– HDMI 단자에서 HD 오디오(예: Dolby TrueHD 또

는 DTS-HD Master Audio)를 출력하려면

Resolution을 Auto 또는 720p(33페이지) 이상으

로 설정하십시오.

Downsampling

디지털 오디오 신호 다운샘플링 주파수를 선택할 수 있

습니다. 이 기능은 COAXIAL 잭/OPTICAL 단자에서 오

디오 신호 출력 시 효과적입니다.

DRC

DRC(Dynamic Range Compression)(41페이지)를 On/

Off/Auto로 설정할 수 있습니다. Auto로 설정하면,

Dolby TrueHD 형식으로 된 DRC 정보가 포함된 소스

의 경우 DRC가 자동으로 켜집니다. DRC는 폭발음과 같

은 강한 사운드는 작게, 대화는 잘 들리도록 합니다. 밤

에 영화를 볼 때 유용합니다.

Off

, On, Auto

SACD Output

SACD Priority

멀티 채널 또는 스테레오(2채널) 컨텐츠가 모두 포함된

하이브리드 SA-CD(4페이지)를 넣은 경우 둘 중에서 재

생되는 컨텐츠를 선택할 수 있습니다.

Multi-ch

, 2-ch

HDMI Output

SA-CD를 재생하는 경우 HDMI 단자에서 출력되는 오

디오 신호를 선택할 수 있습니다.

Speaker Setting

Configuration

연결된 스피커 또는 앰프에 따라 7.1채널 서라운드 출력

을 설정할 수 있습니다.

1 5/a 를 눌러 구성하려는 스피커를 선택한 다음,

ENTER를 누릅니다.

2 아래와 같은 값을 조정합니다. 선택한 스피커에 따라

일부 항목이 표시되지 않을 수 있습니다.

3 RETURN을 눌러 스피커 선택으로 돌아갑니다.

2ch Downmix

아날로그 2채널로 다운믹스하는 방법을 Stereo 또는

Lt/Rt 중에서 선택할 수 있습니다.

Post Process

Up Mix

2채널 오디오 신호를 멀티 채널화할 수 있습니다. 멀티

채널화하려면 NEO6를 선택한 다음 Cinema 또는 Music

모드를 선택합니다.

Off

, NEO6

■ System Information

소프트웨어 버전 및 MAC 주소(42페이지)가 표시됩니다.

Bitstream 디지털 신호를 전혀 처리하지 않고 출력합니다. 보

조 오디오는 출력되지 않습니다.

PCM

2채널 PCM을 출력합니다.

Reencode

보조 오디오와 함께 Bitstream을 출력합니다.

Off

음을 소거합니다.

참고

48k

디지털 PCM 출력의 최고 샘플링 속도가 48 kHz입

니다.

96k

디지털 PCM 출력의 최고 샘플링 속도가 96 kHz입

니다.

192k

디지털 PCM 출력의 최고 샘플링 속도가 192 kHz

입니다.

DSD

DSD raw 신호를 출력합니다. 본 플레이어가 DSD

호환 AV 리시버에 연결된 경우 이 항목을 사용하는

것이 좋습니다.

PCM

본 플레이어에서 디코딩된 PCM 신호를 출력합니

다.

Size

스피커의 우퍼 섹션이 16 cm 이상일 경우 Large를

선택합니다. 16 cm보다 작으면 Small을 선택합니다.

Large

, Small

Trim

-12에서 0 dB(0.5 dB 간격)

기본 설정은 0 dB입니다.

Delay

0.5에서 10 m(0.5 m 간격)

기본 설정은 3 m입니다.

Disable

선택한 스피커를 사용하지 않을 경우 Yes를 선택합

니다.

Yes, No

Stereo

채널 출력이 스테레오로 변경되어, 두 개의 프론트

스피커의 사운드만 전달됩니다.

Lt/Rt

본 기기가 Dolby Pro Logic 디코더에 연결된 경우

이 항목을 선택합니다. 리어 스피커의 사운드가 2

채널 스테레오 사운드로 믹스됩니다.

SETUP 메뉴

35 Ko

설정

한국어

■ 오디오 출력 형식에 대하여

* "SA"는 보조 오디오(Secondary Audio)입니다.

** "BCS"는 버튼 조작음, 팝업 메뉴 효과음 등입니다.

SA-CD 출력 형식

– Coaxial/Optical 또는 HDMI가 Bitstream으로 설정된 경우 보조 오디오가 출력되지 않습니다. (34페이지)

– HDMI 단자에서 HD 오디오(예: Dolby TrueHD 또는 DTS-HD Master Audio)를 출력하려면 Resolution을

Auto 또는 720p(33페이지) 이상으로 설정하십시오.

– SA-CD를 재생하는 경우, Speaker Setting(34페이지)의 Configuration은 HDMI Output이 PCM으로 설정

된 경우에만 적용됩니다.

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/7.1

채널

서라운드

소스 형식 Bitstream PCM Reencode Bitstream PCM Reencode

PCM 2채널 PCM 2채널 PCM 2채널 2채널

PCM 5.1채널 PCM 5.1채널 PCM 2채널

2채널/5.1채널

PCM 7.1채널 PCM 7.1채널 PCM 2채널

2채널/7.1채널

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital

PCM 최대

5.1채널

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital

2채널/5.1채널

또는

BCS

사용

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital

Plus

PCM 최대

7.1채널

Dolby Digital

Plus

Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital

2채널/7.1채널

또는

BCS

사용

Dolby Digital

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby

TrueHD

PCM 최대

7.1채널

Dolby

TrueHD

Dolby Digital PCM 2ch Dolby Digital

또는

BCS

사용

Dolby Digital

DTS DTS

PCM 최대

5.1채널

DTS DTS PCM 2ch DTS

2채널/5.1채널

또는

BCS

사용

DTS HD

High

Resolution

DTS HD

High

Resolution

PCM 최대

7.1채널

DTS HD

High

Resolution

DTS PCM 2ch DTS

2채널/7.1채널

또는

BCS

사용

DTS

DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

Master

Audio

PCM 최대

7.1채널

DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS PCM 2ch DTS

또는

BCS

사용

DTS

SACD Output 설정

HDMI COAXIAL/OPTICAL

MIXED 2CH/7.1채널 서라운드

SACD Priority HDMI Output

Multi-ch

DSD DSD 최대 5.1채널 출력 안됨 2채널/5.1채널

PCM PCM 최대 5.1채널 출력 안됨 2채널/5.1채널

2-ch

DSD DSD 2채널 출력 안됨 2채널/2채널

PCM PCM 2채널 출력 안됨 2채널/2채널

참고

SETUP 메뉴

36 Ko

■ 비디오 출력 형식에 대하여

TV System이 NTSC로 설정된 경우

* 디스크나 컨텐츠에 따라 본 플레이어는 480p 비디오 신호를 출력합니다.

TV System이 PAL로 설정된 경우

* 디스크나 컨텐츠에 따라 본 플레이어는 576p 비디오 신호를 출력합니다.

TV System이 Multi로 설정된 경우

TV System 이 Multi 로 설정된 경우 , 비디오 신호는 소스와 동일한 주파수로 출력됩니다 . TV 의 주파수 설정 및

출력 비디오 신호의 해상도에 대한 자세한 내용은 위의 표를 참조하십시오 .

SETUP 메뉴와 같은 메뉴 화면이 표시된 경우 비디오 신호는 소스와 동일한 주파수로 출력됩니다 .

– 표에서 "최대"는 연결된 TV에서 지원되는 최대 해상도로 설정된다는 것을 의미합니다.

– 출력 해상도가 1080p가 아니면 HDMI 1080p 24Hz 설정을 사용할 수 없습니다.

– 본 플레이어가 HDMI로부터 1080p 24Hz 비디오 신호를 출력하는 경우 COMPONENT와 VIDEO 잭에서는

신호가 출력되지 않습니다.

– 상업적으로 출시된 DVD를 컴포넌트 출력에서 재생하는 경우 최대 해상도는 480p/576p입니다.

– TV System이 NTSC로 설정된 경우 비디오 소스가 60 Hz가 아니면 비디오 출력 신호가 60 Hz로 변환됩니

다.

– TV System이 PAL로 설정된 경우 비디오 소스가 50 Hz가 아니면 비디오 출력 신호가 50 Hz로 변환됩니다.

Resolution Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24Hz 기타

HDMI

BD 재생

최대 최대 최대 720p 60 Hz 1080i 60 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 60 Hz

기타 1080p 60 Hz

COMPONENT

상용 DVD 재

생

480i 480i

480p 480p 480p 480p

BD 재생 480i 480i 480i 끔 480i

기타 480p 720p 60 Hz *

1080i 60 Hz *

VIDEO

BD 재생

480i 480i 480i 480i 480i

끔

480i

기타 480i

Resolution Auto 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i

1080p

24Hz 기타

HDMI

BD 재생

최대 최대 최대 720p 50 Hz 1080i 50 Hz

1080p 24 Hz

1080p 50 Hz

기타 1080p 50 Hz

COMPONENT

상용 DVD 재

생

576i 576i

576p 576p 576p 576p

BD 재생 576i 576i 576i 끔 576i

기타 576p 720p 50 Hz *

1080i 50 Hz *

VIDEO

BD 재생

576i 576i 576i 576i 576i

끔

576i

기타 576i

참고

37 Ko

설정

한국어

본 플레이어 소프트웨어를 최신으로 업그레이드하지 않

은 경우 새로 출시된 BD 디스크가 재생되지 않을 수 있

습니다. 본 플레이어가 최신 소프트웨어에서 작동되도

록 소프트웨어 업그레이드로 플레이어를 업그레이드하

는 것이 좋습니다.

소프트웨어 업그레이드 기능을 확인하려면 다음을 방문

하십시오.

http://download.yamaha.com/downloads/service/

top/?site=europe.yamaha.com&language=en

– 업그레이드 파일 패키지가 포함된 디스크를 넣으

면 소프트웨어 업그레이드가 자동으로 시작됩니다.

– 소프트웨어 업그레이드를 실행 중일 때는 디스크/

USB 메모리 장치를 빼거나, 본 플레이어를 대기

모드로 설정하거나, 전원 케이블/LAN 케이블을 뽑

지 마십시오.

■ 소프트웨어 업그레이드

1. 소프트웨어 업그레이드를 준비합니다.

디스크/USB 저장 장치에서 소프트웨어를 업그레

이드하는 경우:

1 업그레이드 파일 패키지를 디스크/USB 메모리

장치의 적절한 폴더에 저장합니다. 자세한 내용

은 업그레이드 파일 패키지에 부속된 설명서를

참조하십시오.

2 디스크를 넣거나 USB 메모리 장치를 연결합

니다.

디스크를 넣으면 소프트웨어 업그레이드가 자

동으로 시작됩니다. 단계 2를 건너뜁니다.

네트워크에서 소프트웨어를 업그레이드하는 경우:

본 플레이어가 네트워크에 연결되어 있는지 확

인하십시오.

2. 업그레이드 방법을 선택하고 SETUP 메뉴에

서 업그레이드를 시작합니다.

1 SETUP을 눌러 SETUP 메뉴 화면을 표시합니다.

2 General Setting = System = Upgrade를 선택

합니다.

3 Disc/USB Storage/Network 중에서 업그레이

드 파일 패키지가 포함된 항목을 선택합니다.

3. 시스템에서 업그레이드 파일 패키지를 검색

합니다.

4. ENTER를 눌러 업그레이드를 시작합니다.

5. 업그레이드가 완료되었습니다. 시스템이 다시

시작됩니다.

소프트웨어 업그레이드

힌트

참고

38 Ko

추가 정보

󱔭 󲵁󱀽󱾩󱷩󰐵 󲁊󱣶󲀶󱽱󱂑 󱿆󰰎󲶍󲇵 󱵿󱽹 󰓲󱻥 󱵹󰿍 󲲑󱆱 󲑭󲂥󲶍󱬢󱬑󱹙. 󱵹󰿍󱸅 󲶩󰬮󰱍󲇵 󱵿󰫉 󱍭󲁑󰐵 󱑑󱤒󲶑 󰓲󱻥 󰹅󰫉 󱵹󰿍

󱾍 󲶩󰓥󲑺󱾩 󰯹󱻵󱾩 󱵽 󰱍󰫉 󰓲󱻥 󱔭 󲵁󱀽󱾩󱷩󱆱 󰡹󰔕 󲀹󱼅 󲜵󱾩󱙉󱽹 󱖹󱇡󲶑 󰬙󱾁 󰐵󰚁󱻩 󰔪󱾭 Yamaha 󰬵󱇡󲁅󱾩󰣍 󱥑󱙹󱫙 󱥱

󲥥󱂑 󱍭󱾍󲶍󱬢󱬑󱹙.

■ 전원

■ 기본 조작

■ 디스크 재생

문제 해결

문제 원인 및 해결 방법

전원이 켜지지 않는다. – AC 전원 케이블을 올바로 연결하십시오.

– 앞면 패널의 p 를 눌러 전원을 켜십시오.

플레이어가 꺼진다. – 10분 동안 계속해서 아무 작동도 하지 않으면(재생 안함) 전원이 자동을 꺼집니다.

문제 원인 및 해결 방법

리모콘이 작동하지 않는다. – 리모콘 작동 범위 내에서 리모콘을 사용하십시오. (5페이지)

– 배터리를 교체하십시오. (5페이지)

– 본체 및 리모콘의 ID 설정을 확인하십시오. (9페이지)

버튼이 작동하지 않는다. – 앞면 패널의 p를 5초 정도 눌러 본 플레이어를 다시 시작하십시오.

–

본 플레이어를 완전히 재설정하려면, AC 콘센트에서 전원 케이블을 10초 이상 동안

뽑아 놓은 후에, 전원 케이블을 AC 콘센트에 다시 꽂은 다음 본 플레이어를 켜십시오.

암호를 잊어버렸다.

– 플레이어에 디스크가 들어 있지 않고 재생이 정지된 상태에서 앞면 패널의 및

를 동시에 눌러 플레이어를 기본 설정으로 설정하십시오(Security 설정(31페이

지)도 재설정됨). 전원이 자동으로 꺼진 후에 p를 눌러 전원을 다시 켜십시오.

문제 원인 및 해결 방법

플레이어에서 디스크를 재생할 수 없다. – 디스크를 꺼내 청소하여 주십시오. (4페이지)

– 디스크가 올바로 들어 있는지 확인하십시오(라벨 면이 위로 되어 있고 디스크 트레이

의 제자리에 들어 있는지 확인). (4페이지)

– 본 플레이어에서 지원하는 디스크를 사용하십시오. (3페이지)

– 디스크를 꺼낸 다음 본 플레이어에서 지원하는 디스크인지 확인하십시오. (3페이지)

– 지역 코드를 확인하십시오. (3페이지)

– 다른 디스크를 넣어서 디스크가 손상되었는지 확인하십시오.

– CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW/R DL 및 DVD-R/RW/R DL은 파이널라이즈해야 합니다. (3페

이지)

비디오가 멈춘다. – 강한 충격 또는 진동이 감지된 경우 플레이어가 정지됩니다.

재생을 시작하거나 디스크를 읽어들일 때 플

레이어에서 딱 하는 소리가 들린다.

– 이 소리는 플레이어 고장이 아니며 정상적인 작동 상태입니다.

문제 해결

39 Ko

추가 정보

한국어

■ 사진

■ 사운드

문제 원인 및 해결 방법

사진이 표시되지 않는다. – 케이블이 올바로 연결되어 있는지 확인하십시오. (10페이지)

– 연결된 TV 또는 AV 리시버가 올바른 입력으로 설정되어 있는지 확인하십시오. (10

페이지)

– 부속된 비디오 핀 케이블을 사용하여 본 플레이어를 VIDEO 잭(13페이지)이 장착된

TV에 연결하고 Resolution을 올바로 설정하십시오. (33페이지)

– TV System이 올바로 설정되어 있지 않습니다. 리모콘의 DIMMER를 잠시 눌러 TV

System 설정을 기본 설정으로 재설정하십시오.

화면이 정지되고 조작 버튼이 작동하지 않는

다.

– 를 누른 다음 재생을 다시 시작하십시오.

– 전원을 껐다가 다시 켜십시오.

– 앞면 패널의 p를 5초 정도 눌러 본 플레이어를 다시 시작하십시오.

비디오가 원하는 해상도로 출력되지 않는다. – 원하는 해상도로 설정하십시오. (33페이지)

와이드 스크린 비디오가 세로로 늘어난 것처

럼 보이거나, 화면 위아래에 검은색 띠가 나

타난다. 또는 4:3 비디오가 가로로 늘어난 것

처럼 보인다.

– TV의 화면 비율을 변경하십시오. (32페이지)

네모난 무늬(모자이크)가 화면에 나타난다. – 디지털 화상 압축 기술의 특성상 빠른 동작이 있는 장면에서 화상에 블록이 보일 수

있습니다.

DVD 비디오를 VCR로 녹화하거나 VCR을 통해

재생하면 재생 화면이 고르지 못하다.

– 본 플레이어는 아날로그 복사 방지 규정을 준수합니다. 일부 디스크에는 복사 방지 신

호가 포함되어 있습니다. 이러한 디스크를 VCR을 통해 재생하려고 하거나 VCR에 녹

화하고 신호를 재생하려고 하면 복사 방지로 인해 올바로 재생되지 않습니다.

오디오가 출력되지 않거나 화상이 올바로 재

생되지 않는다.

– 복사 방지 컨텐츠가 녹화된 일부 디스크의 경우 오디오가 출력되지 않거나 화상이 올

바로 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다.

문제 문제 및 해결 방법

사운드가 출력되지 않거나 왜곡된다. – 오디오 케이블이 올바로 연결되어 있는지 확인하십시오. (10페이지)

– 정지화상 모드, 슬로 모션 재생, 빨리감기 및 빨리되감기 도중에는 사운드가 출력되지

않습니다. (7페이지)

– 오디오 컨텐츠에 오디오 신호 이외의 오디오 또는 비표준 오디오가 녹음된 경우와 같

이 오디오 녹음 상태에 따라 오디오가 출력되지 않을 수 있습니다. (3페이지)

오디오의 좌우 채널이 바뀌거나 사운드가 한

쪽에서만 출력된다.

– 오디오 연결을 확인하십시오. (10페이지)

오디오가 출력되지 않거나 화상이 올바로 재

생되지 않는다.

올바로 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다.

원하는 오디오 유형/채널 번호를 들을 수 없

다.

– Audio Output 설정 및 "오디오 출력 형식에 대하여"를 참조하십시오. (34, 35페이지)

PIP 사운드(보조 오디오)가 들리지 않는다. – Coaxial/Optical 또는 HDMI를 PCM/Reencode로 설정하십시오. (34페이지)

– 보조 오디오를 들으려면 2ND AUDIO를 누르십시오. (6페이지)

– 디스크에 따라 디스크의 맨 처음 메뉴에서 보조 오디오를 On으로 설정해야 하는 경

우도 있습니다. (7페이지)

문제 해결

40 Ko

■ 네트워크

■ 화면의 메시지

– 재생하려는 디스크가 적합하지 않거나 조작이 잘못된 경우 TV 화면에 다음과 같은 메시지가 나타납니다.

문제 원인 및 해결 방법

인터넷에 연결할 수 없다. – 네트워크 케이블을 올바로 연결하십시오.

– 광대역 라우터 또는 모뎀 등 연결된 기기의 전원을 켜십시오.

– 광대역 라우터 및/또는 모뎀을 올바로 연결하십시오.

– 네트워크 설정에서 올바른 값을 설정하십시오. "Network"를 확인하십시오. (32페이

지)

BD-Live 컨텐츠를 다운로드할 수 없다. – 네트워크 케이블을 올바로 연결하십시오. (16페이지)

– USB 메모리 장치를 올바로 연결하십시오. USB 메모리 장치가 본 플레이어의 USB

포트에 연결되어 있는지 확인하십시오. (16페이지)

– BD 디스크가 BD-Live를 지원하는지 확인하십시오.

– "Internet Connection"의 설정을 확인하십시오. (32페이지)

– FAT16 또는 FAT32로 포맷된 USB 메모리 장치를 연결하십시오.

– 여유 공간이 2 GB 이상인 USB 메모리 장치를 연결하는 것이 좋습니다. 여유 공간이

충분하지 않을 경우 USB 메모리 장치를 포맷하십시오. (30페이지)

– 디스크과 함께 제공된 사용 설명서를 참조하거나 디스크 제조업체에 문의하십시오.

DLNA 서버가 감지되지 않는다. – 네트워크 케이블을 올바로 연결하십시오.

– 광대역 라우터 또는 서버 등 연결된 기기의 전원을 켜십시오.

– 플레이어 및 서버가 동일한 액세스 포인트에 연결되어 있는지 확인하십시오.

– 네트워크 설정에서 올바른 값을 설정하십시오 "Network"를 확인하십시오. (32페이

지)

– DLNA 서버에 따라, 서버로부터 플레이어를 허가 받아야 할 수도 있습니다.

홈 네트워크 서버에서 파일을 재생할 수 없

다.

– 재생 가능한 파일인지 확인하십시오. (3페이지)

– DLNA 서버의 설정을 확인하십시오.

– 홈 네트워크 조건에 따라 재생 및 작동 상태가 영향을 받을 수 있습니다.

오류 메시지 원인 및 해결 방법

Not Support This File! – 파일이 본 플레이어에서 지원되지 않습니다. "본 플레이어에서 사용할 수 있는 디스크/파일 유형"

(3페이지)을 참조하십시오.

Wrong region code! – 디스크의 지역 코드가 호환되지 않습니다. "지역 관리 정보"(3페이지)를 참조하십시오.

Network has FAILED. – 본 플레이어를 네트워크에 연결할 수 없습니다. 연결(16페이지) 및 Network 설정(32페이지)을 확

인하십시오.

Network is OK, proxy has

FAILED.

– 본 플레이어를 프록시 서버에 연결할 수 없습니다. "Proxy Setting"(32페이지)을 참조하십시오.

The Setting is prohibited,

please setup again.

– BD-Live 연결이 금지되어 있습니다. "BD-Live Connection"(32페이지)을 참조하십시오.

No valid upgrade file is

found!

– 업그레이드 파일이 적절한 폴더에 있는지 확인하십시오.

Upgrade has failed for some

reason!

– 업그레이드가 실패했습니다. 업그레이드 파일이 손상되었는지 또는 읽을 수 없는 파일인지 확인

하십시오.

41 Ko

추가 정보

한국어

AVCHD

AVCHD는 고해상도 HD 화상을 녹화 및 재생할 수 있

는 고선명 비디오 카메라의 새로운 형식(표준)입니다.

BD-Live™

BD-Live는 네트워크 연결을 사용할 수 있는 BD 표

준으로, 본 플레이어에서 온라인에 연결하여 판촉용

영상이나 기타 데이터를 다운로드할 수 있습니다.

BDMV

BDMV(Blu-ray Disc Movie, BD-MV)는 Blu-ray

Disc 규격의 하나인 BD-ROM에서 사용되는 응용 프

로그램 형식 중 하나입니다. BDMV는 DVD 규격의

DVD-Video와 동일한 녹화 형식입니다.

Blu-ray 3D™

Blu-ray 3D는 풀 HD 3D 영상을 제공합니다.

BONUSVIEW

BONUSVIEW 호환 디스크를 사용하면 두 개의 화면

용 비디오 하위 채널, 오디오 하위 채널 및 하위 타이

틀을 동시에 즐길 수 있습니다. 재생 도중 기본 화면

안에 작은 화면이 나타납니다(Picture in Picture).

자막 방송

자막 방송은 자막의 일종이지만, 자막은 일반 사람들

을 위한 것이고 자막 방송은 청각 장애인용이라는 점

이 서로 다릅니다. 자막에는 모든 오디오가 거의 표

시되지 않습니다. 예를 들어, 자막에서는 사운드 효

과(예: "전화벨 소리" 및 "발자국 소리")가 나타나지

만, 자막 방송에서는 그렇지 않습니다. 이 설정을 선

택하기 전에 디스크에 자막 방송 정보가 포함되어 있

는지 확인하십시오.

Color Space

Color Space는 표현할 수 있는 색상 범위입니다.

RGB는 RGB 색상 모델(적색, 녹색 및 청색)을 기준

으로 하는 색상 공간이며 일반적으로 PC 모니터에

사용됩니다. YCbCr는 휘도 신호(Y) 및 색차 신호(Cb

및 Cr)를 기준으로 하는 색상 공간입니다.

Deep Color

Deep Color는 디스플레이에서 다양한 색심도를 사

용하는 것으로, 이전 버전의 HDMI 규격에서는 최대

24비트 깊이까지 사용합니다. 이렇게 비트 심도가 늘

어나면 HDTV 및 다른 디스플레이에서 수백만 색상

에서 수십억 색상까지 표시할 수 있으며, 화면의 컬

러 밴딩을 제거하여 색조 전환 및 색상 간 그라데이

션이 매끄러워집니다. 음영비가 증가되면 검은색과

흰색 사이에 몇 배나 더 많은 회색 음영을 표현할 수

있습니다. 또한 Deep Color는 RGB 또는 YCbCr 색

상 공간에서 정의한 범위 내에서 사용할 수 있는 색

상 수가 늘어납니다.

DivX

DivX

는 DivX, Inc.에서 개발하여 널리 사용되는 미

디어 기술입니다. DivX

파일에는 고화질이지만 상

대적으로 파일 크기가 작고 고도로 압축된 비디오가

포함되어 있습니다. 또한 DivX

파일에는 메뉴, 자막

및 대체 오디오 트랙 같은 고급 미디어 기능이 포함되

어 있습니다. 많은 DivX

미디어 파일을 온라인에서

다운로드할 수 있으며, DivX.com에서 개인 콘텐츠와

간단한 툴을 사용하여 직접 만들 수 있습니다.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Laboratories Inc.에서 개발한 사운드 시스템

으로, 제품을 Dolby Digital 프로세서 또는 앰프에 연

결하면 영화관과 같은 오디오 출력이 제공됩니다.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital의 확장으로서 개발된 사운드 시스템

입니다. 이 오디오 코딩 기술은 7.1 멀티 채널 서라운

드 사운드를 지원합니다.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD는 차세대 광 디스크용 최대 8개의 멀

티 채널 서라운드 사운드를 지원하는 무손실 코딩 기

술입니다. 재생된 사운드는 비트마다 원음에 충실합

니다.

DRC(Dynamic Range Control)

DRC를 사용하여 평균 음량으로 재생 시 최강음과 최

약음 사이의 범위(동적 범위)를 조정할 수 있습니다.

대화가 잘 들리지 않거나 이웃에 피해를 줄 수 있는

시간에 재생하는 경우 사용하십시오.

DSD(Direct Stream Digital)

DSD 기술은 Super Audio CD 같은 디지털 저장 매

체에 오디오 신호를 저장합니다. DSD를 사용하면,

신호가 2.8224 MHz의 고주파수 샘플링 속도의 단일

비트값으로 저장되고, 노이즈 셰이핑 및 오버 샘플링

을 사용하여 오디오 신호의 양자화에서 일반적으로

발생하는 왜곡을 줄입니다. 샘플링 속도가 높기 때문

에 일반 오디오 CD에 사용되는 PCM에서 제공하는

것보다 훨씬 좋은 음질을 얻을 수 있습니다.

DTS

이것은 영화에서 사용하기 위해 DTS, Inc.에서 개발

한 디지털 사운드 시스템입니다.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio는 차세대 고선명

광 디스크 형식을 위해 개발된 신기술입니다.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio는 차세대 고선명 광 디스크

형식을 위해 개발된 무손실 오디오 압축 기술입니다.

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential

DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential은 차세대 고

선명 광 디스크 형식을 위해 개발된 무손실 오디오

압축 기술입니다.

HDMI

HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)는

하나의 디지털 연결로 비디오와 오디오를 모두 지원

하는 인터페이스입니다. HDMI 연결은 고선명 비디

오 신호 및 멀티 채널 오디오 신호를 품질 저하 없이

디지털 형태로 HDMI가 장착된 TV 같은 AV 컴포넌

트로 전달합니다.

Letterbox(LB 4:3)

화상의 위아래에 검은색 막대가 나타나는 화면 크기로,

연결된 4:3 TV에서 와이드 스크린(16:9) 영상을 볼 수

있습니다.

용어집

제품 사양

42 Ko

Linear PCM 사운드

Linear PCM는 오디오 CD 및 일부 DVD 및 Blu-ray

디스크에서 사용되는 신호 기록 형식입니다. 오디오

CD의 사운드는 16비트 44.1 kHz로 기록됩니다.

(DVD 디스크에서 사운드는 16비트 48 kHz 및 24비

트 96 kHz 사이에 기록되고, BD 디스크에서는 16비

트 48 kHz 및 24비트 192 kHz 사이에 기록됩니다.)

Lip Sync

Lip Sync는 lip synchronization(립싱크)의 약자로,

제작 후 및 전송 과정에서 오디오 신호와 비디오 신호

가 동기화되도록 유지하는 문제 및 성능과 관련된 기

술 용어입니다. 오디오 및 비디오 지연의 경우 사용자

가 복잡한 조정을 해야 하는 반면, HDMI 버전 1.3에

서는 자동 오디오 및 비디오 싱크 기능을 통합하여 사

용자의 개입 없이 장치에서 동기화를 자동으로 정확하

게 수행할 수 있습니다.

Mac 주소

Mac 주소는 식별을 위해 네트워크 장치에 할당한 고

유한 값입니다.

Pan Scan(PS 4:3)

화상의 양쪽을 잘라낸 화면 크기를 사용하여 연결된

4:3 TV에서 와이드 스크린(16:9) 영상을 볼 수 있습니

다.

자막

자막은 화면 아래쪽에 표시되어 대화를 번역 또는 기

술하는 텍스트 줄입니다. 자막은 주로 DVD 및 BD 디

스크에 기록되어 있습니다.

맨 처음 메뉴

BD-Video/DVD-Video의 경우, 재생할 챕터 및 자막

언어 등을 선택하는 메뉴입니다. 일부 DVD-Video에

서 맨 처음 메뉴를 "타이틀 메뉴"라고도 합니다.

x.v.Color

x.v.Color는 전보다 넓은 범위의 색상을 재현할 수 있

어서 인간의 눈으로 감지할 수 있는 거의 모든 색상을

표시할 수 있습니다.

■ 일반 사항

전원

[미국 및 캐나다 모델].....................................AC 110-240 V, 60 Hz

[중남미 모델] ........................................... AC 110-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[유럽 및 러시아 모델]............................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[호주 모델].....................................................AC 110-240 V, 50 Hz

[아시아 모델] ........................................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[대만 모델]............................................... AC 110-120 V, 50/60 Hz

[한국 모델]............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

소비 전력(일반)............................................................................. 25 W

소비 전력(대기).................................................................... 0.5 W 이하

크기(W × H × D)...................................................... 435 × 96 × 316 mm

무게 ...........................................................................................4.05 kg

■ 오디오 성능

오디오 출력 레벨(1 kHz, 0 dB, BD/DVD/CD-DA).................. 2 ± 0.3 V

신호 대 잡음비(BD/DVD/CD-DA) ..................................... 115 dB 이상

동적 범위

BD/DVD ......................................................................... 105 dB 이상

CD-DA........................................................................... 100 dB 이상

고조파 왜곡(1 kHz)

BD/DVD ..................................................................... 0.0028 % 이하

CD-DA......................................................................... 0.003 % 이하

주파수 응답

BD/DVD ........................................ 2 Hz에서 22 kHz(48 kHz 샘플링)

2 Hz에서 44 kHz(96 kHz 샘플링)

CD-DA....................................................................2 Hz에서 20 kHz

■ 입력/출력

HDMI 출력 ................................................................ 타입 A 커넥터 × 1

480i/576i/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p/1080p@24Hz,

Deep Color, x.v. 색상 지원

컴포넌트 비디오 출력............................................ Y: 1 Vp-p(75 ohms)

B, PR: 0.7 Vp-p(75 ohms)

비디오 출력 ...............................................................1 Vp-p(75 ohms)

디지털 출력 ................................................................... 광 × 1, 동축 × 1

아날로그 오디오 출력............................................................ 7.1 ch × 1,

Mixed 2 ch × 1

USB........................................................................... 타입 A 커넥터 × 2

기타 장비 .............................................................. Remote IN/OUT × 1,

RS-232C × 1(커스텀 인스톨러용),

이더넷 × 1

제품 사양은 사전 예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다.

제품 사양

43 Ko

추가 정보

한국어

■ 저작권

을 수 있습니다. 국내 관련 법규를 참조하십시오.

– 이 항목은 미국 특허 및 Rovi Corporation의 다른

합합니다. 리버스 엔지니어링 및 분해는 금지됩니

다.

– Dolby Laboratories의 사용허락 아래 제작되었습

니다. Dolby 및 이중 D 기호는 Dolby

Laboratories의 상표입니다.

– 미국 특허 번호 5,451,942; 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;

7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 및

미국과 전세계에서 출원 필했거나 출원 중인 기타

특허로 제조되었습니다. DTS 및 그 기호는 등록

상표이며 DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio 및

DTS 로고는 DTS, Inc.의 상표입니다. 제품에는 소

프트웨어가 포함됩니다.

유.

– "Blu-ray Disc

™

", "Blu-ray

™

", "Blu-ray 3D

™

"BD-Live

™

", "BONUSVIEW

™

" 및 로고들은

Blu-ray Disc Association의 상표입니다.

– 는 DVD Format/Logo Licensing

Corporation의 상표입니다.

– HDMI, HDMI 로고 및 High-Definition

Multimedia Interface는 HDMI Licensing LLC의

상표 또는 등록 상표입니다.

– "x.v.Color" 및 "x.v.Color" 로고는 상표입니다.

– "AVCHD" 및 "AVCHD" 로고는 Panasonic

Corporation 및 Sony Corporation의 상표입니다.

– Java 및 모든 Java 기반 상표와 로고는 미국 및/또

는 기타 국가에서 Sun Microsystems, Inc.의 상표

또는 등록 상표입니다.

– 이 제품은 AVC 특허 포트폴리오 및 VC-1 특허 포

트폴리오 라이센스 하에서 다음과 같은 개인적이

고 비상업적인 용도로 사용하는 경우에 한하여 허

가를 받았습니다. (i) AVC 표준 및 VC-1 표준

("AVC/VC-1 비디오")에 호환되는 비디오 인코딩

및/또는 (ii) 개인적이고 비상업적인 업무에 종사하

는 사용자가 인코딩한 AVC/VC-1 비디오의 디코

딩 및/또는 AVC/VC-1 비디오 배급 허가가 있는

비디오 공급자가 제공한 AVC/VC-1 비디오의 디

코딩. 그 외 용도로는 라이센스가 허가되거나 묵시

적으로도 인정되지 않습니다. 자세한 내용은

MPEG LA, LLC에서 얻을 수 있습니다.

http://www.mpegla.com을 참조하십시오

– Windows Media Player는 미국 및/또는 기타 국가

에서 Microsoft corporation의 등록 상표 또는 상표

입니다.

– DLNA 및 DLNA CERTIFIED는 Digital Living

Network Alliance의 상표 및/또는 서비스 마크입

니다.

– YouTube 및 YouTube 로고는 Google. Inc의 상

표입니다.

– "DivX

®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus™ HD 및 관

련 로고는 DivX, Inc.의 등록 상표이고 라이센스

하에 사용되었습니다."

– "DivX Certified

®는 최대 1080p HD 및 프리미엄

컨텐츠 DivX

® 및 DivX Plus™ HD(H.264/.MKV)

비디오 재생용입니다."

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX®는 DivX, Inc.에서 만든 디지털 비디오

형식입니다. 이 형식은 DivX 비디오를 재생하는 공식 DivX

Certified

® 장치입니다. 자세한 정보 및 파일을 DivX 비디오로 변환하

는 소프트웨어 툴에 대해 알아보려면 divx.com을 방문하십시오.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: 구입한 DivX Video-on-

Demand (VOD) 동영상을 재생하려면 이 DivX Certified

® 장치를 등

록해야 합니다. 등록 코드를 얻으려면, 장치 설정 메뉴에서 DivX VOD

섹션으로 이동하십시오. vod.divx.com을 방문하여 등록을 완료하는

방법에 대해 자세히 알아보십시오.

Information about software

This product uses the following software.

For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.

■ About Linux, Busybox, SquashFS, LIRC, U-boot

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,

but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and

change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your

freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its

users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s

software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free

Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License

instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General

Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute

copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source

code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in

new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain

responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you

must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know

their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this

license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone

understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified

by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is

not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the

original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to

avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent

licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it

clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed

by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General

Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a

“work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work

under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,

either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)

Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,

and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work

based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).

Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you

receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately

publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;

keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any

warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along

with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at

your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications

or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these

conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part

contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a

whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you

must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most

ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate

provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these

conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:

if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an

announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an

announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of

that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not

apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you

distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program,

the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions

for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless

of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the

Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution

medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)

in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above

provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code,

which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a

medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any

third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source

distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source

code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium

customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute

corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for

noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object

code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b

above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source

code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the

scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a

special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is

normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,

unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a

designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same

place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as

expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your

rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,

from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such

parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However,

nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its

derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this

License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based

on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its

terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works

based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may

not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted

herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this

License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for

any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License

and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute

the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free

redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly

through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be

to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either

by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places

the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution

limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or

among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the

limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in

spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or

concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a

version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the

option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later

version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a

version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free

Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For

software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free

Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be

guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free

software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA

BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR

THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH

ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY

HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can

redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the

start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each

file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is

found.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public

License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with

this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St,

Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this

when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes

with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free

software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type

‘show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts

of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called

something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu

items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;

alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into

proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more

useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you

want to do, use the GNU Library General

Public License instead of this License..

■ About glibc, libmtp, libusb, libusb-compat, DirectFB

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,

but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of

the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and

change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee

your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for

all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated

software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other

authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully

about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy

to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our

General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to

distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you

receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and

use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these

things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to

certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must

give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must

provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the

library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show

them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we

offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or

modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for

the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the

recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the

original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced

by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program.

We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free

program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist

that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the

full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General

Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to

certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public

License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those

libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the

combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original

library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the

entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License

permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect

the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free

software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These

disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many

libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special

circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest

possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,

non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a

free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is

little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser

General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a

greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission

to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the

whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it

does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom

and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work

that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the

latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

iii

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which

contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it

may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also

called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be

conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and

data) to form executables.

The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been

distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library

or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the

Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated

straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without

limitation in the term “modification”.)

“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for

all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts

used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is

not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute

a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing

it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that

uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source

code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and

appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer

of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence

of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your

option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or

work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these

conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third

parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be

supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an

argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith

effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function

or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose

remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is

entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d

requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must

be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still

compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of

that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not

apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you

distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the

distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for

other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of

who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library

(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium

does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License

instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all

the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General

Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than

version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can

specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these

notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary

GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works

made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a

program that is not a library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under

Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-

readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated

place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place

satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed

to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that

uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,

and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable

that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather

than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.

Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the

Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even

though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work

can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for

this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and

accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then

the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative

work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still

fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code

for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also

fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a ‘work that

uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the

Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the

terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse

engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in

it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy

of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must

include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference

directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work

(which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an

executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work

that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can

modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing

the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents

of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the

application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A

suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already

present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions

into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the

library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-

compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give

the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no

more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated

place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the

same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you

have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include

any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,

as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is

normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,

unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other

proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a

contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable

that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in

a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,

and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the

work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,

and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the

Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed

under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a

work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying

uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as

expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically

terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received

copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses

terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However,

nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its

derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this

License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on

the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms

and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based

on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights

granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties

with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for

any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License

and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute

the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free

redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly

through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be

to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either

by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places

the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution

limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or

among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the

limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar

in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or

concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a

version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the

option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later

version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a

license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free

Software Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for

permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,

write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.

Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all

derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software

generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA

BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR

THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH

ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY

HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and

change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,

under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach

them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of

warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where

the full notice is found.

<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C)

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms

of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public

License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along

with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple

Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample;

alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a

library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice

That’s all there is to it!

■ About Fusion

DirectFB Fusion kernel module: introduction and API

by Niels Roest

This documentation is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU General Public License as published by

the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any

later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU

General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this

program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

For more details see the ?le COPYING in the source distribution of Linux.

■ About openssl

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this

list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display

the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written

permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may

“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL

Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

acknowledgment:

‘This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISEDOF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following

conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this

distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The

SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright

terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given

attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a

textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided

with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are

permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display

the following acknowledgement:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from

the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps

directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of

this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under

another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

■ About zlib

This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event

will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the

following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you

wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an

acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not

required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler

[email protected] [email protected]

If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy

legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any

kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does

not include third-party code.

If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file

ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for

more information on the distribution of modified source versions.

■ About FreeType

The FreeType Project LICENSE

2006-Jan-27

David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg

Introduction

The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may

contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which

rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.

This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their

own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test

programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least.

This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group)

licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and

freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:

o We don’t promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any

kind of bug reports. (‘as is’ distribution)

o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without

having to pay us. (‘royalty-free’ usage)

o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in

a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have

used the FreeType code. (‘credits’)

We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without

modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The

FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.

Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in

compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text:

Portions of this software are copyright (C) <year> The FreeType Project

Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use.

Legal Terms

0. Definitions

Throughout this license, the terms ‘package’, ‘FreeType Project’, and ‘FreeType

archive’ refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the ‘FreeType Project’, be they named as

alpha, beta or final release.

‘You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where ‘using’ is a generic term

including compiling the project’s source code as well as linking it to form a ‘program’

or ‘executable’. This program is referred to as ‘a program using the FreeType engine’.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including

all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its

original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure

whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify

this.

1. No Warranty

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR

USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

2. Redistribution

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and

license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of,

distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms)

and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some

or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions:

o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (‘FTL.TXT’) unaltered;

any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in

accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files

must be preserved in all copies of source files.

o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software

is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation.

We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your

documentation, though this isn’t mandatory.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project,

not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However,

no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other

for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written

permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to

refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: ‘FreeType

Project’, ‘FreeType Engine’, ‘FreeType library’, or ‘FreeType Distribution’.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the

FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted

with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by

using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand

and accept all the terms of this license.

4. Contacts

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:

o [email protected]

Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted

additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if

you haven’t found anything to help you in the documentation.

o [email protected]

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.

Our home page can be found at

http://www.freetype.org

■ About Expat

and Clark Cooper

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,

publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons

to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or

substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS

OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR

OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

■ About cURL

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or

without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this

permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION

OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN

THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software

without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

■ About Independent JPEG group

The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software

README for release 7 of 27-Jun-2009

This distribution contains the seventh public release of the Independent JPEG Group’s

free JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any

purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below.

This software is the work of Tom Lane, Guido Vollbeding, Philip Gladstone, Bill

Allombert, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker, Bob Friesenhahn, Ben Jackson, Julian

Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Ge’ Weijers, and other members

of the Independent JPEG Group.

IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.

DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP

This file contains the following sections:

OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and the IJG software.

LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.

REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of this software.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Special thanks.

FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.

TO DO Plans for future IJG releases.

Other documentation files in the distribution are:

User documentation:

install.txt How to configure and install the IJG software.

usage.txt Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and

wrjpgcom.

*.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage.txt).

wizard.txt Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.

change.log Version-to-version change highlights.

Programmer and internal documentation:

libjpeg.txt How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.

example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library.

structure.txt Overview of the JPEG library’s internal structure.

filelist.txt Road map of IJG files.

coderules.txt Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.

Please read at least the files install.txt and usage.txt. Some information can also be

found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE

LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article.

If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more

of the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order

listed) before diving into the code.

OVERVIEW

This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and

transcoding. JPEG (pronounced “jay-peg”) is a standardized compression method for

full-color and gray-scale images.

This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive

compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes,

although some uncommon parameter settings aren’t implemented yet. We have made

no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined in the

standard.

We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two

sample applications “cjpeg” and “djpeg”, which use the library to perform conversion

between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be

reused in other applications.

In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included

considerable functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for

example, the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but

they are essential for output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays.

These extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular

application.

We have also included “jpegtran”, a utility for lossless transcoding between different

JPEG processes, and “rdjpgcom” and “wrjpgcom”, two simple applications for

inserting and extracting textual comments in JFIF files.

The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and

flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is

not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for

introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength

code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but

we strive for it.

We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No

royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation,

as described under LEGAL ISSUES.

LEGAL ISSUES

In plain English:

1. We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us

know!)

2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don’t have to pay us.

3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you

must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you’ve used the IJG code.

In legalese:

The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with

respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular

purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user, assume the entire risk as

to its quality and accuracy.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or

portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:

(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file

must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any

additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in

accompanying documentation.

(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must

state that “this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group”.

(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full

responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for

damages of any kind.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just

to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.

Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or company name in

advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This

software may be referred to only as “the Independent JPEG Group’s software”.

We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of

commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the

product vendor.

ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole

proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is

NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual

distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must include

source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However,

since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this

does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.

The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is

for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltmain.sh). Another support script,

install-sh, is copyright by X Consortium but is also freely distributable.

The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid

entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed

altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce “uncompressed GIFs”.

This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than

usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.

We are required to state that

“The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of

CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of

CompuServe Incorporated.”

REFERENCES

We recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to understand the

innards of the JPEG software.

The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is

Wallace, Gregory K. “The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard”,

vii

Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44.

(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications

of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don’t have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file

containing a revised version of Wallace’s article is available at http://www.ijg.org/files/

wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE Trans.

Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it

includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright

ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.

A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in “The

Data Compression Book” by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T

Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good

explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including

JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don’t know

much about data compression in general. The book’s JPEG sample code is far from

industrial-strength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you’ve got

one here...

The best currently available description of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still Image

Data Compression Standard” by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell,

published by Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95,

638 pp. The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1

and draft DIS 10918-2).

Although this is by far the most detailed and comprehensive exposition of JPEG

publicly available, we point out that it is still missing an explanation of the most

essential properties and algorithms of the underlying DCT technology.

If you think that you know about DCT-based JPEG after reading this book, then you are

in delusion. The real fundamentals and corresponding potential of DCT-based JPEG are

not publicly known so far, and that is the reason for all the mistaken developments

taking place in the image coding domain.

The original JPEG standard is divided into two parts, Part 1 being the actual

specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods. Part 1 is titled “Digital

Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 1: Requirements and

guidelines” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81. Part 2 is

titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 2:

Compliance testing” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83.

The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the

omitted details we follow the “JFIF” conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF

spec is available from:

Literature Department

C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.

1778 McCarthy Blvd.

Milpitas, CA 95035

phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314

A PostScript version of this document is available at http://www.ijg.org/files/jfif.ps.gz.

There is also a plain text version at http://www.ijg.org/files/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing

the figures.

The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/

graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec

of 3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the

TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design

proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be

obtained from http://www.ijg.org/files/. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF

spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note’s design. Although IJG’s own code

does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/

JPEG per the Note.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS

The “official” archive site for this software is www.ijg.org. The most recent released

version can always be found there in directory “files”. This particular version will be

archived as http://www.ijg.org/files/jpegsrc.v7.tar.gz, and in Windows-compatible

“zip” archive format as http://www.ijg.org/files/jpegsr7.zip.

The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a source of some general

information about JPEG. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/

faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official

news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/news.answers/

jpeg-faq/. If you don’t have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to mail-

[email protected] with body

send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1

send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Thank to Juergen Bruder of the Georg-Cantor-Organization at the Martin-Luther-

University Halle for providing me with a copy of the common DCT algorithm article,

only to find out that I had come to the same result in a more direct and comprehensible

way with a more generative approach.

Thank to Istvan Sebestyen and Joan L. Mitchell for inviting me to the ITU JPEG (Study

Group 16) meeting in Geneva, Switzerland.

Thank to Thomas Wiegand and Gary Sullivan for inviting me to the Joint Video Team

(MPEG & ITU) meeting in Geneva, Switzerland.

Thank to John Korejwa and Massimo Ballerini for inviting me to fruitful consultations

in Boston, MA and Milan, Italy.

Thank to Hendrik Elstner, Roland Fassauer, and Simone Zuck for corresponding

business development.

Thank to Nico Zschach and Dirk Stelling of the technical support team at the Digital

Images company in Halle for providing me with extra equipment for configuration

tests.

Thank to Richard F. Lyon (then of Foveon Inc.) for fruitful communication about JPEG

configuration in Sigma Photo Pro software.

Last but not least special thank to Thomas G. Lane for the original design and

development of this singular software package.

FILE FORMAT WARS

The ISO JPEG standards committee actually promotes different formats like JPEG-

2000 or JPEG-XR which are incompatible with original DCT-based JPEG and which

are based on faulty technologies. IJG therefore does not and will not support such

momentary mistakes (see REFERENCES). We have little or no sympathy for the

promotion of these formats. Indeed, one of the original reasons for developing this free

software was to help force convergence on common, interoperable format standards for

JPEG files. Don’t use an incompatible file format! (In any case, our decoder will remain

capable of reading existing JPEG image files indefinitely.)

TO DO

v7 is basically just a necessary interim release, paving the way for a major breakthrough

in image coding technology with the next v8 package which is scheduled for release in

the year 2010.

Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to [email protected].

■ About International Components for Unicode

ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,

publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom

the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this

permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both the above copyright

notice(s) and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS

NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER

RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,

ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE

OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software

without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their

respective owners.

■ About libpng

This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any

discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the

libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.

If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this

sentence.

libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.35, February 14, 2009, are

to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added

to the list of Contributing Authors

Cosmin Truta

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright

disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the

list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or

against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill

any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults,

and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with

the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (C)

1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same

disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of

Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,

with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

viii

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the

following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group

42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the

warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors

and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special,

exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG

Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or

portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented

as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered

source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and

encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format

in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is

not required but would be appreciated.

A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and

the like:

printf(“%s”,png_get_copyright(NULL));

Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files “pngbar.png” and

“pngbar.jpg (88x31) and “pngnow.png” (98x31).

Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a

certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

glennrp at users.sourceforge.net

February 14, 2009

■ About tinyxml

www.sourceforge.net/projects/tinyxml

(www.grinninglizard.com)

This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event

will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including

commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the

following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you

wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in

the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be

misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

■ About dtoa and strtod

The author of this software is David M. Gay.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without

fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any

software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies

of the supporting documentation for such software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR

LUCENT MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND

CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS

FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

■ About gSOAP

gSOAP Public License

Version 1.3b

The gSOAP public license is derived from the Mozilla Public License (MPL1.1). The

sections that were deleted

from the original MPL1.1 text are 1.0.1, 2.1.(c),(d), 2.2.(c),(d), 8.2.(b), 10, and 11.

Section 3.8 was added. The

modified sections are 2.1.(b), 2.2.(b), 3.2 (simplified), 3.5 (deleted the last sentence),

and 3.6 (simplified).

This license applies to the gSOAP software package, with the exception of the wsdl2h

source code located in

gsoap/wsdl, all code generated by wsdl2h, the UDDI source code gsoap/uddi2, and the

Web server sample

source code samples/webserver. To use all of the software commercially, a commercial

license has to be obtained

from www.genivia.com.

1 DEFINITIONS.

1.0.1.

1.1. “Contributor” means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of

Modifications.

1.2. “Contributor Version” means the combination of the Original Code, prior

Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular

Contributor.

1.3. “Covered Code” means the Original Code, or Modifications or the combination of

the Original Code, and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.

1.4. “Electronic Distribution Mechanism” means a mechanism generally accepted in

the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.

1.5. “Executable” means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.

1.6. “Initial Developer” means the individual or entity identified as the Initial

Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A.

1.7. “Larger Work” means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof

with code not governed by the terms of this License.

1.8. “License” means this document.

1.8.1. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible,

whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights

conveyed herein.

1.9. “Modifications” means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure

of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is

released as a series of files, a Modification is: A.

Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or

previous Modifications. B.

Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code, or previous Modifications.

1.10. “Original Code” means Source Code of computer software code which is

described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which,

at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by

this License.

1.10.1. “Patent Claims” means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired,

including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent

Licensable by grantor.

http://www.cs.fsu.edu/~engelen/license.html

1.11. “Source Code” means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making

modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface

definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or

source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well

known, available Covered Code of the Contributor’s choice. The Source Code can be in

a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving

software is widely available for no charge.

1.12. “You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under,

and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License

issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which controls, is

controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition,

“control” means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management

of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty

percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

2 SOURCE CODE LICENSE.

2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-

wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property

claims:

(a)

under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial

Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the

Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a

Larger Work; and

(b)

under patents now or hereafter owned or controlled by Initial Developer, to make, have

made, use and sell (“offer to sell and import”) the Original Code, Modifications, or

portions thereof, but solely to the extent that any such patent is reasonably necessary to

enable You to utilize, alone or in combination with other software, the Original Code,

Modifications, or any combination or portions thereof.

(c)

(d)

2.2. Contributor Grant.

Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a

world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license

(a)

under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by

Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the

Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified

basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and

(b)

under patents now or hereafter owned or controlled by Contributor, to make, have

made, use and sell (“offer to sell and import”) the Contributor Version (or portions

thereof), but solely to the extent that any such patent is reasonably necessary to enable

You to utilize, alone or in combination with other software, the Contributor Version (or

portions thereof).

(c)

(d)

3 DISTRIBUTION OBLIGATIONS.

3.1. Application of License.

The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the

terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code

version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a

future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy

of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer

or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable

version of this License or the recipients’ rights hereunder. However, You may include

an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.

3.2. Availability of Source Code.

Any Modification created by You will be provided to the Initial Developer in Source

Code form and are subject to the terms of the License.

3.3. Description of Modifications.

You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file

documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any

change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived,

directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and

including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice

in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or

ownership of the Covered Code.

3.4. Intellectual Property Matters.

(a) Third Party Claims.

If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party’s intellectual property

rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1

or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled

“LEGAL” which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail

that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after

the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall

promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter

and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)

reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new

knowledge has been obtained.

(b) Contributor APIs.

If Contributor’s Modifications include an application programming interface and

Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to

implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file.

Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above,

Contributor believes that Contributor’s Modifications are Contributor’s original

creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this

License.

3.5. Required Notices.

You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not

possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You

must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would

be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may

add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also

duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe

recipients’ rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to

offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to

one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own

behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor.

3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.

You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of

Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code. You may distribute the

Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your

choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in

compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable

version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source Code

version from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the Executable version

under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ

from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any

Contributor. If you distribute executable versions containing Covered Code as part of a

product, you must reproduce the notice in Exhibit B in the documentation and/or other

materials provided with the product.

3.7. Larger Works.

You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not

governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single

product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are

fulfilled for the Covered Code.

3.8. Restrictions.

You may not remove any product identification, copyright, proprietary notices or labels

from gSOAP.

4 INABILITY TO COMPLY DUE TO STATUTE OR REGULATION.

If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect

to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You

must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and

(b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included

in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions

of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such

description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to

understand it.

5 APPLICATION OF THIS LICENSE.

This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in

Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.

6 VERSIONS OF THE LICENSE.

6.1. New Versions.

Grantor may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time.

Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.

6.2. Effect of New Versions.

Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You

may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to

use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License.

6.3. Derivative Works.

If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order

to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You

must (a) rename Your license so that the phrase “gSOAP” or any confusingly similar

phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this

License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms

which differ from the gSOAP Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial

Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not

of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)

7 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.

COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN “AS IS” BASIS,

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

STATUTORY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL

PROPERTY RIGHTS, AND ANY WARRANTY THAT MAY ARISE BY REASON

OF TRADE USAGE, CUSTOM, OR COURSE OF DEALING. WITHOUT

LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE

IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND THAT THE AUTHORS DO NOT WARRANT THE

SOFTWARE WILL RUN UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LIMITED

LIABILITY THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE

SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE

AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE

WHATSOEVER, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF THE

AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED ON THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE

OR IF SUCH DAMAGE COULD HAVE BEEN REASONABLY FORESEEN, AND

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED. SUCH LIMITATION ON DAMAGES

INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,

LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA OR SOFTWARE, WORK STOPPAGE,

COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR IMPAIRMENT OF OTHER

GOODS. IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR THE COSTS OF

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. YOU

ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN ON-

LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS SUCH AS OPERATION

OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR CONTROL, OR LIFE-

CRITICAL APPLICATIONS. THE AUTHORS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY

LIABILITY RESULTING FROM USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY SUCH ON-

LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS AND ACCEPTS NO

LIABILITY IN RESPECT OF ANY ACTIONS OR CLAIMS BASED ON THE USE

OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY SUCH ON-LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS

ENVIRONMENTS BY YOU. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS PARAGRAPH, THE

TERM “LIFE- CRITICAL APPLICATION” MEANS AN APPLICATION IN

WHICH THE FUNCTIONING OR MALFUNCTIONING OF THE SOFTWARE

MAY RESULT DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN PHYSICAL INJURY OR LOSS

OF HUMAN LIFE. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN

ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS

AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.

8 TERMINATION.

8.1.

This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to

comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming

aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted

shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must

remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.

8.2.

8.3.

If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such

Participant’s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such

claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent

infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such

Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the

amount or value of any payment or license.

8.4.

In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license

agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by

You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination.

9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL

YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY

DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH

PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,

WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND

ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY

SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR

DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S

NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH

LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR

LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS

EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

10 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.

11 MISCELLANEOUS.

12 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.

As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims

and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this

License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute

such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed

to constitute any admission of liability.

EXHIBIT A.

“The contents of this file are subject to the gSOAP Public License Version 1.3 (the

“License”); you may not use this

file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License

athttp://www.cs.fsu.edu/ engelen/soaplicense.html

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” basis, WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the

specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.

The Original Code of the gSOAP Software is: stdsoap.h, stdsoap2.h, stdsoap.c,

stdsoap2.c, stdsoap.cpp,

stdsoap2.cpp, soapcpp2.h, soapcpp2.c, soapcpp2_lex.l, soapcpp2_yacc.y, error2.h,

error2.c, symbol2.c, init2.c,

soapdoc2.html, and soapdoc2.pdf, httpget.h, httpget.c, stl.h, stldeque.h, stllist.h,

stlvector.h, stlset.h.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Robert A. van Engelen. Portions created

by Robert A. van Engelen are

Contributor(s):

“________________________.”

[Note: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly form the text of the notices in the

Source Code files of the Original code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather

than the text found in the Original Code Source Codefor Your Modifications.]

EXHIBIT B.

“Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software.

PART PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.”

http://www.cs.fsu.edu/~engelen/license.html

■ About fonts

Fonts are (c) Bitstream (see below). DejaVu changes are in public domain.

Glyphs imported from Arev fonts are (c) Tavmjong Bah (see below)

Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright

------------------------------

trademark of Bitstream, Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts

accompanying this license (“Fonts”) and associated documentation files (the “Font

Software”), to reproduce and distribute the Font Software, including without limitation

the rights to use, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Font

Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished to do so,

subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included

in all copies of one or more of the Font Software typefaces.

The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in particular the designs

of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or

characters may be added to the Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not

containing either the words “Bitstream” or the word “Vera”.

This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software

that has been modified and is distributed under the “Bitstream Vera” names.

The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but no copy of one

or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself.

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT,

TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE

GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO

USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT

SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome Foundation, and

Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or

other dealings in this Font Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome

Foundation or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, contact: fonts at

gnome dot org.

Arev Fonts Copyright

------------------------------

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts

accompanying this license (“Fonts”) and associated documentation files (the “Font

Software”), to reproduce and distribute the modifications to the Bitstream Vera Font

Software, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, merge, publish,

distribute, and/or sell copies of the Font Software, and to permit persons to whom the

Font Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included

in all copies of one or more of the Font Software typefaces.

The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in particular the designs

of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or

characters may be added to the Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not

containing either the words “Tavmjong Bah” or the word “Arev”.

This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software

that has been modified and is distributed under the “Tavmjong Bah Arev” names.

The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but no copy of one

or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself.

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT,

TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAVMJONG BAH BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of Tavmjong Bah shall not be used in

advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font Software

without prior written authorization from Tavmjong Bah. For further information,

contact: tavmjong @ free. fr.

BD-A1010

Printed in Malaysia WZ02530

BLU-RAY DISC PLAYER

BD-A1010

OWNER’S MANUAL

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

사용 설명서

KALVP

(전원 키)

본 기기의 전원을 켜거나 대기 모드에 맞추십시오.

00_BD-A1010_K_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, April 19, 2011 2:52 PM

Yamaha BD-A1010 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: BD-A1010

Categoría: Reproductores de Blu-Ray

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Descargar PDF

informe

En otros idiomas

English: Yamaha BD-A1010 Owner's manual

Documentos relacionados

Otros documentos

HP MP200 Manual de usuario